A Dictionary of Sanskrit Grammar
| A Dictionary of Sanskrit Grammar Mahamahopadhyaya Kashinath Vasudev Abhyankar |
Gaekwad's Oriental Series
Published under the Authority of
the Maharaja Sayajirao University
of Baroda.
General Editor :
B. J. Sandesara,
M.A., Ph.D.
No. 134
A DICTIONARY
OF
SANSKRIT GRAMMAR
A DICTIONARY
OF
SANSKRIT GRAMMAR
by
Mahāmahopādhyāya
KASHINATH VASUDEV ABHYANKAR, M.A.
Retired Professor of Sanskrit, Gujarat College, Ahmedabad.
Hon. Professor of Sanskrit, Bhandarkar Oriental Research Institute, Poona
ORIENTAL INSTITUTE
BARODA
1961
Printed (on behalf of the M. S. University of Baroda Press)
by M. N. Chapekar, Aryasanskriti Mudranalaya, 1575/2
Sadashiv, Tilak Road, Poona 2, and Published on behalf of
the Maharaja Sayajirao University of Baroda by Dr. Bhogilal,
J. Sandesara, Director, Oriental Institute, Baroda, March, 1961.
- Price Rs. 25=00
Copies can be had from—
Manager,
The University Publications Sales Unit,
M. S. University of Baroda Press ( Sadhana Press ),
near Palace Gate, Palace Road, BARODA.
DEDICATED
to
The Memory of
the late Mahāmahopādhyāya
VASUDEV SHASTRI ABHYANKAR
my father, whose example has inspired
me to undertake this and similar
other works on Sanskrit Grammar.
FOREWORD
We take this opportunity to place before the world of Sanskrit scholars this Dictionary of Sanskrit Grammar, which, we are confident, will be an indispensable reference book for all students working in this field as well as allied branches of knowledge.
Prof.Kashinath Vasudev Abhyankar has the good fortune to inherit traditional Sanskrit learning from his father, Mahāmahopādhyāya Pandit Vasudevashastri Abhyankar, who is well known for his translations of The Brahmasūtra Śāṅkara Bhāṣya and The Pātañjala Mahābhāṣya. Prof. Abhyankar had a brilliant academic career and is a reputed teacher and a very well known scholar of Sanskrit Grammar and Prakrit language and literature. He has himself edited several books, and is at present bringing out revised editions of The Pātañjala Mahābhāṣya and Paribhāṣenduśekhara and has compiled a Paribhāsāsaṅgraha, all of which are being published by the Bhandarkar Oriental Research Institute, Poona. His exhaustive introduction to The Pātañjala Mahābhāṣya is enough to show that he is pre-eminently qualified for preparing this Dictionary of Sanskrit Grammar, which is a valuable product of a life-time of devoted scholarship.
We are thankful to the University Grants Commission and the State Government for the liberal financial assistance they have given towards publication of this work.
| Oriental Institute, Baroda, | |
| 17–3–1961. |
B. J. Sandesara
Director
- Object of this Dictionary
No apology is needed for undertaking the compilation of the present 'Dictionary of Sanskrit Grammar', which, although concise, is expected to meet the needs of Sanskrit scholars and research students of Vyākaraṇa and other Shastras by serving as a useful reference book in their study of, and research work in, any branch of Sanskrit learning. The many independent treatises in the several Shastras and the learned commentaries upon them, as also the commentaries on classical poems and dramas, are, in fact, full of grammatical explanations of words and constructions, involving a liberal use of grammatical expressions and technical terms at several places. The elementary knowledge of grammar which a general scholar of Sanskrit possesses, is not found sufficient for his understanding fully the grammatical references in these books, especially so at present, when the practice of sending young boys to the Tolls and Sanskrit pāṭhashālas to study the standard classical works with commentaries along with some standard elementary treatises on grammar, has already stopped. The number of Sanskrit Pandits and Shastris,who had to obtain a sound footing in grammar before they undertook the study of the higher texts of the several Shastras, and who therefore could be consulted by young scholars and research workers in the several Shastras, has also diminished considerably. The usual Sanskrit Dictionaries such as those of Monier Williams, V.S.Apte and others are found of no avail in supplying explanations of the grammatical technique which confronts modern scholars at every step in their critical reading of the several Sanskrit texts. In these circumstances it is only the technical dictionaries of the type of the present 'Dictionary of Sanskrit Grammar' that can render a valuable assistance to scholars and research workers in their reading of the higher Sanskrit texts in the several Shastras.
- Beginnings of Sanskrit Grammar
Every science has necessarily its own terminology and a special vocabulary. The remark is true with respect to Sanskrit Grammar or Vyākaraṇaśāstra which has developed as a science during the last two thousand years and has got several technical terms and numerous words with a special grammatical significance. The origin of grammar can well-nigh be traced to the Period of the Brāhmaṇas i. e. about 2000 B.C., when Vedic scholars began to discuss the meaning of the inspired Vedic hymns by carefully showing disconnected, the words of the Vedic hymns and noting down the differences in accents as also the changes caused by their coalescence in the continuous recital or the Saṁhitāpāṭha. They also tried to explain the sense of the Vedic words by tracing them back to the roots of suitable senses and laid down rules for their proper and correct
x
pronunciation. These three pursuits viz. (a) the discussion of the features of the Pada text, (b) the derivation of words, and (c) directions regarding the proper pronunciation of the Vedic words, were carried on with vigour with a view to preserving the Vedic texts intact, and the treatises dealing with these three branches were respectively called by the names prātiśākhya, Nirukta and Śikṣā, all of which could rightly be called Vyākaraṇa or Grammar, as they were devoted to determining the correct words as distinguished from the incorrect ones. Although a number of books were written by Vedic scholars in these three branches, not more than five or six Prātiśākhya works, a solitary Nirukta work, and a few Śikṣā works are the only available works at present.
- Development of Sanskrit Grammar
In course of time, on Ihe analogy of the derivation of words, an analysis of the word into its constituent elements such as the base, the affix, the augments and the modifications, was undertaken by grammarians. This separation of the different elements of a word constituted vyākaraṇa or grammar, which was developed as an art by ancient grammarians like Āpiśali, Śākaṭāyana and others before Pānini. It was Pāṇini who carried it to perfection, and his work, the Aṣṭādhyāyī, compact yet exhaustive, and laconic yet clear,is simply a marvellous product of art by a man of amazing intelligence. As a result, the works on grammar by all ancient scholars who flourished before Pāṇini disappeared in course of time leaving only a few quotations behind them. Pāṇini was followed by a number of grammarians who wrote popular treatises on grammar, based, no doubt, on Pāṇini's grammar, some of which, in their turn came to have auxiliary works, glosses and explanatory commentaries. These different treatises, written by Sarvavarman, Candragomin, Devanandin, Pālyakīrti Śākaṭāyana, Hemacandra, Kramadīśvara, Jumaranandin, Supadma and others with their auxiliary works and commentaries, came to be looked upon as different systems of grammar. These treatises present two kinds of treatment : some of them are arranged in Sutras in the same manner as the Aṣṭādhyāyī of Pāṇini which treats one after another the several grammatical elements such as technical terms, padas of roots, case-relations, compound words, kṛt affixes, taddhita affixes, substitutes, accents and euphonic changes; while others give a topic-wise treatment following in that respect the ancient grammarians before Pāṇini such as Indra, Vedic Śākaṭāyana and others who treated one after another the different topics of grammar such as the euphonic changes, declension, conjugation, compound formation, nouns derived from roots, nouns derived from nouns and the like. The special feature of all these grammars was that they entirely omitted the Vedic peculiarities and accents.
- Sanskrit Grammar as a Science
The subject of Sanskrit grammar was first treated as a science by the two epoch-making grammarians, first by Kātyāyana a few centuries after Pāṇini,
xi
and then by Patañjali, the exponent of Kātyāyana who lived in the second century B. C. It was carried to perfection by the stalwart grammarian Bhartṛhari of the seventh century A. D. Later grammarians, prominent among whom were Jayāditya, Vāmana, Kaiyaṭa, Haradatta, Bhaṭṭojī, Koṇḍabhaṭṭa and Nāgeśa, developed by their substantial contributions, the work of Pāṇini as a science to such an extent that the number of smaller and greater works well nigh rose to eight hundred and that of the authors to four hundred. The grammar of Pāṇini, which is looked upon as the standard one at present gives about a hundred technical terms, more than two hundred suffixes, about two thousand primary roots and more than five thousand special words arranged in more than two hundred and fifty classes according to the special grammatical peculiarities shown by each class. The number of independent primary words, besides these five thousand special words, if roughly estimated, may exceed even twenty-five thousand. Besides these primary roots, primary nouns, affixes and technical terms in the different Shastras, there is a vast number of secondary roots and secondary nouns, which is rather impossible even to be approximately determined.
- Nature and Scope of this Dictionary
The preparation of a comprehensive dictionary of Sanskrit Grammar, a subject which has been developed fully by Sanskrit Grammarians for the last two thousand years, is certainly a stupendous work which can only be done by a band of grammarians who have got a sound footing in the subject. In the light of what has been said above, the present dictionary is only an honest and humble attempt in that direction made by the compiler who was inspired to undertake this rather arduous venture by his close study of the subject for more than sixty years according to the traditional method of the East, combined with the critical and comparative method of the West. As the work was done single-handed, and finished within a limited time with a view to making it available to students and scholars of Sanskrit at as early a date as possible, the number of books consulted was a limited one. The number of entries is more than four thousand out of which the important ones are in the form of short articles supplying very briefly the necessary information from the different sources with quotations from or references to the original works. All the standard works in grammar have been carefully consulted including the available Prātiśākhya works, the Mahābhāṣya, the Kāśikā, the Vākyapadīya, the Siddhānta-Kaumudi and others. The Kātantra, the Śākatāyana, the Jainendra, the Haima and other grammars, as also the different Paribhāṣa works have been consulted at important places. Minor works and commentaries are not consulted as the important words and topics occurring therein have been mostly included here on account of their occurrence in the major works. Attention is, of course, paid to grammatical importance and significance, and only such such words and such senses of them as have a grammatical significance, have been included in the present dictionary along with affixes, augments, substitutes and technical terms mostly given
xii
- Conclusion
Acknowledgements are due to Mr. M. N. Chapekar, Aryasanskriti Mudranalaya, Poona, who has given ample co-operation in getting this Dictionary printed in the shortest possible time. For facility of printing, accents of Vedic passages and words are not shown, nor italics have been used for Sanskrit terms written in the Roman script nor the breaking of a word at the end of a line is done scrupulously at the end of a syllable or a constituent part. In spite of all possible care, some slips have crept in for which the indulgence of the reader is craved. It is expected that Sanskrit scholars will make full use of this work and offer their valuable suggestions for future undertakings of this type.
A sincere sense of gratitude must be conveyed to Dr. Bhogilal J. Sandesara, the Director of the Oriental Institute, Baroda, at whose initiative the project of this ' Dictionary of Sanskrit Grammar, undertaken some years ago, but postponed from time to time, was not only pursued with vigour, but completed and turned into a volume in the Gaekwad Oriental Series.
| 601-2 Sadashiv Peth, | |
| Laxmi Road, Poona 2. | |
| Varshapratipadā, Shake 1883. | |
|
17-3-61. |
K. V. Abhyankar.
l. Words in this dictionary are arranged in the serial order of the Sanskrit alphabet which is current everywhere, viz. the fourteen vowels beginning with अ and ending with औ, and then the thirty-three consonants consisting of the five guttural, the five palatal, the five cerebral, the five dental and the five labial consonants and then the four semi-vowels and the four sibilants. क्ष् is taken as a combination of क् and ष्, and ज्ञ् as one of ज् and ञ्.
2. Words are given in their noun-base (प्रातिपदिक) such as अकर्मक, अकार, अक्षर etc., without the addition of any case affix.
3. At places of option where any one of the anusvāra and the parasavarṇa could be used, the anusvāra is consistently used, and a place after the vowels and before the consonants is assigned to it in the alphabetical order. For example, the words containing anusvāra such as संकर्ष, संक्रम, संचय, संज्ञा, संतान, संधि, संप्रसारण, संयोग, संवरण, संसर्ग, संहिता etc., are all placed after स and before सक्, सकर्मक etc.
4, Each word entered, has got only one paragraph assigned to it, although the explanation of the word may cover sometimes a full page or more.
5. The meaning or meanings of a word are given immediately after it, and therefore no capital letter is used at the beginning of the word with which each meaning begins.
6. The various senses of a word are given one after another with serial numbers placed before them. The several senses of a word are arranged as far as possible in their chronological order of origin.
7. The various senses are usually illustrated with quotations from standard authors with full references as far as possible. From among the Prātiśākhya works, the Ṛkprātiśākhya is generally quoted,while from among the numerous grammar works, the Mahābhāṣya and the Kāśikā are quoted profusely.
8. The first figure in references, which is generally the Roman one, refers to the main section such as the adhyāya or the Kāṇda or the Paṭala, while the next one refers to the subordinate sections, such as the stanza or the Sūtra or the like. When there are three figures they refer to the adhyāya, the pāda and the Sūtra in the case of Pāṇini, and to the Maṇḍala,the Sūkta and the stanza in the case of the Ṛksaṁhitā.
9. When a particular form is illustrated, the illustration begins with the abbreviation 'e.g.'; while usually, when the sense given is illustrated, the explanation or the quotation in Sanskrit begins with the abbreviation 'cf'.
10. Each of the different senses of a word or of the uses of a word in different ways, begins with a separate number (1), (2), (3), etc.; when however, the same sense is given with different shades of it, by words which are practically synonymous, no separate numbers are given, the shades of senses being separated by a colon, or by a comma.
11. As the senses given in such dictionaries are more or less technical or conventional, the literal or the usual sense of the words is given only when it is allied to the conventional sense.
12. Sanskrit words are generally given in the Devanāgari script; when, however, the Roman script is used, the diacritical marks which are in current use at present, are employed.
A. Pr.= Atharvaveda Prātiśākhya. |
Kaś. viv. = Kāśikāvivaraṇapañjikā, known by the name Nyāsa. |
Padamañjarī=Padamañjarī, a commentary |
Śṛing-Prak. = Sṛingāraprakāśa of Bhoja. |
abl. ablative case, |
ind. indeclinable. |
A Dictionary of Sanskrit Grammar.
अ (1) the first letter of the alphabet in Sanskrit and its derived languages, representing the sound a (अ); (2) the vowel a (अ) representing in grammatical treatises, except when prescribed as an affix or an augment or a substitute, all its eighteen varieties caused by accentuation or nasalisation or lengthening; (3) personal ending a (अ) of the perf. sec. pl. and first and third pers. sing.; (4) kṛt affix a (अ) prescribed especially after the denominative and secondary roots in the sense of the verbal activity, e. g. बुभुक्षां, चिन्ता, ईक्षा, चर्चा, etc., cf. अ प्रत्ययात् etc. (P. III 3.102-106); (5) sign of the aorist mentioned as añ (अङ्) or cañ (चङ्) by Pāṇini in P. III 1.48 to 59 e.g. अगमत्, अचीकरत्; (6) conjugational sign mentioned as śap (शप्) or śa (श) by Pāṇini in P. III. 1.68, 77. e.g. भवति, तुदति etc.; (7) augment am (अम्) as prescribed by P. VI. 1.58; e.g. द्रष्टा, द्रक्ष्यति; (8) augment aṭ (अट्) prefixed to a root in the imperf. and aorist tenses and in the conditional mood, e.g. अभवत्, अभूत्, अभविष्यत्, cf. P. VI. 4.71; (8) kṛt affix a (अ) prescribed as अङ्, अच्, अञ्, अण्, अन्, अप्, क, ख, घ, ञ, ड, ण, etc. in the third Adhyāya of Pāṇini’s Aṣṭādhyāyī; (9) tad. affix a (अ) mentioned by Pāṇini as अच्, अञ्, अण्, अ, etc. in the fourth and the fifth chapters of the Aṣṭādhyāyī of Pāṇini; (10) the samāsānta affix a (अ), as also stated in the form of the samāsānta affixes (डच्, अच्, टच्, षच्, ष्, अष् and अञ्) by Pāṇini in V. 4.73 to 121; (11) substitute a (अश्) accented grave for इदम
|
before case-affixes beginning with the ins. case; (12) remnant (अ) of the negative particle नञ् after the elision of the consonant n (न्) by नलोपो नञः P. VI. 3.73.
अं (ं) nasal utterance called अनुस्वार and written as a dot above the vowel preceding it, cf. स्वरमनु संलीनं शब्द्यते इति; it is pronounced after a vowel as immersed in it. The anusvāra is considered (1) as only a nasalization of the preceding vowel being in a way completely amalgamated with it, cf. T. Pr. V. 11,31; XV. 1; XXII. 14; (2) as a nasal addition to the preceding vowel, many times prescribed in grammar as nuṭ (नुट् ) or num (नुम्), which is changed into anusvāra, in case it is looked upon as a sort of a vowel, while it is looked upon as a consonant when it is changed into a cognate of the following consonant (परसवर्ण) or retained as n (न्), cf. P. VIII. 4.58; (3) as a kind cf consonant of the type of nasalized half g (ग्) as described in some treatises of the Yajurveda Prātiśākhya: cf. also R. Pr. 1.22, V. Pr. 14.148-9. The vowel element of the anusvāra became more prevalent later on in Pali, Prakrit, Apabhraṁśa and in the spoken modern languages, while the consonantal element became more predominant in classical Sanskrit.
अंशिसमास the same as एकदेशिसमास or अवयवसमास or अवयवषष्ठीतत्पुरुष prescribed by the rule पूर्वापराधरोत्तरोमकदेशिनैका-
|
धिकरणे P. II. 2.1 and the following P. II. 2.2 and 3; e.g.
पूर्वकायः, अपरकायः, अर्धपिप्पली, etc.
अंशुगण, also अंश्वादिगण a class of words, headed by अंशु, which have their last vowel accented acute when they stand at the end of a tatpuruṣa compound with the word प्रति as the first member. cf. P. VI. 2.193.
अः ( : ) visarga, called visarjanīya in ancient works, and shown in writing by two dots, one below the other, exactly of the same size, like the pair of breasts of a maiden as jocularly expressed by Durgasiṁha. cf. अः इति विसर्जनीयः । अकार इह उच्चारणार्थः । कुमारीस्तनयुगाकृतिर्वर्णो विसजर्नीयसंज्ञो भवति (दुर्गसिंह on कातन्त्र I. 1.16). विसर्ग is always a dependent letter included among the Ayogavāha letters, and it is looked upon as a vowel when it forms a part of the preceding vowel; while it is looked upon as a consonant when it is changed into the Jihvāmūlīya or the Upadhmānīya letter.
अ (ೱ) क् (ೱ) जिह्वामूलीय, represented by a sign like the वज्र in writing, as stated by Durgasiṁha, who remarks वज्राकृतिर्वर्णो जिह्वामूलीयसंज्ञो भवति. The Jihvāmūlīya is only a voiceless breath following the utterance of a vowel and preceding the utterance of the guttural letter क् or ख्. It is looked upon as a letter (वर्ण), but dependent upon the following consonant and hence looked upon as a consonant, e. g. विष्णु ೱ करोति.
अ ೱ प् (ೱ) Upadhmānīya represented by a sign like the temple of an elephant, as stated by Durgasiṁha, who remarks "गजकुम्भाकृतिर्वर्ण उपध्मानीयसंज्ञो भवति." Kāt. I. It is a voiceless breath following the utterance of a vowel and preceding the utterance of the labial letter p (प्) or ph (फ). It
|
is looked upon as a letter (वर्ण), but dependent upon the following consonant and hence looked upon as a consonant.
अ:कार name given to the nom. case in the Taittiriya Prātiśākhya, cf. अ:कार इति प्रथमाविभक्तेरुपलक्षणम् T. Pr. I. 23.
अक् (1) condensed expression (प्रत्याहार) representing the letters अ, इ, उ, ऋ and लृ in Pāṇini's Grammar cf. P. VI. 1.12, 101; VII. 4.2. (2) sign (विकरण) of the benedictive in Vedic Literature in the case of the root दृश्, e.g. पितरं च दृशेयं P. III. 1.86 V. 2; (3) remnant of the termination अकच् P. V. 3.71; (4) substitute (आदेश) अकङ् for the last vowel of the word मुधातृ (P. IV. 1.97), e.g. सोघातकिः.
अक (1) affix अक substituted for the affix वु given in Pāṇini's Grammar as –ण्वुच् as in आशिका, शायिका (P. III. 3.111); ण्वुल् as in कारकः, भोजको व्रजति, विचर्चिका (P. III. 1.133, III. 3.10, 108); वुच् as in उपकः (P. V. 3.80); वुञ् as in निन्दकः, राजकम्, भालवकः (P. III. 2.146, IV. 2.39, 53, etc.); वुन् as in प्रवकः, सरकः; क्रमकः, पदकः, III. 1.149, IV. 2.61 etc.
अकङ् substitute (आदेश) for the last letter of the word मुधातृ prescribed along with the tad. affix इञ् by P. IV. 1.97, e.g. सौघातकिः.
अकच् affix prescribed before the last syllable of pronouns and indeclinables without any specific sense for it (P. V. 3.71), e.g. सर्वकः, उच्चकैः, etc.
अकथित not mentioned by any other case-relation such as अपादान, संप्रदान and अधिकरण; stated with respect to the indirect object, governed by roots possessing two objects such as दुह्, याच् and others, which in the passive voice is put in the nominative case. The
|
direct object is called akathita because in some cases there exists no other case-relation as, for example, in पौरवं गां याचते or भिक्षते, or माणवकं पन्थानं पृच्छति; while, in the other cases, the other case-relations (with the activity expressed by the verb) are wilfully suppressed or ignored although they exist, as for instance in गां दोग्धि पयः, अन्ववरुणद्धि गां व्रजम्; see अकथितं च P.1.4.51 and the Mahābhāṣya thereon. अकम्पित not shaken; tremulous: said with respect to vowels in Vedic utterance, kampa being looked upon as a fault of utterance., cf अकम्पितान् । कम्पनं नाम स्वराश्रितपाठदोषः प्रायेण दाक्षिणात्यानां भवति । तमुपलक्ष्य स वर्ज्य:। R.Pr.III.31 अकर्तृ a case-relation excepting that of the subject to the verbal activity. cf. अकर्तरि च कारके संज्ञायाम् P. III.3.I9. अकर्मक intransitive, without any object, (said with regard to roots which cannot possess an object or whose object is suppressed or ignored). The reasons for suppression are briefly given in the well-known stanza ; धातोरर्थान्तरे वृत्तेर्धात्वर्थेनोपसंग्रहात् । प्रसिद्धेरविवक्षातः कर्मणोऽकर्मिकाक्रिया ॥ In the case of intransitive roots, the verbal activity and its fruit are centred in one and the same individual viz. the agent or कर्ता cf. फलव्यापारयोरेकनिष्ठतायामकर्मकः Vāk. Pad. अकाण्डताण्डव name of the commentary by Harinātha on the Paribhāṣenduśekhara (परिभाषेन्दुशेखर) of Nageśabhaṭṭa. अकाम (अकामसंधि) an invariable (नित्य) euphonic change (संधि) such as the dropping of th' consonant r ( र् ) when followed by r. cf. R. Pr. IV.9. रेफोदयो लुप्यते द्राघितोपधा ह्रस्वस्या- |
कामनियता उभाविमी । e. g. युवो रजांसि, सुयमासो अश्वा रथ: R. V. I. 180.1. अकार the letter a, (अ) inclusive of all its eighteen kinds caused by shortness, length, protraction, accentuation and nasalization in Pānini's grammar, in cases where a(अ) is not actually prescribed as a termination or an augment or a substitute. cf. अणुदित्सवर्णस्य चाप्रत्ययः P. I.1.73. The letter is generally given as the first letter of the alphabet ( वर्णसमाम्नाय ) in all Prātiśākhya and grammar works except in the alphabet termed Varṇopadeśa, as mentioned in the Ṛk Tantra cf. ए ओ ऐ औ अा ॠ लॄ ई ऊ ऋ लृ इ उ अाः । रयवलाः । ङञणनमाः । अः ೱ क ೱ पाः । हुं कुं खुं गुं घुं अं अां एवमुपदेशे etc. R. T.I. 4. अकारक not causing any verbal activity; different from the kārakas or instruments of action such as the agent, the object, the instrument, the recipient (संप्रदान), the separated (अपादान) and the location, (अधिकरण) cf. M. Bh. on I.4.23, 29 and 5l and on II.3.1. अकार्य not a grammatical positive operation: e. g. elision (लोप.) cf. ननु च लोप एवेत्कार्यं स्यात् । अकार्यं लोपः । M. Bh. on I.3.2. अकालक (1) not limited by any time-factors for its study such as certain periods of the day or the year. (2) not characterized by any technical terms expressive of time such as adyatanī, parokṣā occurring in the ancient Prātiśākhya and grammar works. The term akalika is used by the writers of the Kāśikāvṛtti in connection with the grammar of Pāṇini. cf. “पाणिन्युपज्ञमकालकं व्याकरणम्” Kās. on P. II.4.21 explained by the writer of the Padamañjarī as |
पूर्वाणि व्याकरणानि अद्यतनादिकालपरिभाषायुक्तानि तद्रहितम् । अकालापक different from the Kālāpa or the revised Kātantra Grammar cf. पाणिन्युपज्ञमकालापकं व्याकरणम् kāś. On P.II.4.21. अकित् not marked by the mute letter k ( क् ) and hence not disallowing guṇa or vṛddhi substitutes for the preceding vowel, cf. सृजिदृशोर्झल्यमकिति P.VI.1.58; दीर्घोऽकित: P. VII. 4.83. अकृत् lit. non-krt: an affix applied to a root, but different from the conjugational affixes. cf. अकृत्सार्वधातुक्रयोर्दीर्ध: P. VII. 4.25. अकृत not established; said of a grammatical operation which has not taken place e. g. अकृतसंधिकार्यम् M. Bh. on V. 2.100, W. 3.84, also कृताकृतप्रसङ्गि नित्यम् M. Bh. on VI.4.62. अकृतकारि doing or accomplishing what is not done or accomplished; the expression is used in connection with grammatical operations like ह्रस्वकरण or दीर्घकरण only in cases where it is necessary i, e. where already there is no hrasva or drgha cf. अकृतकारि खल्वपि शास्त्रमग्निवत् । तद्यथा । अग्निर्यददग्धं तद्दहति । M. Bh. on VI. 1.127. the rules of Grammar, like fire, are applied to places where they produce a change. अकृतव्यूह short expression for the grammatical maxim अकृतव्यूहाः पाणिनीयाः which means "the followers of Pāṇini do not insist on the taking effect of a rule when its cause or causes disappear." See Par. śek. Par. 56. अकृतसंधि word or expression without the necessary euphonic changes cf वरुणादीनां च तृतीयात् स च अकृतंसंधीनाम् P. V.3.84 vārt. 1. |
अकृतसंहित words ending with a breathing or visarga which are not looked upon as placed immediately before the next word and hence which have no combination with the following vowel e. g. एष देवो अमर्त्यः R. V. 1X.8.1. अकृत्रिम non-technical: not formed or not arrived at by grammatical operations such as the application of affixes to crude bases and so on; natural; assigned only by accident. cf the gram. maxim कृत्रिमाकृतिमयोः कृत्रिमे कार्यसंप्रत्ययः which means "in cases of doubt whether an operation refers to that expressed by the technical sense or to that which is expressed by the ordinary sense of a term, the operation refers to what is expressed by the technical sense." Par. śek. Par.9 also M. Bh. on I.1.28. अकृत्स्न-अकृत्स्ना, an epithet applied to the pronunciation of Veda words improperly which does not serve any useful purpose. cf. अकृत्स्ना अप्रयोजना इत्यर्थ: Uvaṭa on R. Pr. XIV. 68. अङ्कित not possessing the mute letter k (क्) or g (ग्) or ṅ ( ङ् ) and hence not preventing the guṇa and vṛddhi substitutes for the preceding vowel, if they occur. e. g. मृजेर ङ्कित्सु प्रत्ययेषु मृजिप्रसङगे मार्जिः साधुर्भुवति M.Bh. on P. I.I.I Vart.10. अक्त definite, known or specified definitely. cf. अक्तपरिमाणानामर्थानां वाचका भवन्ति य एते संख्याशब्दाः परिमाणशब्दाश्च M. Bh. I.1.72. अक्रियाज not a result of a verbal activity; the expression is used in connection with qualities ( on a substance) as opposed to the activities found in it. cf. अाधेयश्चाक्रियाजश्च सोs सत्त्वप्रकृतिर्गुणः M. Bh. on IV. 1.44. |
अक्षद्यूतादिगण a class of words headed by अक्षद्यूत which take the tad. affix hak ( इक) in the sense of 'resulting from' e. g. अाक्षद्यूतिकं वैरम्, जानुप्रहृतिक्रम्, गातागार्तकम् etc. cf. P IV.4.19. अक्षर a letter of the alphabet, such as a (अ) or i (इ) or h (ह) or y (य्) or the like. The word was originally applied in the Prātiśākhya works to vowels (long, short as also pro- tracted), to consonants and the ayogavāha letters which were tied down to them as their appendages. Hence अक्षर came later on to mean a syllable i. e. a vowel with a con- sonant or consonants preceding or following it, or without any con- sonant at all. cf. ओजा ह्रस्वाः सप्तमान्ताः स्वराणामन्ये दीर्घा उभये अक्षराणि R Pr. I 17-19 cf.एकाक्षरा, द्व्यक्षरा etc. The term akṣa- ra was also applied to any letter (वर्ण), be it a vowel or a conso- nant, cf, the terms एकाक्षर, सन्ध्यक्षर, समानाक्षर used by Patañjali as also by the earlier writers. For the etymo- logy of the term see Mahābhāṣya अक्षरं न क्षरं विद्यात्, अश्नोतेर्वा सरोक्षरम् । वर्णे वाहुः पूर्वसूत्रे । M. Bh. Āhnika 2 end. अक्षरपङ्क्ति name given to the dvipada virāj verses divided into padās of five syllables. cf विराजो द्विपदाः केचित् सर्वा आहुश्चतुष्पदाः । कृत्वा पञ्चाक्षरान्पादांस्तास्तथाSक्षरपङ्क्तयः R. Pr. XVII. 50. अक्षरसमाम्नाय alphabet: traditional enumeration of phonetically inde- pendent letters generally begin- ning with the vowel a (अ). Al- though the number of letters and the order in which they are stat- ed differ in different treatises, still, qualitatively they are much the same. The Śivasūtras, on which Pāṇini's grammar is based, enu- merate 9 vowels, 4 semi-vowels, twenty five class-consonants and 4 | sibilants. The nine vowels are five |
simple vowels or monothongs (समा- नाक्षर) as they are called in ancient treatises, and the four diphthongs, (सन्ध्यक्षर ). The four semi-vowels y, v, r, l, ( य् व् र् ल् ) or antasthā- varṇa, the twenty five class-conso- nants or mutes called sparśa, and the four ūṣman letters ś, ṣ, s and h ( श् ष् स् ह् ) are the same in all the Prātiśākhya and grammar works although in the Prātiśākhya works the semi-vowels are mentioned after the class consonants.The difference in numbers, as noticed, for exam- ple in the maximum number which reaches 65 in the Vājasaneyi- Prātiśākhya, is due to the separate mention of the long and protract- ed vowels as also to the inclusion of the Ayogavāha letters, and their number. The Ayogavāha letters are anusvāra, visarjanīya,jihvāmu- līya, upadhmānīya, nāsikya, four yamas and svarabhaktī. The Ṛk Prātiśākhya does not mention l (लृ), but adding long ā (अा) i (ई) ，ū (ऊ) and ṛ (ऋ) to the short vowels, mentions 12 vowels, and mention- ing 3 Ayogavāhas (< क्, = प् and अं) lays down 48 letters. The Ṛk Tantra Prātiśākhya adds the vowel l (लृ) (short as also long) and mentions 14 vowels, 4 semi- vowels, 25 mutes, 4 sibilants and by adding 10 ayogavāhas viz. 4 yamas, nāsikya, visarjanīya, jihvāmu- līya, upadhmānīya and two kinds of anusvāra, and thus brings the total number to 57. The Ṛk Tantra makes a separate enume- ration by putting diphthongs first, long vowles afterwards and short vowels still afterwards, and puts semi-vowels first before mutes, for purposes of framing brief terms or pratyāhāras. This enumeration is called varṇopadeśa in contrast |
with the other one which is called varṇoddeśa. The Taittirīya prātiśākhya adds protracted vowels and lays down 60 letters : The Ṣikṣā of Pāṇini lays down 63 or 64 letters, while the Vājasa- neyi-prātiśākhya gives 65 letters. cf. V. Pr. VIII. 1-25. The alphabet of the modern Indian Languages is based on the Varṇasamāmnāya given in the Vājasaneyi-prātiśākhya. The Prā- tiśākhyas call this enumeration by the name Varṇa-samāmnāya. The Ṛk tantra uses the terms Akṣara samāmnāya and Brahmarāśi which are picked up later on by Patañjali.cf. सोयमक्षरसमाम्नायो वाक्समाम्नायः पुष्पितः फलितश्चन्द्रतारकवत् प्रतिमण्डितो वेदि- तव्यो ब्रह्मराशिः । सर्ववेदपुण्यफलावाप्तिश्चास्य ज्ञाने भवति । मातापितरौ चास्य स्वर्गे लोके महीयेते । M. Bh. Ahnika.2-end. अक्षराङ्ग forming a part of a sy- llable just as the anusvāra ( nasal utterance ) or svarabhakti (vowel- part) which forms a part of the preceding syllable. cf. अनुस्वारो व्यञ्जनं चाक्षराङ्गम् R. Pr. I.22, also स्वरभक्तिः पूर्वभागक्षराङ्गम् R. Pr. I.32. अखण्डशाब्दबोध unitary import; the meaning of a sentence collectively understood. अगति (1) absence of any other re- course or alternative. cf. अगत्या हि खलु परिभाषाश्रीयते. Puruṣottamadeva- Pari. vṛtti Pari.119;(2) which is not a word termed gati. cf. चनचिदिवगोत्रा- दितद्धिताम्रेडितेष्वगते: P. VII.1.57. अगमकत्व non-communicativeness, inability to communicate ade- quately the intended meaning. cf. सविशेषणानां वृत्तिस्तर्हि कस्मान्न भवति । अगमकत्वात् M. Bh on II.1.1: cf. also अगमक: निर्देशः अनिर्देशः। अगुण् non-secondary, principal; cf. ध्रुवचेष्टितयुक्तिषु चाप्यगुणे तदनल्पमतेर्वचनं स्मरत M. Bh. on I.4.51. |
अगृहीत uncomprehended, uninclud- ed cf.नागृहीतविशेषणा शक्तिर्विशेष्यमुपसंक्रामति । cf. also नाज्झलौ इत्यत्र अगृहीतसवर्णानामचां ग्रहणम् Padamañjari on Kāś VIII. 3.57. अग्नि a term in the Kātantra grammar for a word ending in i ( इ ) or u ( उ ) cf. इदुदग्निः Kāt. II.1.8, अग्नेरमोs कारः Kāt. II.1.50. अग्निग्निपदादिगण a class of words headed by the word अग्निपद to which the tad. affix अण् is added in the senses of 'given there' or 'done there' e. g. अग्निपदम्. cf. अण्प्रकरणे अग्निपदादिभ्य उपसंख्यानम् P. V.1.97 Vārt. 1. अग्निवेश्य an ancient writer of Vedic grammar mentioned in the Taittirīya prātiśākhya. cf. कपवर्गपरश्च (विसर्ग:) अग्निवेश्यवाल्मीक्योः ( मतेन ऊष्माणं न आपद्यते ) T.Pr. IX. 4. अग्निवेश्यायन writer of Vedic grammar, mentioned in the Taittirīya prātiśākhya. cf. नाग्निवेश्या- यनस्य ( मते उदात्तपरः स्वरितपरो वा अनुदात्तः स्वरितं नापद्यते इति न) Tait. Pr. XIV.32. अग्नौकरवाणिन्याय analogy conveyed by the expression अग्नौ करवाणि implying permission to the agent to do certain other things in a sacrificial session when, as a matter of fact, he is only permitted to work as an agent at the sacrificial action ( अग्नौकरण ), by virtue of the reply ' कुरु ' to his request made in the sentence अग्नौ करवाणि. cf. अग्नौकरवाणि- न्यायेन भविष्यति M. Bh.on. II.2.24. अग्र the original Samhita text as oppo- sed to pratṛṇna ( प्रतृण्ण ) or pada- pāṭha, (पदपाठ) which is the recital of separate words. अग्रवाल (Vasudeva-Śarana Agravāla), a modern scholar of Sanskrit grammar, the author of "India as known to Pāṇini". |
अग्रहण non-inclusion, non-compre- hension. cf. विभक्तौ लिङ्गविशिष्टाग्रहणम् Par. Śekh. Par. 72, M. Bh. VII. 1.1 Vart. 13. अग्लोप elision of the vowel a, i,u , r or l ( अ, इ, उ, ऋ or लृ ) which prevents Sanvadbhāva cf. सन्वल्लघुनि चङ्परेSनग्लोपे P. VII.4.93, as also नाग्लोपिशास्वृदिताम् VII.4.2 where the elision prevents the shortening of the penultimate vowel if it is long. अघोष unvoiced, merely breathed; a term applied to the surd conso- nants, ś, ṣ s, and visarga which are uttered by mere breathing and which do not produce any sonant effect. cf. T. Pr.I.12; R.Pr.I.11. The term jit ( जित् ) is used for these letters as also for the first two consonants of a class in the Vājasaneyi-prātiśākhya cf. द्वौ द्वौ प्रथमौ जित्; ऊष्माणश्च हवर्जम् V. Pr. I.50.51. अङ् The vikaraṇa before luṅ affixes, substituted for the affix cvi ( च्वि ) in the case of the roots mentioned by Pāṇini in sūtras III.1.52-59:(2) the Vikaraṇapratyaya in Vedic Literature before the benedictive affixes prescribed by Pāṇini in Sūtra III.1.86; (3) kṛt affix in the feminine gender showing verbal activity applied to roots marked with the mute letter ष् and the roots भिद्, छिद् and others. P.III.3 104-106.e.g. जरा, त्रपा, भिदा, छिदा etc. अङित् not marked with the mute letter ṅ ( ङ्) signifying the absence of the prohibition of the guṇa or the vṛddhi substitute. cf अङिति गुणप्रतिषेधः ( वक्तव्यः ) M.Bh. III.3.83 Vārt. 2. In the case of the preposi- tion ā ( अा ) unmarked with ṅ (ड् ), it signifies a sentence or remembr- ance of something cf. वाक्यस्मरणयोरङित् e.g. आ एवं नु मन्यसे, आ एवं किल तत् cf. M. Bh. on I.l.14. |
अङग (l) the crude base of a noun or a verb to which affixes are added; a technical term in Pāṇini's grammar for the crude base after which an affix is prescribed e. g. उपगु in औपगव,or कृ in करिष्यति etc. cf. यस्मात् प्रत्ययविधिस्तदादि प्रत्ययेSङ्गम् P.I.4.13; (2) subordinate part. constituent part cf. पराङ्गवद् in सुबामन्त्रिते पराङ्गवत्स्वरे P. II.1.2, also विध्यङ्गभूतानां परिभाषाणां Par. Śek. Par. 93.10: (3) auxiliary for an operation, e. g. अन्तरङ्ग, बहिरङ्ग etc. cf. अत्राङगशब्देन शब्दरूपं निमित्तमेव गृह्यते Par. Śek. Par.50; (4) element of a word or of an expression cf. अङ्गव्यवाये चाङ्गपरः R. T. 190, अङ्गे च क्म्ब्यादौ R.T. 127. व्यञ्जनं स्वराङ्गम् T. Pr. 21.1. अङगवत् considered as auxiliary or part of another e.g. पूर्वाङ्गवद्भावः, पराङ्गवद्भाव:; cf सुबामन्त्रिते पराङ्गवत्स्वरे P.II.1.2 and the Vārtika thereon "परमपि च्छन्दसि पूर्वस्याङ्गवद् भवतीति वक्तव्यम्." अङ्गवृत्त an operation prescribed in the section named aṅgādhikara, comprising the fourth quarter of the sixth book and the whole of the seventh book of Pāṇini. अङ्गाधिकार a large section of Pāṇini's Aṣṭādhyāyī covering five quarters (VI.4.1 to the end of VII) in which the various operations undergone by crude bases before various affixes etc. are prescribed. अङ्गुल्यादिगण class of words headed by अङ्गुलि to which the tad. afix ठक् ( इक् ) is added in the sense of comparison ( इवार्थे ); e. g. अङ्गुलीव अाड्गुलिक: cf. Kāś. on P. V.3.108. अच् the short term or pratyāhāra in Pāṇini's Grammar representing a vowel, e.g. अजन्त (ending with a vowel), अच्संधि (vowel coalescence or combination). अचिकित्स्य impossible to amend, not to be discussed. cf. एवं च 'पूजितो य: |
सुरैरपि' इति अचिकित्स्यः अपशब्दः;Pada- mañjari on P.II.2.12. अजादिगण class of words headed by अज to which the fem.affix अा is added, sometimes inspite of the affix ई being applicable by other rules such as जातेरस्त्रीविषयात्o P. IV. 1.63 and other rules in the section. e. अजा, एडका, त्रिफला, उष्णिहा, जेष्ठा, दंष्ट्रा. cf P. IV.1.4. अजितसेन author of the Cintāmaṇi- prakāśika a gloss on Cintāmaṇi, the well known commentary by Yakṣa- varman on the Sabdānuśāsana of Śākatāyana. Ajitasena was the grand pupil of Abhayadeva; he lived in the 12th century A.D. आजिरादिगण class of words headed by the word अजिर which do not allow lengthening of the final vowel by P. VI.3.119. although they form technical terms e. g. अजिरवती, पुलिन- वती etc. cf. Kāś on P. VI.3.119. अज्भक्ति See under स्वरभक्ति. अञ् (1) tad. affix a ( अ ) with the mute letter ñ ( ञ्), prescribed (i) after the words उत्स and others in various senses like progeny, dyed in, produced in, come from etc.P. IV.1.86, (ii) after the words विद and others in the sense of grandson and other descendents.P. IV.1.104. For other cases see P. IV. I. 141, 161; IV.2.12,14 etc. IV.3.7 etc. IV.4.49. The feminine is formed by adding i ( ई ) to words ending with this affix अञ्, which have the vṛddhi vowel substituted for their initial vowel which gets the acute accent also e.g. औत्सः, औत्सी,औदपानः, बैदः, बैदी. अट् (I) token term standing for vowels and semi-vowels excepting l ( ल्) specially mentioned as not inter- fering with the substitution of ṇ |
( ण् ) for n ( न् ) e.g. गिरिणा, आर्येण, खर्वेण etc. Sec P.VIII.4.2; (2) aug- ment a (अट्) with an acute accent, which is prefixed to verbal forms in the imperfect and the aorist tenses and the conditional mood. e.g. अभवत्, अभूत्, अभविष्यत् Sec P.IV.4.71; (3) augment a ( अट् ) prescribed in the case of the roots रुद्, स्वप् etc. before a Sārvadhātuka affix begin- ning with any consonant except y ( य्), e.g. अरोदत्, अस्वपत्, अजक्षत्, आदत् etc.; see P.VII.3, 99, 100;(4) aug- ment a ( अट् ) prefixed sometimes in Vedic Literature to affixes of the Vedic subjunctive (लेट्) e.g. तारिवत्, मन्दिवत् etc. see P.III.4.94. अठच् tad. affix अठ prescribed after the word कर्मन् by the rule कर्मणि घटोऽ ठच् cf कर्मणि घटते कर्मठः पुरुषः Kāś. on p. V.2.35. अडच् tad. affix अड applied in the sense of pitiable or poor to a word preceded by the word उप when the whole word after उप is dropped, e.g उपड् ( उपेन्द्रदत्त + अड् ) see. p. V. 3. 80. अण् (I) token term ( प्रत्याहार ) for all vowels and semivowels which, when prescribed for an operation, include all such of their sub-divi- sions as are caused by length, pro- traction accent or nasalization. cf अणुदित्सवर्णस्य चाप्रत्ययः P. I.1.60;(2) token term for the vowels अ, इ and उ in all Pānini's rules except in the rule - I.1.69 given above e.g see ढ्रलोपे पूर्वस्य दीर्घोणः P.VI.3. 111, केऽणः P.VII.4.13. and अणोऽ प्रगृह्यस्य. P.VIII.4.57: (3) tad, affix. a ( अ ) prescribed generally in the various senses such as 'the offspring', 'dyed in,' 'belong- ing to' etc. except in cases where other specific affixes are prescribed cf प्राग्दीव्यतोऽण् P. IV.1.83; (4) kṛ. |
affix a ( अ ), applied, in the sense of an agent, to a root with an antecedent word (उपपद) stand- ing as its object. e. g. कुम्भकारः, see P.III.2.1: काण्डलावः, see P.III.3.12. अणादि-a term applied to all taddhita suffixes collectively as they begin with अण् cf. P.IV.1.83. अणु the minimum standard of the guantity of sound, which is not perceived by the senses, being equal to one-fourth of a Mātrā; cf. अणोस्तु तत्प्रमाणं स्यात् मात्रा तु चतुराणवात् ॥ see T.Pr. 21.3, V. Pr. 1.60, A.Pr. III.65. Ṛk. tantra, however, defi- nes अणु as half-a-mātrā. cf. अर्धमणु ( R.T. 1.41 ). अणुदिच्छास्त्र - the rule prescribing cognateness (सावर्ण्य) of letters. The term refers to Pāṇini's sūtra अणुदित्सवर्णस्य चाप्रत्ययः P.I.1.69. The terms ग्रहणकशास्त्र and सवर्णशास्त्र are used in the same sense. अण्णैयाचार्य author of लिङ्गनिर्णयभूषण, who was a Tamil Brāhmaṇa by caste. अत्(1) tech. term in Pāṇini's grammar for short अ, cf तपरस्तत्कालस्य P. I. 1. 70; अदेङ् गुणः P.I.1.2; (2) personal ending अ for इ ( इट् ) of the Ist pers. sing. Ātm. in the Potential, P III. 4. 106; (3) case- affix in the case of युष्मद् and अस्मद् for abl. sing. and pl. P.VII. 1.31,32: (4) tad-affix अत् (अ) prescribed after किम् in the sense of the loc. case before which किम् is changed to कु, क्व being the tad. formation; cf. P. V.3.12 and VII.2.105:(5) substitute अत्(शतृ) for लट् forming the present and future participles in the Parasmaipada. active voice cf. लटः शतृशानचौ. P.III. 2.124 and लृटः सद्वा P. III.3.14. |
अतङ् non-Ātmanepadin verbal affixes ति, तः...मस्, P. III.4.78, Cān. I.4.11, Śāk. 1.4.101. अतत्काल not taking that much time only which is shown by the letter (vowel) uttered, but twice or thrice, as required by its long or protracted utterance ; the expres- sion is used in connection with vowels in Pāṇini's alphabet, which, when used in Pāṇini's rules, ex- cept when prescribed or followed by the letter त्, includes their long, protracted and nasalized utter- ances: cf. अणुदित्सवर्णस्य चाप्रत्ययः I.1.69. अतदनुबन्धक not having the same mute significatory letter, but having one or two additional ones, cf. तदनुबन्धकग्रहणे नातदनुबन्धकस्य ग्रहणम् (Par. Śek. Pari. 84.) अतद्धित an affix which is not a tad- dhita affix. cf. लशक्वतद्धिते P.1.3.8; M. Bh. I.3.4, V.3.1 etc. अतन्त्र implying no specific purpose: not intended to teach anything, अविवक्षित; e.g. ह्रस्वग्रहणमतन्त्रम् Kāś and Si. Kau. on तस्यादित उदात्तमर्धह्रस्वम् P.1.2.32: cf. also अतन्त्रं तरनिर्देशः ( the use of तरप् does not neces- sarily convey the sense of the comparative degree in Pāṇini's rules) M. Bh. on P. I.2.33. This statement has been given as a distinct Paribhāṣa by Vyāḍi and Sākaṭāyana. The author of the Mahābhāṣya appears to have quo- ted it from the writings of Vyāḍi and the earlier grammarians See also M. Bh. on अल्पाच्तरम् P. II.2.34. अतसुच् ( अतस् ) tad. aff. अतस् applied to the words दक्षिण, उत्तर, पर and अवर;e.g.दक्षिणतो वसति; उत्तरत आगतः, परतो रमणीयम्, परस्ताद्रमणीयम् , अवरत आगतः अवरस्ताद्वसति. cf. P.V.2.28, 29. |
अताद्रूप्यातिदेश conveyance of only the properties of one to another without conveying the actual form, des- cribed as the significance of an- tādivadbhāva. cf. न वा अताद्रूप्याति- देशात् M. Bh. on P. VI.1.85 Vārt. 26. See ताद्रूप्यातिदेश below. अताम् personal affix of the third pers. pl. Ātm. in the Imperative (लोट्). cf. P. III.4.90. अतिक्रम passing over a word in the क्रमपाठ without repeating it; passing beyond, cf. अतिक्रम्य परिग्रहः R. Pr. X.7, which means catching a word for repetition by coming back after passing over it, e. g. इन्द्राग्नी अपात् । इन्द्राग्नी इति इन्द्राग्नी । or अनु दक्षि । दक्षि दावने | दक्षीति दक्षि । अतिजगती one of the varieties of-in fact, the first variety of-the Atic- chandas metre, which see above: this Atijagatī consists of 52 sylla- bles.e. g. तमिन्द्रे जोहवीमि मघवानमुग्रम् Ṛk. Saṁh.8.97.13 cf, प्रथमातिजगत्यासां सा द्विपञ्चाशदक्षरा R. Pr. XVI.80. अतिदेश extended application; trans- fer or conveyance or application of the character or qualities or attributes of one thing to another. Atideśa in Sanskrit grammar is a very common feature prescribed by Pāṇini generally by affixing the tad. affix मत् or वत् to the word whose attributes are conveyed to another. e. g. लोटो लङ्वत् P. III. 4.85. In some cases the atideśa is noticed even without the affix मत् or वत्; e.g.गाङ्कुटादिभ्योऽञ्णिन् ङित् P. 1.2.1 . Atideśa is generally seen in all grammatical terms which end with 'vadbhāva' e. g. स्थानिवद्भाव (P.I.1.56-59), सन्वद्भाव (P.VII.4.93), अन्तादिवद्भाव (P. VI.1.85), अभूततद्भाव (P.IV.60) and others. Out of these atideśas, the स्थानिवद्भाव is the most |
important one, by virtue of which sometimes there is a full repre- sentation i.e. substitution of the original form called sthānin in the place of the secondary form called ādeśa. This full representation is called रूपातिदेश as different from the usual one which is called कार्यातिदेश, cf. M. Bh. VIII.1.90 Vārt. 1 and VIII.1.95. Vart.3. Regarding the use of अतिदेश there is laid down a general dictum सामान्यातिदेशे विशेषानतिदेशः - when an operation depending on the general properties of a thing could be taken by extended application, an operation depend- ing on special properties should not be taken by virtue of the same : e. g. भूतवत् in P. III.3.132 means as in the case of the gene- ral past tense and not in the case of any special past tense like the imperfect ( अनद्यतन ) , or the perfect ( परोक्ष ). See Par. Śek. Pari. 101, M. Bh. on P. III. 3. 132. There is also a general dictum अति- देशिकमनित्यम्- whatever is transfer- red by an extended application, need not, be necessarily taken. See Par. Śek. 93.6 as also M. Bh. on P.I.1.123 Vārt.4, I.2.1 Vārt. 3, II.3.69 Vārt.2 etc., Kaiyaṭa on II. 1.2 and VI.4.22 and Nyāsa on P. I.1.56 and P. I.2.58 Vārt. 8. The dictum अातिदेशिकमनित्यम् is given as a Paribhāṣā by Nāgeśa cf. Pari. Śek. 93. 6. अातिधृति one of the varieties of Atic- chandas consisting of 76 syllables. e. g. स हि शर्धो न मारुते तुविष्वाणिः Ṛk. Saṁh. I.127.6. अतिनिचृत् a variety of the Gāyatri metre consisting of 20 syllables, cf. R. Pr. XVI.22. |
अतिपत्ति absence of any possibility ; Sec क्रियातिपत्ति. cf. P. III.3.139 Cān. 1.3.107. अतिप्रयत्न intense effort; characteri- stic effort as required for uttering a vowel with विक्रमस्वरित. अतिप्रसङ्ग over-application of a de- finition which is looked upon as a serious fault: e. g. अतिप्रसङ्गो व्रश्चा दिषु P.VI.1.66 Vārt. 3. अतिबहु too much,rather unnecessary e. g. इदं चाप्यद्यत्वे अतिबहु क्रियते, M. Bh. on I.1.38, इदमतिबहु क्रियते M. Bh. on I.4.63, VI.1.145; नातिबहु प्रयोक्तव्यम् M. Bh. on VIII.1.4. अतिरिक्त surplus, redundant: cf. Nir. IV.20; see Kaiyaṭa on M. Bh. V. 1.131. अतिव्यक्त quite distinct; used with respect to pronunciation नातिव्यक्तं न चाव्यक्तमेवं वर्णानुदीरयेत् cf. T. Pr. XVII.8. अतिव्यस्त quite apart, used with respect to lips which are widely apart ( विश्लिष्टौ ) in the utterance of long अा and ओ; cf. T. Pr. II.12, 13. अतिव्याप्ति the same as अतिप्रसङ्ग, which see above. Extensive application with respect to a rule which applies to places where it should not apply. See Par. Śekh on Pari. 28, Pari. 85; also Padamañj. on Kāś. II.I.32. अतिशक्वरी a variety of Aticchandas metre consisting of 60 syllables. e. g. सुषुमा यातमद्रिभिः Ṛk. Saṁh. I. 137.1. cf, R. Pr. KVI.82. 'अतिशय excess or excellence as shown by the affixes तर and तम cf. तरतम- योश्चातिशये V.Pr.V.2; क्रियाप्रधानमाख्यातं तस्मादतिशये तखुत्पद्यते M. Bh. on VI. 2.139; VIII.1.71 ; (2) desire as shown by the affix क्यच् in Pāṇini's grammar; cf. यश्च अतिशये R. T. 126. |
अतिशायन excellence, surpassing; the same as अतिशय in V. Pr. V. 2 cf. अतिशायने तमबिष्ठनौ P. V. 3.55, also cf. भूमनिन्दाप्रशंसासु नित्ययोगेऽतिशायने । संसर्गेऽ स्तिविवक्षायां भवन्ति मतुबादय: M. Bh. on V.2.94, where अतिशायन means अतिशाय. Patañjali, commenting on P. V.3.55 clearly remarks that for अतिशय, or for अतिशयन, the old grammarians, out of fancy only, used the term अतिशायन as it was a current term in popular usage; cf. देश्याः सूत्रनिबन्धाः क्रियन्ते यावद् ब्रूयात् प्रकर्षे अतिशय इति तावदतिशायन इति M. Bh. on , P. V.3.55. आतिस्पर्श excess of contact, which to a certain extent spoils the pro- nunciation and leads to.a fault. अतिस्पर्श is the same as दुःस्पर्श, the letter ळ being called दुःस्पृष्ट on account of excess of contact. This excess of contact ( अतिस्पर्श) in the case of the utterance of the letter र् results into a fault as it practically borders on stammering; cf. अतिस्पर्शो बर्बरता च रेफे, R. Pr. XIV. 26. अतिस्वार्य ( अतिस्वार also ) name of the seventh musical note in the sing- ing of Sāman. cf.क्रष्टुप्रथमद्वितीयतृतीय- चतुर्थमन्द्रातिस्वार्याः T. Pr. XXIII. 13. अतिहार transfer of a consonant in a Stobha. See पुष्पसूत्र. अतु short term used by Pāṇini to sig- nify together the five affixes क्तवतु, ड्वतुप्, ड्मतुप् मतुप् and वतुप् ;cf.अत्वसन्तस्य चाधातोः P. VI.4.14. अतुल्यबल not having the same force: not belonging to the same type out of the four types of rules viz. पर, नित्य, अन्तरङ्ग and अपवाद. cf. अतुल्य- बलयोः स्पर्धो न भवति Jainendra Pari. 66. अतुस् personal ending of perf. 1st pers. dual. cf. परस्मैपदानां णलतुसुस्थलथु- सणल्वमाः P. III.4.82. |
अतृन् krt affix अत् applied to the root जॄ in the sense of past time. cf जीर्यतरेतृन् P. III.2.104. अते personal ending of pres. 3rd per. pl. substituted for झ ( अन्त ), the अ of झ ( अन्त ) being changed into ए and न being omitted: see झोन्त: (P.VII.1.3) अदभ्यस्तात् (P. VII. 1.4) and टित आत्मनेपदानां टेरे (P. III. 4.79). अत्यन्तगति complete contact of the verbal activity ( क्रिया ); cf.P. V.4.4. अत्यन्तसंयोग constant contact; com- plete contact, uninterrupted con- tact. cf. अत्यन्तसंयोगे च P. II.1.29; II.3.5. अत्यन्तापह्नव complete or absolute denial or concealment offacts; cf. परोक्षे लिट् । अत्यन्तापह्नवे च । 3.2.115, Vārt, 1. अत्यय past happening, cf अत्ययो भूतत्वमतिक्रमः । अतीतानि हिमानि निर्हिमम् ! निःशीतम् Kāś. on P. II.1.6. अत्यल्प rather too little, an expres- sion used by Patanjali idiometi- cally cf. अत्यल्पमिदमुच्यते M. Bh. on I.1.69 etc. अत्यल्पस्पृष्ट having a very slight con- tact (with the organ producing sound),as in the case of the utter- ance of a vowel. अत्यष्टि a variety of Aticchandas metre consisting of 68 syllables. e. g. अथा रुचा हरिण्या पुनानः Ṛk. Sam. 8.111.1. अत्यादिगण the group of prepositions headed by अति which are com- pounded with a noun in the acc. case ; cf. अत्यादयः क्रान्ताद्यर्थे द्वितीयया M. Bh. om P. II. 2.18. अत्युच्चनीच characterized by a sharp utterance; a name of the grave accent अत्युपसंहृत very closely uttered, uttered with close lips and jaws, |
(said in connection with the utterance of the vowel अ ); cf. T. Pr II. 12. See अतिसंश्लिष्ट. अत्व also अत्व change of a vowel into short अ. अत्वत् possessing or having a short अ vowel in it; archaic form used by Pāṇini in उपदेशेsत्वतः (P. VII. 2.62) instead of अद्वत् the correct one; cf. छन्दोवत्सूत्राणि भवन्ति M. Bh. on I.1.1 and I.4.3. अथ Uṇādi affix अथ prescribed in Uṇādi Sūtras 393-396 e.g. see शपथ, अवभृथ, आवसथ ctc. अथर्वप्रातिशाख्य the Prātiśākhya work of the Atharva veda believed to have been written by Śaunaka. It consists of four Adhyāyās and is also called शौनकीया चतुरध्यायिका. अथुच् kṛt. affix अथु with उ accented, applied to roots marked by Pāṇini with the mute syllable टु in the sense of verbal activity: c. g. वेपथुः श्वयथुः, cf ट्वितोथुच् P.III.3.89. अथुस् conjugational affix of perf. 2nd pers. dual Parasmai. substituted for the personal ending थस्, cf. P. III. 4.82. अदन्त ending with the short vowel अ; cf. P. VIII.4.7: a term appli- ed to nouns of that kind, and roots of the tenth conjugation which are given with the letter अ at their end which is not looked upon as mute (इत्) c.g. कथ,गण. etc. Mark also the root पिच described by पतञ्जलि as अदन्त cf. पिबिरदन्तः M. Bh. on I.1.56., M. Bh. on II. 4.43. अदर्शन a term in ancient grammars and Prātiśākhyas meaning non- appearance of a phonetic member वर्णस्यादर्शनं लोपः (V. Pr 1. 141),explain- ed as अनुपलब्धिः by उव्वट. Later on, the idea of non-appearance came to be associated with the idea of expectation and the definition of |
लोप given by Pāṇini in the words अदर्शनं लोपः (as based evidently on the Prātiśākhya definition) was explained as non-appearance of a letter or a group of letters where it was expected to have been present. See M. Bh. on I.1.60 Vārt. 4 and Kaiyaṭa thereon. अदादि name given to the class of roots belonging to the second conjugation, as the roots therein begin with the root अद्. The word अदिप्रभृति is also used in the same sense; cf. अदिप्रभृतिभ्यः शपः p.II. 4.72: cf.also अदाद्यनदाद्योरनदादेरेव given by Hemacandra as a Paribhāṣā corresponding to the maxim लुग्विकरणालुग्विकरणयोरलुग्विकरणस्य Hem. Pari.61. अदि Uṇādi affix अदि e. g, शरद्, दरद्; cf. शॄदॄभसोsदि; Uṇ. 127; अदिप्रभृति See अदादि above. अदुक् aug. अद् added to the word एक before the negative particle न; e.g. एकान्नविंशतिः, एकान्नत्रिंशत् cf. P.VI 3.76. अदृष्ट not seen properly; doubtful; in- distinct;said with respect to a letter which is not distinctly deciphered in the Saṁhitāpātha: e.g. तन्नः ( R. Saṁh. I. 107. 3 ): the last letter त् of तत् is deciphered in the Pada-pātha which is given as तत्- न: cf. अदृष्टवर्णे प्रथमे चोदकः स्यात् प्रदर्शकः R. Pr. X. 15. अदोष absence of fault; absence of inconvenience. The expression सोप्यदोषो भवति often occurs in the Mahābhāṣya: cf. MBh. on I. 3.62; I. 4.108, etc. अद्ङ् substitute for case affixes सु and अम् added to words ending with the affixes डतर and डतम and to the words अन्य, अन्यतर and इतर. cf. P,VII.1.25. |
अद्यतनी tech. term of ancient gram- marians signifying in general the present time of the day in question, the occurrence of the immediate past or future events in which is generally expressed by the aorist (लुड्) or the simple future ( लृट् ); the other two corres- ponding tenses imperfect and first future (viz. लड् and लुट्) being used in connection with past and future events respectively, provid- ed the events do not pertain to that day which is in question; cf. 'वा चाद्यतन्याम्' M.Bh. P.III.2.102 Vār.6, वादृतन्याम् P, VI.4.114. Vārt. 3; (2) term for the tense showing immediate past time called लुङ् in Pāṇini's grammar e. g. मायोगे अद्यतनी । मा कार्षीत् Kāt. III. 1.22, Hem. III. 3.11. अद्रव्यवाचिन् not expressive of any substance which forms a place of residence (of qualities and actions); cf. तथा व्याकरणे विप्रतिषिद्धं चानधिकरण- वाचि ( P. II.4.13 ); इत्यद्रव्यवाचीति गम्यते । M.Bh. on II.1.1. अद्वियोनि lit. not made up of two elements, and hence, produced with a single effort, an expression used for simple vowels ( समानाक्षर ) such as अ, इ, उ, ऋ, लृ and simple consonants क्, ख्, ग् etc. as distinguished from diphthongs ( सन्ध्यक्षर ) such as ए, ऐ, ओ, औ and conjunct consonants क्व, ध्र , etc. which appear to have been termed द्वियोनि cf. अपृक्तमेकाक्षरमद्वियोनि यत् R.Pr.XI.3. अद्व्युपसर्गे not preceded by (two or more) prepositions; i. e. preceded by only one preposition. cf. छादेर्घेऽद्व्युपसर्गस्य P.VI.4.96 prescrib- ing short अ for the long अा of the root छाद् before the kṛt. affix घ, eg. प्रच्छदः |
अधिक (1) additional or surplus acti- vity which a rule in grammar sometimes shows; अधिकः कारः or अधिकं कार्यम्; cf. M. Bh. on I.3.11, Kāś. on III.2.124, Bh. Vṛ. on III.4.72; ( 2 ) surplus subject matter e. g. अथाख्याः समाम्नायाधिकाः प्राग्रिफितात् (V.Pr. I.33.) अधिकरण (1) support: a grammati- cal relation of the nature of a location : place of verbal acti- vity. cf. अाधारोsधिकरणम् P.I.4.45; (2) one of the six or seven Kārakas or functionaries of verbal activity shown by the locative case. cf सप्तम्यधिकरणे च P.II.4.36;(3)substance, 'dravya' cf. अनधिकरणवाचि अद्रव्यवाचि इति गम्यते M.Bh. on II.1.1. अधिकार governing rule consisting of a word (e.g. प्रत्ययः, धातोः, समासान्ताः etc.) or words (e.g. ङ्याप्प्रातिपदिकात्, सर्वस्य द्वे etc.) which follows or is taken as understood in every following rule upto a particular limit. The meaning of the word अधिकार is discussed at length by Patañjali in his Mahābhāṣya on II.1.1, where he has given the difference bet- ween अधिकार and परिभाषा; cf. अधिकार: प्रतियोगं तस्यानिर्देशार्थ इति योगे योगे उपतिष्ठते। परिभाषा पुनरेकदेशस्था सती सर्वं शास्त्रमभिज्वलयति प्रदीपवत् । See also Mahābhāṣya on I.3.11, I. 4.49 and IV. I.83. The word or wording which is to repeat in.the subsequent rules is believed to be shown by Pāṇini by characterizing it with a peculiarity of utterance known as स्वरितोच्चार or स्वरितत्वेन उच्चारणम्. The word which is repeated in the following Sūtras is stated to be अधिकृत. The Śabda Kaustubha defines adhikāra as एकंत्रोपात्तस्यान्यत्र व्यापार: अधिकारः Śab. Kaus. on P.1.2.65. Sometimes the whole rule is repeated e. g. प्रत्यय: P.III.1.1, अङ्गस्य P.VI.4.1 |
समासान्ताः P.V.4.68 while on some occasions a part only of it is seen repeated. The repeti- tion goes on upto a particular limit which is stated as in असिद्धवदत्राभात् P.VI.4.22, प्राग्रीश्वरान्नि- पाताः P.I.4.56. Many times the limit is not stated by the author of the Sūtras but it is understood by virtue of a counteracting word occurring later on. On still other occasions, the limit is defined by the ancient traditional interpreters by means of a sort of convention which is called स्वरितत्वप्रतिज्ञा. This अधिकार or governance has its in- fluence of three kinds: ( 1 ) by being valid or present in all the rules which come under its sphere of influence, e. g. स्त्रियाम् or अङ्गस्य; (2) by showing additional pro- perties e. g. the word अपादान being applied to cases where there is no actual separation as in सांकाश्य- केभ्यः पाटलिपुत्रका अभिरूपतराः: (3) by showing additional force such as setting aside even subsequent rules if opposing. These three types of the influence which a word marked with स्वरित and hence termed अधिकार possesses are called respectively अधिकारगति, अधिक क्रार्य and अधिक कार. For details see M.Bh. on I.3.11. This अधिकार or governing rule exerts its influence in three ways: (1) generally by proceeding ahead in subsequent rules like the stream of a river, (2)sometimes by jumps like a frog omitting a rule or more, and (3)rarely by proceeding backward with a lion's glance; cf. सिंहावलोकितं चैव मण्डूकप्लुतमेव च ।; गड्गाप्रवा- हवच्चापि अधिकारास्त्रिधा मताः ॥ अघिकारसूत्र a superintending aphori- sm, which gives no meaning of itself where it is mentioned, but gives its meaning in the number of |
aphorisms that follow: e. g- the rules प्रत्यय:, परश्च and अाद्युदात्तश्च P. III.1.1, 2, 3 or सह सुपा. P.II.1.4. अधिस्पर्शम् incompletely pronounced, referring to a letter so pronoun- ced. अधुना tad. affix applied to the pro- noun इदम् which is changed into इ before the affix and then elided by P. VI.4.148, or changed into अ in which case धुना or अधुना could be looked upon as a tad. affix. अध्यवसाय determination to begin an activity with a view to get the fruit. cf. य एष मनुष्यः प्रेक्षापूर्व- कारी स बुद्ध्या कंचिदर्थं संपश्यति, संदृष्टे प्रार्थना, प्रार्थिते अध्यवसायः,म् अध्यवसाये आरम्भः, आरम्भे निर्वृत्तिः, निर्वृत्तौ फलावाप्तिः cf. M. Bh. on I.3.14 and I.4.32. अध्यात्मादि name of a class of words headed by the word अध्यात्मन् to which the tad. affix ठञ् is added in the sense of 'तत्र भवः' i.e. found therein, or existing therein. e. g. आध्यात्मिकम्, आधिदैविकम्, etc.cf M.Bh. on IV.3.60. अध्यास superimposition : a relation between a word and its sense ac- cording to the grammarians; cf. Vāk. Pad. II.240. (2) appendage; cf. आहुस्त्वेकपदा अन्ये अध्यासानेकपातिनः R. Pr.XVII.43. अध्याहार supplying the necessary ele- ment. cf. गम्यमानार्थस्य वाक्यस्य स्वरूपेणोपा- दानं वाक्यस्याध्याहारः Kāś on P.VI.1. 139., cf also Nir. I.1.13 and M. Bh. on Śiva Sūtra 1 Vārt 14. अध्यै, अध्यैन् kṛt affixes substituted in the place of तुम् of the infinitive in Vedic Literature (P. III.4.9.), e. g. पिबध्यैः when अध्यैन् is substi- tuted, the initial vowel of the word becomes उदात्त. e. g. कर्मण्युपा- चारध्यै । |
अन्, tad. affix अ ( अन् ) ( 1) added to the word नीली in the sense of 'dyed in', to form the word नील,cf. P. IV.2.2. Vārt. 2; (2) added to the word अषाढा in the sense of 'produced in' cf अषाढाः उपदधाति M. Bh. on IV.3.34 Vārt. 2; (3) add- ed after the affix तीय in the same sense as तीय e.g. द्वितीयो भागः, तृतीयो भागः cf. पूरणाद् भागे तीयादन् P.V.3.48. अन substitute for the affix यु ( युच्, ण्युट् ल्युट्, ल्यु, ट्यु, ट्युल् and others of which only यु remains), cf. युवो- रनाकौ P.VII.1.1 e. g. कारणा, हारणा, करणम्, हरणम्, नन्दनः, सायंतनम् etc. अनड् (l) substitute अन् as Samāsānta at the end of a Bahuvrīhi comp. in the feminine for the last letter of the word ऊधस् and for that of धनुस् in all genders e.g. कुण्डोघ्नी (by apply- ing ई to कुण्डोधन्), शार्ङ्गधन्वा, अधिज्यधन्वा; cf. P V.4.131, 132; (2) substitute अन् for the last letter of the words अस्थि, दधि etc. before the affixes of the instrumental and the follow- ing cases beginning with a vowel e. g. अस्थ्ना, दध्ना, अक्ष्णा etc. cf. P. VII. 1.75; (3) substitute अन् for the last letter of the word सखि, of words ending in ऋ,as also of उशनस् and others before the nominative sing. affix सु. e. g. सखा, कर्ता, उशना cf. P. VII.1.93, 94. अनच्क possessing no अच् or vowel in it. cf इन्द्रे द्वौ अचौ, एको यस्येतिलोपेनापहृतो- ऽपर एकादेशेन ततः अनच्कः इन्द्रशब्दः संपन्नः cf. Par. Śek. on Par. 52.: M.Bh. on I. 4.2 Vārt. 22. अनञ् a word without the negative particle ( नञ् ) before it, e. g. धेनु- रनञि कमुत्पादयति, a sūtra in Āpiśali's grammar quoted in M. Bh. on IV.2.45 see also P. II. 1. 60, VII. 1. 37. अनत uncerebralized; not changed into a cerebral ( मूर्धन्य ) letter.cf. |
दन्त्यस्य मूर्धन्यापात्तिर्नति: Uvaṭa on R. Pr. IV.34. अनतिदिष्ट not resulting from any ex- tended application or अतिदेश, cf. प्रकृत्याश्रयं अनतिदिष्टं भवति M.Bh. on IV. 1.151. अनत्यन्तगति absence of the verbal activity in all ways or respects in- complete activity; e.g. छिन्नकम् not completely cut, cf. अनत्यन्तगतौ क्तात् P. V.4.4. अनद्यतन period of time not pertain- ing to the day in question; used in connection with past time, to express which the imperfect is generally used; also in connection with the future time, to express which the first future is generally used e g- ह्यः अपचत्, श्वः कर्ता etc. cf. P.III.2.111,113; III. 3.15,135: V.3.21. अननुबन्घक without any mute signi- ficatory letter attached; अननुबन्धकपरि- भाषा is the short name given to the maxim-'अननुबन्धकग्रहणे न सानुबन्धकस्य ग्रह णम्' See M.Bh. on I.3.1: V.2.9. There is a reading in the Par. Śek. निरनुबन्धकग्रहणे for अननुबन्धकग्रहणे, in which case the परिभाषा is called निरनुबन्धकपरिभाषा. See Par. Śek. Pari. 81. अनन्तर (l) immediate, contiguous अव्यवहित. cf. हलोनन्तराः संयोगः P.1. 1.7, also गतिरनन्तरः P. VI.2.49: cf. अनन्तरं संयोगः V. Pr.I.48. ; (2) nearest, as compared with others of the same type; cf. अथवा अनन्तरा या प्राप्तिः सा प्रतिषिध्यते M.Bh. on I.1.43; cf. Pari. Śek. अनन्तरस्य विधिर्वा भवति प्रतिषेधो वा, which means that a prescriptive or prohibitive rule applies to the nearest and not to the distant one.Par.Śek. 61,Cān. Par.30. अनन्त्य non-final cf. अनन्त्यविकारे अन्त्यस- देशस्य when a change does not con- |
cern a final letter then it concerns that which immediately precedes the final, Par. Śek. Pari 95. cf. also M. Bh. VI.1.13 Vārt 5. अनन्य not different, the same: cf. एकदेशविकृतमनन्यवत् that which has got a change regarding one of its parts is by no means something else; Par. Śek. Pari. 37. अनन्यवद्भाव being the same, being looked upon as not different. See अनन्य above. अनभिधान inability to express the meaning desired. The expression न वा अनभिधानात् frequently occurs in the Mahābhāṣya referring to such words or phrases as could be form- ed by rules of grammar or could be used according to rules but,are not found in current use recogniz- ed by learned persons or scholars; cf. तच्चानभिधानं यत्राप्तैरुक्तं तत्रैव, अन्यत्र तु यथालक्षणं भवत्येव Padamañj. on III. 2.1;also cf. अनभिधानाद् व्यधिकरणानां बहुव्रीहिर्न भविष्यति । यत्र त्वभिधानमस्ति तत्र वैयधिकरण्येपि भवत्येव समासः, कण्ठेकाल इति; Nyāsa on II. 2.24: for examples of अनभिधान, sec also M.Bh.अभिधानलक्षणाः कृत्तद्धितसमासाः अनभिधानान्न भविष्यन्ति M. Bh. on III.3.19. also on III. 2.1. V.5, IV.2.1. See Kāś. on III,1.22, III.3.158. अनभिनिर्वृत्त that which is not applied; lit.(an operation or vidhi) which has not taken place or which has not been effective; cf. प्रसक्तस्य अनभिनिर्वृत्तस्य प्रतिषेधेन निवृत्तिः शक्या कर्तुं नानभिनिर्वृत्तस्य M. Bh. on I. 1.5; IV. 1.37. Cf. also न चानभिनिर्वृत्ते बहिरङ्गे अन्तरङ्गं प्राप्नोति । तत्र निमित्तमेव बहिरङ्गमन्तरङ्गस्य M.Bh. on VI.4.22: VIII.3.15. अनभिहित not conveyed or expressed by another i.e. by any one of the four factors viz.verbal affix, kṛt affix,taddhita affix and compound. The rule अनभिहिते (P. II.3.I) and |
the following rules lay down the different case affixes in the sense of the different Kārakas or auxiliaries of the verbal activity, provided they are not shown or indicated in any one of the above- mentioned four ways; e. g. see the acc. case in कटं करोति, the inst, case in दात्रेण लुनाति, the dat. case in देवदत्ताय गां ददाति, the abl. case in ग्रामादा गच्छति, or the loc.case in स्थाल्यां पचति. अनभ्यास a wording which does not contain any reduplicative syllable; an epithet applied to such roots as are not to be reduplicated a second time before affixes of the perfect, as they are already re- duplicated; cf. लिटि धातोरनभ्यासस्य P. VI.1.8. अनर्थक (1) without any signification;lit. having no meaning of themselves, i.e.possessing a meaning only when used in company with other words or parts of words which bear an independent sense;(the word is used generally in connection with pre- positions); e.g. अधिपरी अनर्थकौ P.1.4.93, cf. अनर्थान्तरवाचिनावनर्थकौ । धातुनोक्तां क्रिया- माहतुः । तदविशिष्टं भवति यथा शङ्के पय: ॥ M. Bh. on P.I.4.93; cf. न निर्बद्धा उपसर्गा अर्थान्निराहुरिति शाकटायनः Nir. I. 1.3: cf. also अनर्थकौ अनर्थान्तरवाचिनौ Kāś. on I.4.93, explained as अनर्था- न्तरवाचित्वादनर्थकावित्युक्तम् न त्वर्थाभावादिति दर्शयति by न्यासकार; (2) meaningless, purposeless: cf. प्रमाणभूत आचार्यो दर्भप- वित्रपाणिः महता यत्नेन सूत्रं प्रणयति स्म । तत्राशक्यं वर्णेनाप्यनर्थकेन भवितुं किं पुनरियता सूत्रेण M.Bh. on I.1.1, as also सामर्थ्ययोगान्न हि किंचिद- स्मिन् पश्यामि शास्त्रे यदनर्थकं स्यात् M.Bh. on P. VI.I.77. See for details M.Bh. on I.2.45 Vārt. 12: III.1.77 Vārt. 2 and Kaiyaṭa and Uddyota thereon; (3) possessed of no sense absolutely as some nipātas केचन निपाताः सार्थकाः केचन च निरर्थकाः Uv. |
on R. Pr. XII.9; निपातस्यानर्थकस्यापि प्रातिपदिकत्वम् P. I. 2.45 Vārt.12 cf. also जन्या इति निपातनानर्थक्यं P. IV. 4.82. Vārt. 1, एकागारान्निपातनानर्थक्यं P. V.1.113 Vārt. 1, also 114 Vārt.1. अनर्थान्तरम् synonym, synonymous, conveying no different sense, e.g. सङ्घः समूहः समुदाय इत्यनर्थान्तरम् । M.Bh. on P. V.1.59; अपि च बुद्धिः संप्रत्यय इत्यनर्थान्तरम् M.Bh. on P.I.1.56. अनर्थान्तरवाचिनः not conveying any different sense, अनर्थान्तरवाचिनौ अनर्थकौ M.Bh. on I.4.93. अनल्विधि opp. of अल्विधि; an opera- tion not concerning a single letter, e.g. स्थानिवदादेशोsनल्विधौ P.I. 1.56 and M. Bh. thereon; cf. स्थानिवदादेशो ह्यवर्णविधौ Kāt. Pari.39. अनवकाश having no occasion or scope of application; used in connection with a rule the whole of whose province of application is covered by a general rule, and hence which becomes technically useless, unless it is allowed to set aside the general rule: cf. अनवकाशा हि विधयो बाधका भवन्ति- rules which have no opportunity of taking effect( without setting aside other rules ) supersede those rules; M.Bh. on V.4.154, also Par. Śek. on Pari. 64. अनवकाशत्व absence of any opportunity of taking effect, scopelessness con- sidered in the case of a particular rule, as a criterion for setting aside that general rule which deprives it of that opportunity cf. अनवकाशत्वं निरवकाशत्वं वा बाधकत्वे बीजम्. This अन- वकाशत्व is slightly different from अप- वादत्व or particular mention which is defined usually by the words सामान्य- विधिरुत्सर्गः । विशेषविधिरपवादः । अनवगतसंस्कार (a word) whose forma- tion and accents have not been ek- plained; cf. Nir. IV.1 ; V.2. |
अनवयव lit. having no parts; impar- tite; without any concern with the individual component parts; appli- cation in totality; cf. सिद्धं तु धर्मोपदेशने अनवयवविज्ञानाद्यथा लौकिकवैदिकेषु P. VI. 1.84 Vārt 5 and the Bhāṣya thereon; अस्मिञ् शास्त्रे अनवयवेन शास्त्रार्थसंप्रत्ययः स्यात् । a rule in grammar applies to all cases where its application is possi- ble; it cannot be said to have its purpose served by applying to a few cases only. अनवस्था fault of having no end: end- lessness; cf. एवमप्यनवस्था स्याद्या मूलक्षय- कारिणी Kāv. Pr.; cf.अवश्यं ह्यनेन अर्थानादि- शता केनचिच्छब्देन निर्देशः कर्तव्यः स्यात् । तस्य च तावत्केन कृतो येनासौ क्रियते । अथ तस्य केनचित्कृतस्तस्य केन कृत इत्यनवस्था । M. Bh. on II.1.1. अनवस्थान indefiniteness; cf. उच्चनीच- स्यानवस्थानात्संज्ञाया अप्रसिद्धिः M. Bh. on I. 2.30 Vārt 1. अनवस्थित undetermined, indefinite; See M.Bh. quoted above on अनवस्थान; cf also आर्धधातुकीयाः सामान्येन भवन्ति अनवस्थितेषु प्रत्ययेषु । M. Bh. on I.1.56; III.1.4, VII.2.10, VII.4.9. The substitutes caused by an ārdhadhā- tuka affix are, in fact, effected by virtue of the prospective applica- tion of the ārdhadhātuka affix be- fore its actual application. अनह्व tech. term used by the writers; of the Prātiśākhya works for fre- quentative formations such as रीरिष:, चाक्लृपत् etc.; cf A. Pr. 4.86. अनाकाङ्क्ष not depending on another for the completion of its sense: cf. न यद्यनाकाङ्क्षे P. III.4.23, and Nyāsa thereon which explains अनाकाङक्षे as न विद्यते आकाङ्क्षा अपेक्षा यस्य तस्मिन्. अनाकृति not capable of presenting (on its mere utterance) any tangible |
form or figure the word is used in connection with a technical term (संज्ञाशब्द) which presents its sense by a definition actually laid down or given in the treatise: cf. अनाकृति: संज्ञा । अाकृतिमन्तः संज्ञिनः M. Bh. on I.1.1. अनादर absence of consideration; dis- regard: cf. षष्ठी चानादरे P.II.3.38. अनादि non-initial. e.g. अनादेश्च मुङ्वचनम् P. III.4.102, Vārt. 4; also M. Bh. on VII.1.3. अनादिष्ट not replaced as a substitute; e. g. यः अनादिष्टादचः पूर्यस्तस्य निधिं प्रति स्थानिवद्भावः M.Bh. on I.1.57 Vārt. 1, III.2.3 Vārt.2, and VI.1.12 Vārt.10. अनादेश (1) original, not such as is sub- stituted: e.g. युष्मदस्मदोरनादेशे P.VII. 2.86; (2) absence of statement, अनि- र्देश e.g. कर्तरि कृद्वचनमनादेशे स्वार्थविज्ञानात् P. III.4.67, Vārt. 1: cf the Pari. अनिर्दिष्टार्थाः प्रत्ययाः स्वार्थे भवन्ति Par. Śek. Pari. 113. अनानन्तर्य not a close relation; dis- tance: cf. क्वचिच्च संनिपातकृतमानन्तर्य शास्त्र- कृतमनान्तर्ये क्वचिच्च नैव संनिपातकृतं नापि शास्त्रकृतम् । M. Bh. on VIII.3.13. अनानुपूर्व्यसंहिता that saṁhitā text which has an order of words in it, which is different from what obtains in the Pada-pāṭha, and which appears appropriate accor- ding to the sense intended in the passage. There are three places of such combinations of words which are not according to the succcession of words in the Pada-pāṭha, quot- ed in the R.Pr. शुनश्चिच्छेपं निदितं सहस्रात् Rk. Saṁ. V.2.7, नरा वा शंसं पूषणमगो- ह्यम् Rk. Saṁ. X. 64.3; नरा च शंसं दैव्यम् Rk. Saṁh. IX. 86. 42. cf. एता अनानुपूर्व्यसंहिताः । न ह्येतेषां त्रयाणां पदानुपूर्व्येण संहितास्ति Uvvaṭa on R. Pr. II.78. |
अनान्तर्य absence of proximity, ab- sence of cognateness; cf. इह तर्हि खट्वर्श्यो मालर्श्य इति दीर्घवचनादकारो न, अना- न्तर्यादेकारौकारौ न । M. Bh. on Śiva Sūtras 3-4. अनाप्य having or possessing no āpya or object; intransitive (root): cf. चालशब्दार्थाद् अनाप्याद् युच् Cāndra I.2 97 standing for चलनशब्दार्थाद् अकर्मकाद् युच् P. III.2.148. अनार्ष (1) non-vedic: not proceeding from any Ṛṣi, or Vedic Seer, cf. संबुद्धौ शाकल्यस्येतौ अनार्षे P. I.1.16, also Kāś. on the same: cf. किमिदमुपस्थितं नाम । अनार्ष इतिकरणः M.Bh.on VI.1.129: (2) pertaining to the Padapāṭha which is looked upon as अनार्ष i, e. not proceeding from any Vedic Seer; cf. अनार्षे इतिकरणः । स च द्व्यक्षर आद्युदात्तश्च, Uvvaṭa on R. Pr. III.23; cf. also A. Pr. III. 1.3. अनि kṛt affix in the sense of curse, e.g. अजीवनिस्ते शठ भूयात्; cf.आक्रोशे नञि अनिः P.III.3.112. This affix अनि gets its न् changed into ण् after ऋ or रेफ of the preceding preposition as in अप्रयाणिः;cf. Kāś, on VIII.4.29. अनिच् samāsānta affix after the word धर्म and some other words pre- scribed by P. V. 4.124-6, e. g. कल्याणधर्मा, सुजम्भा, दक्षिणेर्मा. अनिट् (l) not admitting the augment इट् to be prefixed to it; the term is strictly to be applied to ārdhadhā- tuka affixes placed after such roots as have their vowel characterized by a grave accent ( अनुदात्तस्वर ); the term अनिट् being explained as अनिडादि qualifying the अार्धधातुक affix; (2) in a secondary way, it has be- come customary to call such roots अनिट् as do not allow the augment इट् to be prefixed to an ārdhadhā- tuka affix placed after them. Such roots are termed अनुदात्त verily be- cause they are possessed of an |
anudātta vowel. e. g. कृ, भृ, जि, गम् , हन् etc. as against भु, धू, तॄ, श्वि, वृ, वद्, फल्, चल्, etc. which have their vowel characterized by an acute (उदात्त ) accent. For a complete list of such roots see the well-known stanzas given in the Siddhānta- kaumudī incidentally on अात्मनेपदेष्व- नतः P. VII.1.5. ऊदॄदन्तैर्यौतिरुक्ष्णुशीङ्स्नु- ....निहताः स्मृताः ॥ १ ॥ शक्लृपच्मुचिरिचवच्विच् .........धातवो द्व्यधिकं शतम् ॥ as also some lists by ancient gram- marians given in the Mahābhāṣya on एकाच उपदेशेनुदात्तात्. P. VII. 2.10 or in the Kāśikā on the same rule P. VII.2.10. अनिट्कारिका (1) name given to Stanzas giving a complete list of such roots as do not allow the aug- ment इ ( इट् ) to be prefixed to an ārdhadhātuka affix placed after them. For such Kārikās see Sid. Kaum. on VII.1.5 as also Kāśikā on VII. 2.10; ( 2 ) a short treatise enumerating in 11 verses the roots which do not admit the augment इट् before the ārdhadhatuka affixes. The work is anonymous, and not printed so far, possibly composed by a Jain writer. The work possibly belongs to the Kātantra system and has got short glosses called व्याख्यान, अवचूरि, विवरण, टीका, टिप्पणी and the like which are all anonymous. अनिट्कारिकाविवरण a short commen- tary by Kṣamāmāṇikya on the work Aniṭkārikā, which see above. अनिङ्ग्य not separable into two padas or words by means of avagraha; cf. संध्य ऊष्माप्यनिङ्ग्ये: R. Pr. V.41; cf. also R. Pr. IX.25, XIII.30. See इङ्ग्य below. अनित्य (l) not nitya or obligatory optional; said of a rule or pari- bhāṣā whose application is volun- |
tary). Regarding the case and con= jugational affixes it can be said that those affixes can, in a way: be looked upon as nitya or obliga- tory, as they have to be affixed to a crude nominal base or a root; there being a dictum that no crude base without an affix can be used as also, no affix alone without a base can be used. On the other hand, the taddhita and kṛt affixes as also compounds are voluntary as, instead of them an independent word or a phrase can be used to convey the sense. For a list of such nitya affixes see M. Bh. on V. 4.7; (2) the word अनित्य is also used in the sense of not-nitya, the word नित्य being taken to mean कृताकृतप्रसङ्गि occurring before as well as after another rule has been appli- ed, the latter being looked upon as अनित्य which does not do so. This 'nityatva' has got a number of ex- ceptions and limitations which are mentioned in Paribhāṣās 43-49 in the Paribhāṣenduśekhara. अनिर्दप्रथम an underived word: an ancient term used by writers of the Prātiśākhyas to signify 'original' words which cannot be subjected to निर्वचन. अनिपात्य not necessary to be specifi- cally or implicitly stated, as it can be brought about or accomplished in the usual way: e. g. द्वन्द्वम् । लिङ्गम- शिष्यं लोकाश्रयत्वाल्लिङ्गस्य । तत्र नपुंसकत्वमनि- पात्यम् M. Bh. on VIII.1.15. See also M. Bh. on VII.2.27 and VI. 1.207. अनिमित्त not serving as a cause, not possessing a causal relation; e. g. संनिपातलक्षणे विधिरनिमित्तं तद्विघातस्य Par. Śek. Pari. 85. See also M. Bh. on I.1.39. |
अनियत not subject to any limitation cf. प्रत्यया नियताः, अर्था अनियताः, अर्था नियताः, प्रत्यया अनियताः M.Bh. on II. 3.50. In the casc of नियमविधि (a res- trictive rule or statement ) a limi- tation is put on one or more of the constituent elements or factors of that rule, the limited element being called नियत, the other one being termed अनियत; also see Kāś. on II.2.30. अनियतपुंस्क whose sex-especially whether it is a male or a female-is not definitely known from its mere sight; small insects which are so. The term क्षुद्रा in P. IV.1.131 is explained in the Mahābhāṣya as क्षुद्रा नाम अनियतपुंस्का अङ्गहीना वा M. Bh. on P. IV.1.131. अनिर्दिष्टार्थ whose sense has not been specifically stated ; the word is used with reference to such affixes as are not prescribed in any speci- fic sense or senses and hence as are looked upon as possessing the sense which the base after which they are prescribed has got: cf. अनिर्दिष्टार्थाः प्रत्ययाः स्वार्थे भवन्ति -affixes, to which no meaning has been assigned, convey the meaning of the bases to which they are added; cf. Par. Śek. Pari. 113; cf. also M. Bh. on III.2.4, III, 2.67, III.3.19, III. 4.9, VI.1.162. अनिष्ट an undesired consequence or result; cf. अनिष्टं च प्राप्नोति इष्टे च न सिध्यति M. Bh. on I.3.1 , also cf. नानिष्टार्था शास्त्रप्रवृत्तिः M. Bh. on VI.1.2. अनिष्टिज्ञ ignorant or inattentive to what the Grammarian intends or desires to say. cf. तत्र सौर्यभगवतोक्तम्- अनिष्टिज्ञो वाडव: पठति । इत्यत एव चतुर्मात्रः प्लुत: M. Bh. on VIII.2.106. अनीयर् kṛt affix, termed कृत्य also forming the pot. pass. part. of a |
root; cf. तव्यत्तव्यानीयरः P.III.1.96. e.g. see the forms करणीयं, हरणीयं, the mute र् showing the acute accent on the penultimate vowel, अनुकरण (l) imitation; a word utter- ed in imitation of another; an imi- tative name: cf. अनुकरणे चानितिपरम् P.I.4.62; अनुकरणं हि शिष्टशिष्टाप्रतिषिद्धेषु यथा लौकिकवैदिकेषु, Śiva sūtra 2 Vārt 1; cf. also प्रकृतिवद् अनुकरणं भवति an imi- tative name is like its original Par. Śek. Pari. 36; also M.Bh. on VIII. 2.46; (2) imitative word, onoma- topoetic word; cf. एवं ह्याहुः कुक्कुटाः कुक्कुड् इति । नैवं त आहुः । अनुकरणमेतत्तेषाम् M. Bh. on I.3.48. cf. also दुन्दुभि: इति शब्दानुकरणम् Nir. IX. 12. अनुकर्षण dragging (from the preced- ing rule) to the following rule tak- ing the previous rule or a part of it as understood in the following rule or rules in order; the same as अनुवृत्ति; cf. अनुकर्षणार्थश्चकारः Kāś. on II. 4.18, III.2.26, VII. 1.48: cf also the Paribhāṣā; चानुकृष्टं नोत्तरत्र -that which is attracted from a preced- ing rule by the particle च is not valid in the rule that follows; Par. Śek. Pari. 78. अनुकृष्ट attracted from a previous rule as is frequently done in Pāṇi- ni's rules. See the word अनुकर्षण above. अनुक्त not actually stated or expressed in a rule; cf. चकारोऽनुक्तसमुच्चयार्थ: Kāś. on II.4.18, III.2.26, VII. 1.48; also cf. Nyāsa on P.II.2.9 अनुक्रम right or regular order in a Vedic recital, called क्रम. e. g. वायव: स्थ. अनुक्रमण enumeration (in the right order as.opposed to व्युत्क्रम ); e. g. अथ किमर्थमुत्तरत्र एवमादि अनुक्रमणं क्रियते M. Bh. on II.1.58; also on IV. 2.70; verbal forms of the root क्रम् with अनु occur in this sense very |
frequently; e.g. यदित ऊर्ध्वं अनुक्रमिष्यामः; so also the p.p.p. अनुक्रान्तं occurs frequently in the same sense. अनुतन्त्र lit. that which follows Tantra i.e. Śāstra which means the original rules of a Śāstra; technical term for Vartika used by Bhartṛhari;cf. सूत्राणां सानुतन्त्राणां भाष्याणां च प्रणेतृभिः Vāk. Pad. I.23, where the word अनुतन्त्र is ex- plained as Vārtika by the com- mentator. अनुत्तम other than उत्तम or the first person; cf. विभाषितं सोपसर्गमनुत्तमम् P. VII.1.53 and Kāśika thereon. अनुत्पति non-production of an ele- ment of a word such as an affix or an augment or the like; cf. वावचने चानुत्पत्त्यर्थम् P.III.1.2 Vārt. 7, तत्रो- त्पत्तिर्वा प्रसङ्गो यथा तद्धिते P. III.1.94 Vārt. 2, also कृष्यादिषु चानुत्पत्तिः (णिचः) P.III.1.26, Vārt. 3. अनुदात्त non-udatta, absence of the acute accent;one of the Bāhyapra- yatnas or external efforts to pro- duce sound. This sense possibly refers to a stage or a time when only one accent, the acute or उदात्त was recognized just as in English and other languages at present, This udatta was given to only one vowel in a single word (simple or compound) and all the other vowels were uttered accentless.i.e. अनुदात्त. Possibly with this idea.in view, the standard rule 'अनुदात्तं पदमे- कवर्जम्'* was laid down by Panini. P.VI.1.158. As, however, the syllable, just preceding the accent- ed ( उदात्त ) syllable, was uttered with a very low tone, it was call- ed अनुदात्ततर, while if the syllables succeeding the accented syllable showed a gradual fall in case they happened to be consecutive and more than two, the syllable suc- ceeding the उदात्त was given a mid-way tone, called स्वरितः cf. |
उदात्तादनुदात्तस्य स्वरितः. Thus, in the utterance of Vedic hymns the practice of three tones उदात्त, अनुदात्त and स्वरित came in vogue and accordingly they are found defined in all the Prātiśākhya and grammar works;cf. उच्चैरुदात्तः,नीचैरनुदात्तः समाहारः स्वरितः P.I.2.29-31, T.Pr.I.38-40, V.Pr.I.108-110, Anudātta is defined by the author of the Kāśi- kāvṛtti as यस्मिन्नुच्चार्यमाणे गात्राणामन्ववसर्गो नाम शिथिलीभवनं भवति, स्वरस्य मृदुता, कण्ठ- विवरस्य उरुता च स: अनुदात्तः cf. अन्ववसर्गो मार्दवमुरुता स्वस्येति नीचैःकराणि शब्दस्य M. Bh. on I.2.29,30. Cf. also उदात्तश्चानुदात्तश्च स्वरितश्च त्रयः स्वराः । अायाम- विश्रम्भोक्षपैस्त उच्यन्तेSक्षराश्रयाः ॥ R. Pr. III.1. The term anudātta is trans- lated by the word 'grave' as oppo- sed to acute' (udātta,) and 'circu- mflex' (svarita); (2) a term appli- ed to such roots as have their vowel अनुदात्त or grave, the chief characteristic of such roots being the non-admission of the augment इ before an ārdhadhātuka affix placed after them. ( See अनिट्, ). अनुदात्ततर quite a low tone, comple- tely grave; generally applied to the tone of that grave or anudātta vowel which is immediately follow- ed by an acute ( उदात्त ) vowel. When the three Vedic accents were sub-divided into seven tones viz. उदात्त, उदात्ततर्, अनुदात्त, अनुदात्ततर, स्वरित, स्वरितस्थोदात्त and एकश्रुति corres- ponding to the seven musical notes, the अनुदात्ततर was the name given to the lowest of them all. अनुदात्ततर was termed सन्नतर also; cf. उदात्तस्वरित- परस्य सन्नतरः P.I.2.40; cf. also M, Bh. on I.2.33. अनुदात्ता a term meaning 'having a grave accent,' used by ancient grammarians.Cf. किमियमेकश्रुतिरुदात्ता उत अनुदात्ता M. Bh.on I. 2.33. |
अनुदात्तेत् lit. one whose mute signifi- catory letter is uttered with a grave accent: a term applied to a root characterized by an indicatory mute vowel accented grave, the chief feature of such a root being that it takes only the Ātmanepada affixes c. g. आस्ते, वस्ते, etc.; cf. अनुदात्तङित आत्मनेपदम् P. I.3.12; such a root, in forming a derivative word in the sense of habit, takes the affix युच् e. g. वर्त्तनः, वर्धन: etc. provided the root begins with a consonant; cf. अनुदात्तेतश्र हलादेः P. III.2.149. अनुदात्तोपदेश (a root) pronounced ori- ginally i. c. pronounced in the Dhātupāṭha with a grave accent; see the word अनुदात्त above: cf. अनुदात्तोपदेशवनतितनोत्यादीनामनुनासिकलोपो झलि ङ्किति P. VI.4.37. See also the word अनिट् above. अनुदेश (1) reference, mention, state- ment referring to a preceding ele- ment. cf. यथासंख्यमनुदेशः समानाम् P.I. 3.10; cf. आसिद्धवचनात् सिद्धमिति चेद् उत्सर्ग- लक्षणानामनुदेशः M. Bh. I.1.57, Vārt. 3. (2) declaration, prescription : the same as अतिदेश. cf. स्थान्यादेशपृथक्त्वादेशे स्थानिवद् अनुदेशो गुरुवद् गुरुपुत्र इति यथा P. I.1.56 Vārt. 1; (3) a grammatical operation cf. यथासंख्यमनुदेशः समानाम् ! समसंबन्धी विधिर्यथासंख्यं स्यात् Sid. Kau. on P.I. 8.10. See the word अनुद्देश in this sense cf. संख्यातानामनूद्देशो यथा- संख्यम् V, Pr.I.143. अनुनाद a fore-sound : a preceding additional sound which is looked upon as a fault: e. g. ह्वयामि whom pronounced as अह्वयामि. This sound is uttered before an initial sonant consonant. It is also utter- ed before initial aspirates or visarga. cf. घोषवतामनुनादः पुरस्ताद् आदिस्थानां, क्रियते धारणं वा । सोष्मोष्माणामनुनादोप्यनादः R. Pr. XIV.18,19. |
अनुनासिक (a letter) uttered through the nose and mouth both, as differ- ent from anusvāra which is uttered only through the nose. cf. मुखनासिका- वचनोनुनासिकःP.I.1.8, and M. Bh. thereon. The anunāsika or nasal letters are the fifth letters of the five classes ( i.e. ङ्, ञ्, ण्, न्, म् ) as also vowels अ, इ, उ and semivowels when so pronounced, as ordinarily they are uttered through the mouth only; ( e.g. अँ, आँ, etc. or य्यँ, व्वँ, ल्लँ etc. in सय्यँन्ता, सव्वँत्सरः, सँल्लीनः etc.) The अनुनासिक or nasalized vowels are named रङ्गवर्ण and they are said to be con- sisting of three mātras. cf. अष्टौ आद्यानवसानेsप्रगृह्यान् आचार्या आहुरनुना- सिकान् स्वरान् । तात्रिमात्रे शाकला दर्शयन्ति R. Pr. I.63.64; cf. also अप्रग्रहाः समानाक्षराणि अनुनासिकानि एकेषाम् T. Pr XV.6. Trivikrama, a commentator on the Kāt. Sūtras, explains अनुनासिक as अनु पश्चात् नासिकास्थानं उच्चारणं एषां इत्यनुनासिकाः । पूर्वं मुखस्थानमुच्चारणं पश्चा- न्नासिकास्थानमुच्चारणमित्यर्थः । अनुग्रहणात्केवल- नासिकास्थानोच्चारणस्य अनुस्वारस्य नेयं संज्ञा । and remarks further पूर्वाचार्यप्रसिद्धसंज्ञे- यमन्वर्था । Com. by Tr. on Kat. I 1.13. Vowels which are uttered nasalized by Pāṇini in his works viz. सूत्रपाठ, धातुपाठ, गणपाठ etc. are silent ones i. e. they are not actu- ally found in use. They are put by him only for the sake of a com- plete utterance, their nasalized nature being made out only by means of traditional convention. e. g. एध, स्पर्ध etc. cf. उपदेशेSजनुनासिक इत् P.I.3.2; cf. also प्रतिज्ञानुनासिक्याः पाणिनीयाः Kāś on I.3.2. अनुन्यास a commentary on न्यास (काशि- काविवरणपञ्जिका by जिनेन्द्रबुद्धि). The work is believed to have been written by इन्दुमित्र. It is not available at pre- |
sent except in the form of refer- ences to it which are numerous especially in Siradeva's Paribhā- ṣāvṛtti. अनुपपत्ति discord, absence of validity, incorrect interpretation; cf.प्रथमानुपप- त्तिस्तु M.Bh on I.4.9. अनुपपद्यमाना impossibility of being explained; cf. तत्र सिद्धायां अनुपपद्यमा- नायां इतरथा उपपादयिषेत्, Nir II.2. अनुपपन्न impossible to be explained, not consistent , cf. अथाप्यनुपपन्नार्था भवन्ति । ओषधे त्रायस्वैनम् । Nir. I.15. अनुपरिपाद्य (संहिता) the Pada text of the Vedic Saṁhitā. अनुपसर्जन not subordinated in word- relation, principal member; cf. अनु- पसर्जनात् P. IV.I.14 and M.Bh. thereon; cf also Par. Śek Pari. 26. अनुप्रदान an effort outside the mouth in the production of sound at the different vocal organs such as कण्ठ, तालु etc. which is looked upon as an external effort or bāhyaprayatna. अनुप्रदान is one of the three main factors in the produc- tion of sound which are ( 1 ) स्थान, ( 2 ) करण or आभ्यन्तरप्रयत्न and ( 3 ) अनुप्रदान or बाह्यप्रयत्न; cf. स्थाकरणप्रयत्नेभ्यो वर्णा जायन्ते Cān. The commentator on T. Pr. describes अनुप्रदान as the मूलकारण or उपादानकारण, the main cause in the production of articu- late sound cf. अनुप्रदीयते अनेन वर्णः इति अनुप्रदानम्: cf also अनुप्रदीयते इत्यनुप्रदानं प्रयत्न इत्यर्थः; Uvvaṭa on R. Pr. XIII. I. Generally two main varieties of बाह्यप्रयत्न are termed अनुप्रदान which are mentioned as (i) श्वासानुप्रदान (emission of breath) and नादानुप्रदान (resonance), the other varieties of it such as विवार, संवार, घोष, अघोष, अल्पप्राण, मह्मप्राण, उदात्त, अनुदात्त and स्वरित being called merely as बाह्यप्रयत्न. |
अनुप्रयोग subsequent utterance; lit. post-position as in the case of the roots कृ, भू and अम् in the periphra- stic perfect forms; cf. आम्प्रत्ययवत् कृञोऽ नुप्रयोगस्य, P.I.3.63; यथाविध्यनुप्रयोगः पूर्वस्मिन् III.4.4. अनुबन्ध a letter or letters added to a word before or after it, only to signify some specific purpose such as (a) the addition of an afix (e. g. क्त्रि, अथुच् अङ् etc.) or (b) the substitution of गुण, वृद्धि or संप्रसारण vowel or (c) sometimes their preven- tion. These anubandha letters are termed इत् (lit. going or disappear- ing) by Pāṇini (cf. उपदेशेजनुनासिक इत् etc. I.3.2 to 9), and they do not form an essential part of the word to which they are attached, the word in usage being always found without the इत् letter. For technical purposes in grammar, however, such as आदित्व or अन्तत्व of affixes which are characterized by इत् letters, they are looked upon as essential factors, cf. अनेकान्ता अनुबन्धाः, एकान्ता:, etc, Par. Śek. Pari. 4 to 8. Although पाणिनि has invariably used the term इत् for अनुबन्ध letters in his Sūtras, Patañjali and other reputed writers on Pāṇini's grammar right on upto Nāgeśa of the 18th century have used the term अनुबन्ध of ancient grammarians in their writings in the place of इत्. The term अनुबन्ध was chosen for mute significatory letters by ancient grammarians probably on account of the ana- logy of the अनुबन्ध्य पशु, tied down at sacrifices to the post and subsequently slaughtered. अनुभूतिस्वरूपाचार्य a writer of the twelfth century who wrote a work on grammar called सरस्वती-प्रक्रिया or सारस्वतप्रक्रिया, He has also written |
धातुपाठ and आख्यातप्रक्रिया. The gram- mar is a short one and is studied in some parts of India. अनुम् not allowing the addition of the augment नुम् (i.e. letter न् ) after the last vowel; The term is used, in connection with the present part. affix, by Pāṇini in his rule शतुरनुमो नद्यजादी VI.1.173. अनुमान inference,suggestion, cf. अशक्या क्रिया पिण्डीभूता निदर्शयितुम् । सासामनुमानगम्या M. Bh. on I.3.1. अनुलोम in the natural order (opp. to प्रतिलोम ), cf. तेऽन्वक्षरसंधयोनुलोमाः in R.Pr.II.8. अनुलोमसंधि is a term applied to Saṁdhis with a vowel first and a consonant afterwards. अनुलोमसंधि combination according to the alphabetical order; a kind of euphonic alteration ( संधि ) where the vowel comes first. e.g- हव्यवाट् + अग्निः where ट् is changed to द्; एषः देवः= एष देवः cf. R. Pr. II. 8. (Sce अनुलोम ). अनुवर्तन continuation or recurrence of a word from the preceding to the succeeding rule; the same as anuvṛtti; cf. अनुवर्तन्ते नाम विधयः । न चानुवर्तनादेव भवन्ति। किं तर्हि । यत्नाद्भवन्तीति M. Bh. on I.1.3. अनुवर्त्य to be observed, to be obeyed; cf. न लक्षणेन पदकाराः अनुवर्त्याः । पदकारिर्नाम लक्षणमनुवर्त्यम् M.Bh. on III.1.109. अनुवाद repetition of a rule already laid down or of a statement already made cf. प्रमाणान्तरावगतस्य अर्थस्य शब्देन संकीर्तनमात्रमनुवाद: Kāś. on II.4.3. अनुविधि operation in conformity with what is found. The expression छन्दसि दृष्टानुविधिः is often found in the Mahābhāṣya: cf. M. Bh. on I.1.5, I.1.6, I.1.21, III.1.9, III.1.13, VI.1.6, VI.1.77, VI.1.79, VI. 4.128,VI.4.141, VIII.2.108. |
अनुवृत्ति repetition or recurrence of a word from the previous to the sub- sequent rule or rules, which is necessary for the sake of the intend- ed interpretation. The word is of common use in books on Pāṇini's grammar. This recurrence is gene- rally continuous like the stream of a river ( गङ्गास्रोतोवत् ); sometimes however, when it is not required in an intermediate rule, although it proceeds further, it is named मण्डूकप्लुत्यानुवृत्ति. In rare cases it is taken backwards in a sūtra work from a subsequent rule to a pre- vious rule when it is called अपकर्ष. अनुशासन traditional instruction; treat- - ment of a topic; e.g. अथ शब्दानुशासनम् M. Bh. I. 1.1 where the word is explained as अनुशिष्यन्ते संस्क्रियन्ते व्युत्पा- द्यन्ते अनेन इति अनुशासनम्. अनुषङ्ग (I) lit. attaching, affixing: aug- ment, अनुषज्यते असौ अनुषङ्गः; (2) a term for the nasal letter attached to the following consonant which is the last, used by ancient grammarians; cf. अव्यात्पूर्वे मस्जेरनुषङ्गसंयेगादिलोपार्थम् cf. P.I.1.47 Vārt.2 and M.Bh. there- on; cf. थफान्तानां चानुषङ्गिणाम् Kat. IV. 1.13. The term अनुषङ्ग is defined in the kātantra grammar as व्यञ्जनान्नः अनुषङ्ग. The term is applied to the nasal consonant न् preceding the last letter of a noun base or a root base; penultimate nasal of a root or noun base: Kāt. II.1.12. अनुसंहार independent mention, a second time, of a thing already mentioned,for another purpose; cf. 'अलोन्त्यस्य' इति स्थाने विज्ञातस्यानुसंहारः P.I.1.53 Vārt. 1. अनुसंहितं according to the Saṁhitā text of the Vedas: cf.एतानि नोहं गच्छन्ति अध्रिगो अनुसंहितम् Bhartṛihari's Mahā- bhāṣyadīpikā p. 9; cf. also R. Pr. XI.31, also XV.33, where the |
word is explained as संहिताक्रमेण by Uvaṭa. अनुस्वार see above under अं अनूक्त said afterwards, generally in imitation; cf. अनूक्तवान् अनूचानः । अनू- क्तमित्येवान्यत्र M.Bh. on III.2.109. अनूक्ति statement with reference to what has been already said the same as anvādeśa. अनूद्देश statement or mention imme- diately afterwards; the same as the word अनुदेश used by Pāṇini in I.3.10, cf. संख्यातानामनूद्देशो यथासंख्यम् । अनूद्देशः पश्चादुद्देशः Uvaṭa on V. Pr. I. 143. अनेकशेष having no ekaśeṣa topic in it; a term applied to the Daiva Gram- mar which does not discuss the ekaśeṣa topic to which Pāṇini has devoted ten rules from I. 2.64 to 73. अनेकस्वर having many vowels or syllables in it; the same as अनेकाच् of Pāṇini; cf. Hem. III. 4.46 अनेकाक्षर having many syllables in it; cf. अनेकाक्षरयोस्त्वसंयोगाद्यवौ Kāt. II.2.59. अनेकाच् having many vowels (two or more) in it; opp. to एकाच् : a term frequently used in Pāṇini's gram- mar meaning the same as अनेकस्वर or अनेकाक्षर, which see above; cf. P. VI.3.42,VI.4.82 अनेकान्त (1) not forming an integral part, the same as अनवयव; cf. अने- कान्ताः अनवयवा इत्यर्थः Par. Śek. Pari 4. (2) absence of any definite view cf. अनेकान्तत्वाच्च । येषां चाप्यारभ्यते तेषामप्यने- कान्तः । .. मामहान उक्थपात्रम् । ममहान इति च । M. Bh. on VI.I.7 अनेकार्थ (l) possessed of a plural sense referring to many things. cf. अनेकार्थे युष्मदस्मदी M. Bh. on P.II. 2.98 also अनेकार्थाश्रयश्च पुनरेकशेषः P. I. 2.64 Vārt. 15; (2) possessed of |
many senses, cf. अनेकार्था अपि धातवो भवन्ति M. Bh, on P.III.2.48; also cf. यान्यनेकार्थानि एकशब्दानि तान्यतोनु- क्रमिष्यामः Nir. IV.1. अनेकाल् possessed of many ietters; lit. possessed of not one letter, cf अनेकाल् शित् सर्वस्य P. I.1.55. अनेजन्त not ending in a diphthong: cf नानुबन्धकृतमनेजन्तत्व म् Par. Śek. Par.7 अनैकान्तिक undetermined, indefinite एतद्प्यनैकान्तिकं यदल्पप्राणस्य सर्वोच्चैस्तन्महा- प्राणस्य सर्वनीचै: M. Bh.on I.2.30, also M. Bh. on VI. 1.37; not invari- able, cf. अनैकान्तिकं ज्ञापकम् M. Bh. on VII.2.102, VIII.3.34 अनैमित्तिक not possessed of any defi- nite cause; अनैमित्तिको ह्यनुबन्धलेाप: M. Bh. on I. 1.20 also on I. 1.59 and I. 2.64. अन्त final, phonetically last element remaining, of course, after the mute significatory letters have been dropped. cf. अनुत्तरलक्षणोन्तः M. Bh. on I. 1.21 Vārt, 6. अन्तकरण lit. bringing about as the final; an affix (which is generally put at the end); ancient term for an affix: cf.एतेः कारितं च यकारादिं चान्त- करणम्। अस्तेः शुद्धं च सकारादिं च । Nir. I.13 अन्तःकार्य lit. interior operation; an operation inside a word in its formation-stage which naturally becomes antaraṅga as contrasted with an operation depending on two complete words after their formation which is looked upon as bahiraṅga. अन्तःपादम् inside a word; explained as पदस्य मध्ये by उव्वटः cf. नुश्रान्तः पदेऽरेफे V.Pr.IV.2 cf. also अन्तःपदं विवृत्तयः R. Pr.II.13. अन्तःपात insertion of a letter or pho- netic element such as the letter क् |
between ङ् and a sibilant, or the letter ट् between ण् and a sibilant; cf. प्रत्यङ्क् स विश्वा, वज्रिञ् च् ， छ्र्थिहि; cf. Pān. VIII.3.28, 29, 30, 31: cf. तेऽन्तःपाताः अकृतसंहितानाम् R. Pr.IV.20 अन्तःपादम् inside the foot of a verse explained as पादस्य मध्ये by Uvvaṭa; cf. प्रकृत्याऽन्तः पादमव्यपरे. P.VI.I.113. अन्तःस्थ, अन्तःस्था f., also writen as अन्तस्थ, अन्तस्था f., semivowel; cf. अथान्तस्थाः । यिति रेिन लेिति वितिः; V. Pr. VIII.14-15: cf. चतस्रोन्तस्थाः ex- plained by उव्वट as स्पर्शोषमणामन्तः मध्ये तिष्ठन्तीति अन्तस्थाः R.Pr.I.9, also पराश्चतन्नान्तस्थाः T. Pr. I. 8. The ancient term appears to be अन्तस्थाः f. used in the Prātiśākhya works. The word अन्तःस्थानाम् occurs twice in the Mahābhāṣya from which it cannot be said whether the word there is अन्तःस्थ m. or अन्तःस्था f. The term अन्तस्थ or अन्तस्था is ex- plained by the commentators on Kātantra as स्वस्य स्वस्य स्थानस्य अन्ते तिष्ठन्तीति । अन्तर interval between two phonetic elements when they are uttered one after another; hiatus, pause; वर्णान्तरं परमाणु, R.T. 34; also विरामो वर्णयोर्मध्येप्यणुकालोप्यसंयुते Vyāsaśikṣā; (2) space between two phonetic ele- ments, e. g. स्वरान्तरे explained as स्वरयोरन्तरे (between two vowels) by Uvvaṭa cf. अन्तस्थान्तरोपलिङ्गी विभा- षितगुणः Nir X.17. अन्तरङ्ग a highly technical term in Pāṇini's grammar applied in a variety of ways to rules which thereby can supersede other rules. The term is not used by Pāṇini himself. The Vārti- kakāra has used the term thrice ( Sec I. 4. 2 Vārt. 8, VI.1.106 Vart.10 and VIII.2.6 Vārt. I) evidently in the sense of imme- |
diate', 'urgent', 'of earlier occur- rence' or the like. The word is usually explained as a Bahuvrīhi compound meaning 'अन्त: अङ्गानि निमित्तानि यस्य' (a rule or operation which has got the causes of its application within those of another rule or operation which consequ- ently is termed बहिरङ्ग). अन्तरङ्ग, in short, is a rule whose causes of operation occur earlier in the wording of the form, or in the pro- cess of formation. As an अन्तरङ्ग rule occurs to the mind earlier, as seen above, it is looked upon as stronger than any other rule, barr- ing of course अपवाद rules or excep- tions, if the other rule presents itself simultaneously. The Vārtika- kāra, hence, in giving preference to अन्तरङ्ग rules, uses generally the wording अन्तरङ्गबलीयस्त्वात् which is paraphrased by अन्तरङ्गं बहिरङ्गाद् बलीयः which is looked upon as a pari- bhāṣā. Grammarians, succeeding the Vārtikakāra, not only looked upon the बहिरङ्ग operation as weaker than अन्तरङ्ग, but they looked upon it as invalid or invisible before the अन्तरङ्ग operation had taken place. They laid down the Paribhāṣā असिद्धं बहिरङ्गमन्तरङ्गे which has been thoroughly discussed by Nāgeśa in his Paribhāṣendusekhara. The अन्तरङ्गत्व is taken in a variety of ways by Grammarians : (l) having causes of application within or before those of another e. g. स्येनः from the root सिव् (सि + उ+ न) where the यण् substitute for इ is अन्तरङ्ग be- ing caused by उ as compared to guṇa for उ which is caused by न, (2) having causes of application occurring before those of another in the wording of the form, (3) having a smaller number of causes, (4) occurring earlier in the order |
of several operations which take place in arriving at the complete form of a word, (5) not having संज्ञा (technical term) as a cause of its application, ( 6 ) not depending upon two words or padas, (7) de- pending upon a cause or causes of a general nature (सामान्यापेक्ष) as oppos- ed to one which depends on causes of a specific nature ( विशेषापेक्ष). अन्तरङ्गपरिभाषा the phrase is used generally for the परिभाषा "असिद्धं बहि- रङ्गमन्तरङ्गे' described above. See the word अन्तरङ्ग. The परिभाषा has got a very wide field of application and is used several times in setting aside difficulties which present themselves in the formation of a word. Like many other paribhāṣās this paribhāṣā is not a paribhāṣā of universal application. अन्तरङ्गबलीयस्त्व the strength which an antaraṅga rule or operation possesses by virtue of which it supersedes all other rules or ope- rations,excepting an apavāda rule, when or if they occur simultane- ously in the formation of a word. अन्तरङ्गलक्षण characterized by the nature of an antaraṅga operation which gives that rule a special strength to set aside other rules occurring together with it. अन्तरतम very close or very cognate being characterized (l) by the same place of utterance, or (2) by possessing the same sense, or (3) by possessing the same qualities, or (4) by possessing the same dimension ; cf स्थानेन्तरतमः P.I. I.50 and Kāś. thereon अान्तर्यं स्थानार्थगुणुप्रमाणतः स्थानतः दण्डाग्रम् , अर्थतः वतण्डी चासौ युवतिश्च वातण्ड्य- युवतिः । गुणतः पाकः, त्यागः, रागः । प्रमाणतः अमुष्मै अमूभ्याम् ॥ अन्तर्गण a group of words mentioned inside another group of words (गण); |
cf. पुषादिदेवाद्यन्तर्गणो गृह्यते, न भ्वादिक्रया- द्यन्तर्गणः Kāś on III.1.55; also काण्वादिगर्गाद्यन्तर्गणः Kāś on IV.2.111. अन्तर्भाव inclusion of an element (of sense) in what has been actually assigned. e.g. देवदत्तमुपरमति । उपरमय- तीति यावत् । अन्तर्भावितण्यर्थोत्र रमिः Kāś on P. I.3.84, अन्तर्भावितण्यर्थो युधिः सकर्मको भवति । राजयुध्वा Kāś on P.III. 2.95. अन्तर्हित separated by a dissimilar element; cf. यूनि चान्तर्हित अप्राप्तिः P.IV. 1.93 Vārt. 5. व्यञ्जनान्तर्हितोपि उदात्तपरः अनुदात्तः स्वरितमापद्यते T. Pr.XIV.30; cf. also R. Pr. III.9. अन्तवद्भाव supposed condition of be- ing at the end obtained by the single substitute(एकादेश) for the final of the preceding and the initial of the succeeding word. cf. अन्तादि- वच्च । योयमेकादेशः स पूर्वस्यान्तवत् परस्थादिवत् स्यात् । Sid. Kau. on अन्तादिवच्च P.VI. 1.84. अन्तस्था f. also अन्तस्थः semi-vowel; see under अन्त:स्थ. अन्तादिवद्भाव condition, attributed to a single substitute for the final of the preceding and initial of the succeeding word, of being looked upon either as the final of the preceding word or as the initial of the succeeding word but never as both (the final as well as the initial) at one and the same time; cf. उभयत आश्रये नान्तादिवत् Sīr. Pari 39 also M. Bh. on I.2.48. अन्ताम् affix of the impera. 3rd pers. plur. Ātm., substituted for the original affix झ, e. g. एधन्ताम्. अन्ति affix of the pres. 3rd pers. pl. Paras, substituted for the original affix झि, e. g. कुर्वन्ति, भवन्ति. अन्तु affix of the impera. 3rd pers. pl. Paras. substituted for the original affix झि. e.g. भवन्तु, कुर्वन्तु |
अन्ते affix of the pres. 3rd pers. pl. Ātm. substituted for the original affix झ, e g. एधन्ते वर्तन्ते. अन्तोदात्त a word with its last vowel accented acute. Roots, crude : noun bases and compound words gene- rally have their last vowel accent- ed acute; cf. फिषः (प्रातिपदिकस्य ) अन्त उदात्तः स्यात् Phiṭ Sūtra 1-1; धातोः (P. VI.1.162} अन्त उदात्तः स्यात्; समासस्य ( P.VI.1.223) अन्त उदात्तः स्यात् । अन्त्य (1) final letter; अन्ते भवमन्त्यम् (2) final consonant of each of the five groups of consonants which is a nasal अन्त्योनुनासिकः R.T. 17. अन्यतरतः optionally, lit. in another way; cf. वर्णसंख्ये अन्यतरतः V.P.V.15. अन्यतरस्याम् optionally; lit. in another way. The term is very common in the rules of Pāṇini, where the terms वा and विभाषा are also used in the same sense. अन्यपदार्थ another sense, sense differ- ent from what has been expressed by the wording given; cf. अनेकमन्य- पदार्थे P.II.2.24; also अन्यपदार्थप्रधानो बहुव्रीहिः M. Bh. on II.1.6. अन्ययुक्त connected with the word अन्य; connected with another : e.g अन्यो गवां स्वामीति न ह्यत्र गावोन्ययुक्ताः । कस्तर्हि । स्वामी. M.Bh. on P.II.3.22. अन्यसदृशाधिकरण an object which is different from what is mentioned, yet similar to it cf. नञिवयुक्तमन्यसदृशा धिकरणे तथा ह्यर्थगति; । अब्राह्मणमानयेत्युक्ते ब्राह्मणसदृश आनीयते । नासौ लोष्टमानीय कृती भवति । M. Bh. on P. III.1.12 अन्याय्य irregular; cf.सूर्यविश्रामा भूमिरि- त्येवमादिकं प्रयोगमन्याय्यमेव मन्यन्ते; Kāś. on P.VII.3.34. अन्यार्थ (1) having another purpose or signification: cf. अन्यार्थं प्रकृतं अन्यार्थं भवति M. Bh. on l.1.23; (2) another sense which is different from what is expressed cf. अन्यार्थो बहुव्रीहिः Cān. II.2.46. |
अन्योन्यसंश्रय reciprocally dependent and hence serving no purpose; same as इतरेतराश्रय which is looked upon as a fault. cf अन्योन्यसंश्रयं त्वेतत् । स्वीकृतः शब्दः शब्दकृतं च स्त्रीत्वं M.Bh. on IV.1.3. अन्वक्षरसंधि a combination of letters according to the order of the letters in the Alphabet; a samdhi or euphonic combination of a vowel and a consonant, called अन्वक्षर-अनुलोमसंधि where a vowel precedes a consonant; and अन्व- क्षरप्रतिलोमसंधि where a consonant pre- cedes a vowel, the consonant in that case being changed into the third of its class; एष स्य स च स्वराश्च पूर्वे भवति व्यञ्जनमुत्तरं यदेभ्यः। तेन्वक्षरसेधयेानुलोमाः प्रतिलोमाश्च विपर्यये त एव ।। R Pr. II.8.9 e. g. एष देवः, स देवः and others are instances of अन्वक्षरानुलोमसंधि where विसर्ग after the vowel is dropped; while हलव्यवाड् अग्निः is an instance of अन्वक्षरप्रतिलोमसंधि where the conso- nant ट् precedes the vowel अ. अन्वय (1) construing, construction: arrangement of words according to their mutual relationship based upon the sense conveyed by them, शब्दानां परस्परमर्थानुगमनम् । (2) continu- ance, continuation;cf. घृतघटतैलवट इति ; निषिक्ते घृते तैले वा अन्वयाद्विशेषणं भवति अयं घृतघटः, अयं तैलघट इति M. Bh. on P.II. 1.1. अन्वर्थक given in accordance with the sense; generally applied to a tech- nical term which is found in ac- cordance with the sense conveyed by the constituent parts of it; e. g. सर्वनामसंज्ञा, cf. महत्याः संज्ञायाः करणे एतत् प्रयोजनमन्वर्थसंज्ञा यथा विज्ञायेत M. Bh. on P. I.1.23. अन्वर्थसंज्ञा A technical term used in accordance with the sense of its constituent parts; e. g. सर्वनाम, संख्या, अव्यय उपसर्जन,कारक, कर्मप्रवचनीय, अव्ययी- |
भाव, प्रत्यय, उपपद etc. All these terms are picked up from ancient gram- marians by Pāṇini: cf. तत्र महत्याः संज्ञाया एतत् प्रयोजनम् । अन्वर्थसंज्ञा यथा विज्ञायेत । संख्यायते अनया संख्येति । cf. M. Bh. on I.1.23; also cf. M.Bh.on I.1.27,I. 1.38,I.2.43, I.4.83, II.1,5, III. 1.1, III.1.92 etc. अन्ववसर्ग relaxation or wide opening of the sound-producing organs as done for uttering a vowel of grave accent. cf. अन्ववसर्गः गात्राणां विस्तृतता Tait. Pr. XXII.10. अन्वाकर्षक a word attracting a previ- ous word such as the word च, in the Sūtra texts. अन्वाचय aggregation of a secondary element along with the primary one: यत्रैकस्य प्राधान्यमितरदप्रधाने तदनुरोधे- नान्वाचीयमानता अन्वाचयः Nyāsa on P.II 2.29. One of the four senses of च, e.g.भिक्षामट गां चानय; cf. प्लक्षश्चेत्युक्ते गम्यत एतत्सापेक्षोयं प्रयुज्यत इति | अन्वादेश (1) lit. reference to the ante- rior word or expression: cf.अन्वादेशेा- न्त्यस्य (निःशब्दस्य in T.Pr.VII.3, अकारस्य in V-8) T. Pr. I.58: (2) reference again to what has been stated pre- viously: cf. इदमोन्वादेशेशनुदात्तस्तृतीयादौ अन्वादेशश्च कथितानुकथनमात्रम् P.II.4.32 and Vārt. 2 thereon; एकस्यैवाभिधेयस्य पूर्वं शब्देन प्रतिपादितस्य द्वितीयं प्रतिपादनमन्वा- देशः Kāś on the above. अन्वादेशक a word capable of attract- ing a word or words from previous statements; cf चापीत्यन्वादेशकौ T Pr. KKII.5; same as अन्वाकर्षक. अप् (I) kṛt affix अ, in the sense of verbal activity (भाव) or any verbal relation (कारक) excepting that of an agent, (कर्तृ) applied to roots ending in ऋ or उ and the roots ग्रह्,वृ,दृ etc. mentioned in P. III.3.58 and the following rules in preference to the usual affix घञ. e.g. करः, गरः, शरः, यवः, लवः, पवः, ग्रहः, स्वनः etc, cf. P.III, |
3.57-87 ; (2) compound-ending अप् applied to Bahuvrīhi compounds in the feminine gender ending with a Pūraṇa affix as also to Bahuvrīhi compounds ending with लोमन् preceded by अन्त् or वहिर् e. g. कल्याणीपञ्चमा रात्रयः, अन्तर्लोमः,बहिर्लोमः पटः cf. P. V. 4.116, 117. अपकर्ष (1)deterioration of the place or instrument of the production of sound resulting in the fault called निरस्त; cf. स्थानकरणयेारपकर्षेण निरस्तं नाम दोष उत्पद्यते, R. Pr. XIV.2; (2) draw- ing back a word or words from a succeeding rule of grammar to the preceding one; cf. "वक्ष्यति तस्यायं पुरस्तादपकर्षः, M. Bh. on II.2.8. (3) inferiority (in the case of qualities) न च द्रव्यस्य प्रकर्षापकर्षौ स्तः । अपत्य a descendent, male or female, from the son or daughter onwards upto any generation; cf तस्यापत्यम् P, IV.1.92. अपभ्रंश degraded utterance of standard correct forms or words: corrupt form: e. g. गावी, गोणी and the like, of the word गो, cf. गौः इत्यस्य शब्दस्य गावी गोणी गोता गोपोतलिका इत्येवमादयः अपभ्रंशाः M. Bh. on I.l.l ; cf शब्दसंस्कारहीनो यो गौरिति प्रयुयुक्षिते । तमपभ्रंशमिच्छन्ति विशिष्टार्थनिवेशिनम् Vāk. Pad I.149: सर्वस्य हि अपभ्रंशस्य साधुरेव प्रकृतिः com. on Vāk. Pad I. 149. अपवर्ग achievement; cf, फलप्राप्तौ सत्यां क्रियापरिसमाप्तिः अपवर्गः see Kāś. on अपवर्गे , तृतीया P.II.3.6. अपवर्ण a letter which is phonetically badly or wrongly pronounced. cf. कुतीथादागतं दग्धमपवर्णं च भक्षितम् । न तस्य पाठे मोक्षोस्ति पापाहेरिव किल्बिषात् Pāṇ.Śik.50. अपवाद a special rule which sets aside the general rule; a rule forming an exception to the gene- ral rule. e.g. आतोनुपसर्गे कः III.2.2 which is an exception of the general rule कर्मण्यण् III.2.1; cf. येन नाप्राप्तो |
यो विधिरारभ्यते स तस्य बाधको भवति, तदपवा- दोयं येागो भवति; Pari. Śekh. Par 57; for details see Pari. Śekh. Pari. 57-65: cf न्यायैर्मिश्रानपवादान् प्रतीयात् । न्याया उत्सर्गाः महाविधयः । अपवादा अल्प- विषयाः विधय: । तानुत्सर्गेण मिश्रानेकीकृताञ् जानीयात् । अपवादविषयं मुक्त्वा उत्सर्गाः प्रवर्तन्ते इत्यर्थः । R. Pr. I. 23 and com. thereon ; (2) fault; cf. शास्त्रा- पवादात् प्रतिपत्तिभेदात् R. Pr. XIV. 30 on which उव्वट remarks शास्त्राणाम- पवादा दोषाः सन्ति पुनरुक्तता अविस्पष्टार्थता, कष्टशब्दार्थता... अपवादन्याय the convention that a rule laying down an exception supersedes the general rule; cf. सिद्धं त्वपवादन्यायेन P. I.3.9 Vārt. 7 अपवादबलीयस्त्च the convention that a special rule is always stronger than the general rule. अपवादविप्रतिषेध a conflict with a spe- cial rule, which the special rule supersedes the general rule: cf. 'अलोन्त्यस्य' इति उत्सर्गः । तस्य 'आदेः परस्य' 'अनेकाल्शित्सर्वस्य' इत्यपवादौ अपवादविप्रतिषेधात्तु सर्वादेशो भविष्यति । M. Bh. on I.1.54 Vārt. 1. अपवृक्त that which has already happened or taken place; cf. न्याय्या त्वेषा भूतकालता । कुतः । आद्यपवर्गात् । आदि रत्रापवृक्तः । एष च नाम न्याय्यो भूतकालो यत्र किंचिदपवृक्तं दृश्यते M.Bh. on III.2.102 अपशब्द corrupt form of a correct word, called म्लेच्छ also; cf. म्लेच्छो ह वा एष यदपशब्दः M. Bh. on I. 1.1. अस्तु वापि तरस्तस्माद् नापशब्दो भविष्यति । वाचकश्चेत्प्रयोक्तव्यो वाचक्श्र्चेत्प्रयुज्यताम् ॥ M. Bh. on V.3.55. अपाणिनीय not in conformity with the rules of Pāṇini's grammar; cf. सिध्यत्वेवमपाणिनीयं तु भवति M. Bh. on I. I.1. अपादान detachment, separation, abla- tion technical term for अपादानकारक which is defined as ध्रुवमपायेऽपादानम् |
in P.I.4.24 and subsequent rules 25 to 3l and which is put in the ablative case; cf. अपादाने पञ्चमी P. II.3.28. अपाय (1) point of departure, separa- tion; cf. ध्रुवमपायेपादानम् P.I.4.24; (2) disappearance; cf. संनियेागशिष्टानामन्यत- रापाये उभयोरप्यपायः । तद्यथा । देवदत्तयज्ञदत्ताभ्या- मिदं कर्म कर्तव्यम् । देवदत्तापाये यज्ञदत्तेपि न करोति M. Bh. on IV.1.36. अपार्थक without any purpose or object, useless; cf. ततोनिष्टादर्शनादपार्थक- मेतत् Nyāsa on P.I.4.80. अपि also in addition to; अपि is used sometimes to mean absolute of or ungualified by any condition; cf. अन्येभ्येपि दृश्यते । अपिशब्दः सर्वोपाधिव्यभि- चारार्थः । निरुपपदादपि भवति । धीवा पीवा । KS. on P. III. 2.75, III. 2.101, VII. 1.38; cf. अपिग्रहणे व्यभिचारार्थम् ) Durgasiṁha on Kāt. II.3.64. अपित् not marked with the mute letter प्, A Sārvadhātuka affix not marked with mute प् is looked upon as marked with ड् and hence it prevents the guṇa or vṛddhi substitution for the preceding vowel or for the penultimate vowel if it be अ. e. g. कुरुतः तनुतः, कुर्वन्ति where no guṇa takes place for the vowel उ cf. सार्वधातुकमपित्. P.I.2.4. अपूर्व (l) not existing before; cf. आगमश्च नाम अपूर्वः शब्दोपजनः M. Bh. on I.1-20, I.1.46; (2) not preceded by any letter or so, cf अपूर्वलक्षण अादिः M. Bh. on I.1.21: (3) a rule pres- cribing something not prescribed before; cf. तत्र अपूर्वो विधिरस्तु नियमोस्तु इति अपूर्व एव विधिर्भविष्यति न नियमः M.Bh. on I.4.3., III.1.46, III.2. 127, III.3.19. अपृक्त lit. unmixed with any (letter); a technical term for an affix consist- ing of one phonetic element, i.e. of a single letter. cf. अपृक्त एकाल्प्रत्ययः P. I.2.41. |
अपेक्षा relation of dependance; cf. अयुक्तैवं बहुनोपेक्षा M. Bh. on IV.2.92. अपोद्धार disintegration of the consti- tuent elements of a word; analysis; अपोद्धार पृथक्करणम् com. on Vāk. Pad. II. 449: cf. अपोद्धारपदार्था ये ये चार्थाः स्थितलक्षणः Vāk. Pad.I.24. अप्पयदीक्षित, अप्पदीक्षित A famous ver- satile writer of the sixteenth cen- tury A. D. (1530-1600 ), son of रङ्गराजाध्वरीन्द्र a Dravid Brāhmaṇa. He wrote more than 60 smaller or greater treatises mainly on Vedānta, Mimāṁsā, Dharma and Alaṁkāra śāstras; many of his works are yet in manuscript form. The Kaumudi-prakāśa and Tiṅan- taśeṣasaṁgraha are the two pro- minent grammatical works written by him. Paṇdit Jagannātha spoke very despisingly of him. अप्रकृतिस्वरत्व non-retention of the ori- ginal word accents; cf. तत्र यस्य गतेर- प्रकृतिस्वरत्वं तस्मादन्तेादात्वं प्राप्नोति M. Bh. on VI.2.49. See the word प्रकृतिस्वरत्व. अप्रातिपत्ति (l) impossibility to obtain the correct form; (2) absence or want of apprehension, cf शब्दानां चाप्रतिपत्तिः प्राप्नोति M. Bh. on I.1.1, I.1.44 Vārt. 8. अप्रतिषेध useless prohibition; unneces- sary prohibition; cf. अनर्थकः प्रतिषेधः अप्रतिषेधः M. Bh. on I.1.6: I.1.20. I.1.22 etc. अप्रत्यय (1)lit. absence of any affix: an affix such as क्विप् or क्विन् which wholly vanishes; cf. पिपठिषतेः अप्रत्ययः पिपठीः M.Bh. on I.1.6. कण्डूयतेरप्रत्यय: कण्डूः M.Bh. on I.1.58; (2) that which is not an affix. cf. अप्रत्ययस्यैताः संज्ञा मा भूवन् M. Bh. on I.1.61, I.1.69; (3) that which is not pre- ' scribed, अविधीयमान,अप्रत्याय्यमानः M.Bh. on I.1.69. अप्रधान (1) non-principal, subordi- nate, secondary, cf. अप्रधानमुपसर्जन- |
मिति, M. Bh. on I. 2.43; (2) non- essential, non-predominent, cf. सहयुक्तेऽप्रधाने P. II. 2.19 and the instance पुत्रेण सहागतः पिता । Kāś. on II.2.19. अप्रयुक्त not found in popular or cur- rent use, e.g. the words ऊष, तेर, चक्र etc. यद्यप्यप्रयुक्ता अवश्यं दीर्घसत्त्रवल्लक्षणेनानु- विधेयाः M. Bh. on I.1.1, also यथालक्षणमप्रयुक्ते M. Bh. on I.I.24 अप्रयेाग (1) non-employment of a word in spite of the meaning being available: cf. संभावनेलमिति चेत्सिद्धाप्रयोगे P.III.3.154; (2) non-employment cf. उक्तार्थानामप्रयोगः a standard dictum of grammar not allowing superflu- ous words which is given in M.Bh. on P.I.1.4 Vārt. 16 and stated in Cāndra and other grammars as a Paribhāṣā. अप्रयोगिन् not-found in actual use among the people although men- tioned in the śāstra-texts; a mute indicatory letter or letters. cf. अप्रयोगी इत् Sāk. I.1.5 Hem I.1.37 Jain.I.2.3 and M.Bh. Pradīpa on III.8.31. अप्रसङ्ग non-application of a rule of grammar or of a technical term; cf. अन्यत्र सहवचनात् समुदाये संज्ञाsप्रसङ्गः M. Bh. on P.I.1.1. Vārt. 11. अप्रसिद्ध Not well-known: secondary (used in connection with sense) cf. एवं चाप्रसिद्धत्वं गौणलाक्षणिकत्वं चात्र गौणत्वम् Par. Śek Pari. 15 अप्रसिद्धि absence of clear sense or interpretation; cf इतरेतराश्रयत्वादप्रसिद्धि: M. Bh. on I.1.1. Vārt. 8, I.1.38 Vārt. 4. अप्राप्तविकल्प same as अप्राप्तविभाषा one of the three kinds of optional appli- cation of a rule; cf. त्रिसंशयास्तु भवन्ति प्राप्ते अप्राप्ते उभयत्र चेति । M. Bh. on P. I. 1.44 Vārt. 20; optional appli- cation of a rule prescribing an operation; eg; ऊर्णोतेर्विभाषा अनुपसर्गाद्वा |
I.3.43. हृक्रोरन्यतरस्याम् । अभिवादयति गुरुं माणवकेन पिता । अप्राप्तविकल्पत्वातृतीयैव Kāś. on I.1.53. विभाषा सपूर्वस्य । स्थूलपतिः स्थूलपत्नी । अप्राप्तविभाषेयमयरुसंयोगत्वात् । अप्राप्तविधान prescription of a new thing. cf. तत्राप्राप्तविधाने प्राप्तप्रतिषेधः M. Bh. on VI.4.17 Vārt. 2. अप्राप्तविधि prescribing an operation which otherwise cannot be had. अग्रादिष्वप्राप्तविधेः समासप्रतिषेधः P.III. 4.24 Vārt 1. अप्राप्तविभाषा see above अप्राप्तविकल्प. अप्राप्ति ( i ) non-occurrence for non- realization of a grammatical operation or rule- अप्रतिषेधः M. Bh. on I.1.56 Vārt. 8; (2) pro- hibition of the occurrence of a rule or operation, cf. अप्राप्तेर्वा । अथवानन्तरा या प्राप्तिः सा प्रतिषिध्यते M. Bh. on I.I.43, I.1.63. अप्लुत non-protracted vowel cf. अतो रोरप्लुतादप्लुप्ते P.VI.1.113. अबाघक not coming in the way of rules otherwise applicable; the word is used in connection with निपातन i. e. constituted or announc- ed forms or specially formed words which are said to be अबाधक i. e. not coming in the way of forms which could be arrived at by application of the regular rules. Siradeva has laid down the Pari- bhāṣā अबाधकान्यपि निपातनानि भवन्ति defending the form पुरातन in spite of Pāṇini's specific mention of the word पुराण in the rule पुराणप्रोक्तेषुo IV. 3. 105. अभक्त not-forming an integral part of another; quite independent (used in connection with aug- ments). cf. किं पुनरयं पूर्वान्त आहोस्वित् परादिराहोस्विद् अभक्ताः M. Bh. on I.1. 47, 1.1.51. एवं तर्ह्यभक्तः करिष्यते M. Bh on VI.1.71, VI.1.135, and VII.2.82. |
अभयचन्द्र a Jain grammarian ， who wrote प्रक्रियासंग्रह, based on the Śabdā- nuśāsana Vyākaraṇa of the Jain Śākatāyana.His possible date is the twelfth century A. D. अभ्यतिलक a Jain writer of the thirteenth century who wrote a commentary on the Śabdāśā- sana Grammar of Hemacandra. अभयनन्दिन् a reputed jain Gramma- rian of the eighth century who wrote an extensive gloss on the जैनेन्द्रव्याकरण. The gloss is known as जैनेन्द्रव्याकरणमहावृत्ति of which वृहज्जैने- न्द्रव्याकरण appears to be another name. अभाव absence; absence of any following letter which is technically called avasāna. cf. विरामोऽवसानम् । वर्णानामभावोऽवसानसंज्ञः स्यात् S. K. on P. I.4.110. अभाषितपुंस्क that which does not convey a masculine sense; a word which is not declined in the masculine gender; a word possess- ing only the feminine gender e.g- खट्वा, लता etc.cf. अभाषितपुंस्काच्च P. VII. 3.48. अभिकृति a variety of long metres called अतिच्छन्दस्; it consists of 100 syllables. cf. अभिकृतिः -देवा अग्निः स्विष्टकृत् R. Pr. XVI.60. अभिक्रम the first of the two utter- ances of a word which chara- cterise the krama method of recital; e. g in the krama recital of प्रण इन्दो etc. प्र णः । न इन्दो । the first recial प्र णः is called अभिक्रम, or प्रथम- वचन while न इन्दो is called द्वितीयवचनः cf. अभिक्रमे पूर्वविधानमाचरेत् पुनर्ध्रुवंस्तूत्तरकारितं क्रमे R. Pr. XI.21. अभिघात depression or sinking of the voice as required for the utterance of a circumflex vowel. |
अभिधान designation, denotation, ex- pression of sense by a word which is looked upon as the very nature of a word. The expression अभिधानं पुनः स्वाभाविकम् ( denotation of sense is only a natural characteristic of a word ) frequently occurs in the Mahābhāṣya; cf. M. Bh. on 1.2.64 Vārt 93, II.1.1, cf. नपुसकं यदूष्मान्तं तस्य बह्वभिधानजः ( R. Pr. XIII.7 ) where the word बह्वभिधान means बहुवचन. अभिधेय object or thing denoted by a word; sense of a word; cf. अभि- धेयवल्लिङ्गवचनानि भवन्ति M. Bh. on II.2.29. अभिनिधान lit. that which is placed near or before; the first of the doubled class consonants; a mute or sparṣa conso- nant arising from doubling and inserted before a mute; cf. अघो- षादूष्मणः परः प्रथमः अभिनिधानः स्पर्शपरात्तस्य सस्थानः ( T. Pr. XIV. 9. ) explain- ed by त्रिभाष्यरत्न as स्पर्शपरादघोषादूष्मणः परः प्रथम आगमस्तस्य स्पर्शस्य समानस्थानः अभिनिधानो भवति । अभिनिधीयते इत्यभि- निधानः आरोपणीयः इत्यर्थः । यथा यः क्कामयेत अश्मन्नूर्जम् । यः प्पाप्मना । The Ṛk. prātiśākhya explains the term अभिनिधान somewhat differently; cf. अभिनिधानं कृतसंहितानां स्पर्शन्ति:स्थानामपवाद्य रेफम् । संघारणं संवरणं श्रुतेश्च स्पर्शोदयानामपि चावसाने R. Pr. VI. 5, explained by उव्वट as स्पर्शपराणां स्पर्शानां रेफं वर्जयित्वा अन्तःस्थानां च वर्णानां कृतसंहितानां च सतां संधारणं वर्णश्रुतेश्च संवरणं भवति । तदेतद् अभि- निधानं नाम । यथा उष मा षड् द्वा द्वा । ऋ. सं ८।६८।१४ इह षड् इत्यत्र अभिनिधानम् ॥ अभिनिघान possibly according to उव्वट here means the first of the doubled letter which, although the second letter is attached to it, is separately uttered with a slight pause after it. अभिनिधान means, in short, something like 'suppression.' |
The Ṛk. Tantra takes a still wider view and explains अभिनिधान as the first of a doubled consonant, cf ; अभिनिधानः । क्रमजं च पूर्वान्ततस्वरं भवति । R. T. 21. अभिनिर्वृति development of an acti- vity; manifestation; cf. द्रव्येषु कर्म- चोदनायां द्वयोरेकस्याभनिर्वृत्तिर्भवति M. Bh. on VI.1.84. अभिनिविष्ट that which has already entered on functioning or begun to function; cf. स्वभावत एतेषां शब्दानां एतेष्वर्थेषु अभिनिविष्टानां निमित्तत्वेन अन्वाख्यानं क्रियते M. Bh. on II.1.1. cf. पूर्वमपवादा अभिनिविशन्ते पश्चादुत्सर्गाः, M. Bh. on II.3.46; Pari. Śek. Pari. 62. अभिनिष्टान Resonance (of a visarga utterance). अभिनिहित used in connection with a सन्धि or euphonic combination in which the vowel अ, as a first or a second member, is absorbed into the other member. e. g. रथेभ्यः + अग्रे = रथेभ्योऽग्रे also दाशुषेऽग्रे, where अ of अग्रे is absorbed or merged in ओ of रथेभ्यः or ए of दाशुषे; cf. अथा- भिनिहितः संधिरेतैः प्राकृतवैकृतैः । एकीभवति पादादिरकारस्तेत्र संधिजाः; R. Pr. II. 13 to 25; cf.एङः पदान्तादति P.VI.1.109. अभिनिहितस्वार name given to the circumflex vowel which is the resultant of the अभिनिहितसंधि. अभिप्राय (1) अभिप्रायसंधि a kind of euphonic combination where the nasal letter न् is dropped and the preceding vowel ( अ ) is nasa- lised e. g, दधन्याँ यः । स्ववाँ यातु : (2) view, purpose, intention; cf. तद् व्यक्तमाचार्यस्याभिप्रायो गम्येत, इदं न भवतीति; M. Bh. on I.1.27; cf. also स्वरितञितः कर्त्रभिप्राये क्रियाफले P.1.3.72. अभिविधि inclusive extension to a par- ticular limit; inclusive limit cf. आङ् मर्यादाभिविध्योः P.II.1.13, अङ् मर्यादाभिविध्योरिति वक्तव्यम् M. Bh. on I.4.89; (2) full or complete exten- |
sion cf. अभिविधौ भाव इनुण् । अभिविधिर- भिव्याप्तिः । सांराविणं वर्तते Kāś on P. III. 3.44. अभिव्यादान absorption of a vowel when two long vowels of the same kind come together e.g. ता आपः = तापः, अवसा आ = अवसा, the resultant vowel being pronounced specially long consisting of some more mātrā, which is evidently, a fault of pronuncia- tion. cf. आदानं आरम्भः; विपुलं विशालं वा आदानं व्यादानम् । अभिव्याप्तं अभिभूतं व्यादानं अभिव्यादानम् Uvvata on R. Pr. XIV. 27. अभिव्याहार expression; cf. यदेव समाने पादे समानाहभिव्याहारं भवति तज्जानि भवति । हिरण्य- रूपः स हिरण्यसंदृक् Nir X.16. अभिसारिणी name of a metre in which two feet have ten syllables and the other two have twelve sy- llables; cf. वैराजजागतैः पादैर्यो वाचेत्य- भिसारिणी R. Pr. XIV. 43. अभिस्वरित provided with a svarita or circumflex accent. अभिहित expressed (used in connection with the sense of a word) एतेनैवाभिहितं सूत्रेण M. Bh. on I.2.64 , 1.3.1 ; ex- pressed actually by a word or part of a word, same as कथित M. Bh. on I.4.51. अभूततद्भाव being what it was not before, cf. च्विविधौ अभूततद्भाग्रहणम् P. V.4.50 Vārt. I. अभेदक not bringing about a differ- ence; not making different; non- discriminant; cf. गुणाः अभेदकाः Par. Śek. Pari. 109 cf. ननु च भो अभेदका अपि च गुणा दृश्यन्ते M. Bh on I.1.1. अभेदसंसर्ग a connection of unity, as noticed between the nominative case affix of the subject and the ending ति of a verb, which pro- duces the sense. अभेदान्वय relation of non-difference as stated by the vaiyākaraṇas |
between an adjective and the substantive qualified by it. e, g. नीलमुत्पलम् is explained as नीलाभिन्न- मुत्पलम्. अभ्यन्तर interior; contained in, held in; cf. अभ्यन्तरश्च समुदाये अवयवः । तद्यथा वृक्षः प्रचलसहावयवैः प्रचलति M. Bh. on I.1.56. अभ्यंकर ( BHASKARASHASTRI Abhyankar 1785-1870 A. D. ) an eminent scholar of Sanskrit Grammar who prepared a num- ber of Sanskrit scholars in Gram- mar at Sātārā. He has also written a gloss on the Paribhā- ṣenduśekhara and another one on the Laghu-Śabdenduśekhara. (VASUDEVA SHASTRI Abhya- kar 863-1942 A. D.) a stalwart Sanskrit Pandit, who, besides writing several learned commen- taries on books in several Sans- krit Shastras, has written a com- mentary named 'Tattvādarśa' on the Paribhāṣenduśekhara and another named 'Guḍhārthaprakāśa' on the Laghuśabdenduśekhara. (KASHINATH VASUDEVA Abhyankar, 1890-) a student of Sanskrit Grammar who has written महाभाष्यप्रस्तावना-खण्ड, and जैनेन्द्रपरिभाषावृत्ति and compiled the परिभाषासंग्रह and the present Dic- tionary of Sanskrit Grammar. अभ्यम् substitute for dat. and abl. pl. affix भ्यस् after the words युष्मद् and अस्मद् ; cf भसोsभ्यम् P. VII.1.30. अभ्यस्त repeated, redoubled word or wording or part of a word. The term अभ्यस्त is applied to the whole doubled expression in Pāṇini's grammar, cf. उभे अभ्यस्तम् P. VI.1.6; (2) the six roots with जक्ष् placed at the head viz. जक्ष् , जागृ, दरिद्रा , चकास्, शास्, दीधी and वेवी which in fact are reduplicated forms of घस् , गृ, द्रा, कास् , शस् , धी and वी. |
अभ्यावृत्ति inclination towards an action; tendency to do an act; cf. संख्यायाः क्रियाभ्यावृत्तिगणनं कृत्वसुच् । P. V. 4.17 अभिमुखी प्रवृत्तिरभ्यावृत्तिः (M. Bh. on V.4.19) is the explanation in the Mahābhāṣya,while पौनः पुन्यमभ्या- वृत्तिः (Kāś. on V.4.17) is the one given in Kāśikā अभ्यास lit, doubling or reduplica- tion technically the word refers to the first portion of the redupli- cation, which is called the redu- plicative syllable as opposed to the second part which is called the reduplicated syllable; cf. पूर्वोभ्यासः P. VI.1.4. (2) Repetition, the sccond part which is repeated; cf. दोऽभ्यासे(RT.165) explained as दकारः अभ्यासे लुप्यते । पटत्पटेति । द्रसद्रसेति ; (3) repeated action; cf. अभ्यासः पुनः पुनः करणमावृत्तिः Kāś. on P.1-3, 1. अभ्याहत omission of any sound; a fault of utterance. अम् (1)a technical brief term in Panini's grammar including vowels, semi- vowels, the letter ह् and nasals; (2) a significant term for the accusative case showing change or substitution or modification: cf. अं विकारस्य T. Pr. I.28 explained as अमिति शब्दे विकार- स्याख्या भवति । अमिति द्वितीय विभक्तेरुपलक्षणम् । (3) augment अ applied to the penultimate vowel of सृज् & दृश् (P. VI.1.58, 59 and VII.1.99) (4) sub- stitute tor Ist pers. sing. affix मिप्, by P.III.4.101 (5) Acc. sing. case affix अम् . अमर called अमरसिंह an ancient grammarian mentioned in the कविकल्पद्रुम by बोपदेव. He is believed to have written some works on grammar such as षट्कार- कलक्षण his famous existing work, however, being the Amarakoṣa or Nāmaliṅgānuśāsana. |
अमरचन्द्र a Jain grammarian who is believed to be the writer of स्यादिशब्दसमुच्चय, परिमल etc. अमु tad. affix अम् applied in Vedic Literature to किम्, words ending in ए, indeclinables and the affixes तर and तम: e. g. प्रतरं नयामः प्रतरं वस्यः cf. अमु च च्छन्दसि P. V. 4. 12. अमृतभारती a grammarian who is believed to have written सुबोधिका, a gloss on the सारस्वतव्याकरण. अमृतस्मृति called also अमृतस्तुति, a com- mentary on the प्रक्रियाकौमुदी of रामचन्द्रशेष. अमोघवर्ष A Jain grammarian of the ninth century who wrote the gloss known as अमोघावृत्ति on the Śabdānuśāsana of Śākaṭā- yana; the वृत्ति is quoted by माधव in his धातुवृत्ति. अमोघा also अमोघावृत्ति, a gloss on the grammar of Sākaṭāyana. See अमोघ- वर्ष above. अम्बाकर्त्री a commentary on Nāgeśa's Paribhāsenduśekhara named so, as it commences with the words अम्बा कर्त्री etc. अम्बूकृत utterance (of words) accom- panied by water drops coming out of the mouth; a fault of utterance or pronunciation; मुखात् विप्रुषो निर्गमनम् . It is explained diffe- rently in the Rk. Prātiśākhya; cf. ओष्ठाभ्यां नद्धं अम्बूकृतम्म्वृ (R. Pr. XIV.2.) held tight between the lips which of course, is a fault of pronunciation; cf.ग्रस्तं निरस्तमविलम्बितं निर्हतं अम्बूकृतं ध्मात मथो विकम्पितम्. MBh. I. 1. पस्पशाह्निक. अय् (l) substitute for the causal sign णि before अाम्, अन्त, अालु etc. by P, VI.4.55 (2) substitute for ए before a vowel by P.VI.1.78. अयङ् the substitute अय् for the final ई of the root शी by P. VII.4.22. |
अयच् tad. affix अय substituted op- tionally for तय after द्वि and त्रि by P. V.2.43. e.g. द्वयम् द्वितयम्; त्रयम् त्रितयम्. अयाच्,अयाट् substitutes for inst. sing affix टा in Vedic literature e. g. स्वप्नया, नावया. अयावन non-mixture of words where the previous word is in no way the cause of (any charge in) the next word. अयावनं अमिश्रयम् Uv. on R. Pr. XI. 12 e. g, अग्निमीळे where the क्रमपाठ is अग्निं ईळे । अयुज् a term applied to the odd feet of a stanza; cf. युग्मावष्टाक्षरौ पादवयुजौ द्वादशाक्षरौ । ना सतोबृहती नाम R. Pr. XVI. 39. अयोगवाह the letters or phonetic ele- ments अनुस्वार,विसर्ग,जिह्वामूलीय, उपध्मानीय and यम called so,as they are always uttered only in combination with another phonetic element or letter such as अ or the like, and never independently; cf. अकारादिना वर्णसमा- म्नायेन संहिताः सन्तः ये वहन्ति आत्मलाभं ते अयेागवाहाः Uvvaṭa on Vāj.Pr.VIII.18. These अयोगवाह letters possess the characteristics of both, the vowels as well as consonants;cf.अयोगवाहानामट्सु उपदेशः कर्तव्यः णत्वं प्रयोजनम् । शर्षु जष्भावत्वे प्रयोजनम् । M. Bh. on शिवसूत्र हयवरट्. अर् a technical term for Ārdhadhā- tuka affixes in the Mugdhabodha grammar. अरक्तसन्धि a word, the coalescence of which is not nasalized, as the word आ in मन्द्रमा वरेण्यम् as contrast- cd with अभ्र आं अपः cf. R. Pr. XI.18. अरङ् a Visarga which is not rhotaciz- ed; the term अरिफित is used in the same sense. अरिफित not rhotacized: not turned into the letter र; cf. विसर्जनीयोsरि्फितो दीर्घपूर्वः स्वरोदयः आकारम् ， R. Pr II. 9. |
अरीहणादि a group of words given in P. IV.2.80 which get the taddhita affix घुञ् ( अक ) added to them as a cāturarthika affix e. g. अारीहणकम्, द्रौघणकम् etc.see Kāśikā on P.IV.2.80. अर्क the strong blowing of air from the mouth at the time of the utte- rance of the surd consonants; cf Vāj. Śikṣā. 280. अर्थ (I) lit.signification,conveyed sense or object. The sense is sometimes looked upon as a determinant of the foot of a verse: cf. प्रायोर्थो वृत्तमित्येते पादज्ञानस्य हेतवः R. Pr. XVII 16. It is generally looked upon as the determinant of a word (पद). A unit or element of a word which is possessed of an indepen- dent sense is looked upon as a Pada in the old Grammar treatises; cf. अर्थः पदमिति ऐन्द्रे; cf. also अर्थः पदम् V. Pr. III.2, explained by उव्वट as अर्थाभिधायि पदम् । पद्यते गम्यते ज्ञायतेSर्थो- नेनेति पदम् । There is no difference of opinion regarding the fact that, out of the four standard kinds of words नाम, आख्यात, उपसर्ग and निपात, the first two kinds नाम and अाख्यात do possess an independent sense of their own. Regarding possession of sense and the manner in which the sense is conveyed, by the other two viz. the Upasargas (preposi- tions) and Nipātas (particles) there is a striking difference of opinion among scholars of grammar. Al- though Pāṇini has given the actual designation पद to words ending with either the case or the conju- gational affixes, he has looked upon the different units or ele- ments of a Pada such as the base, the affix, the augment and the like as possessed of individually separate senses. There is practi- cally nothing in Pāṇini's sūtras to |
prove that Nipātas and Upasargas do not possess an independent sense. Re: Nipātas, the rule चादयोऽसत्वे, which means that च and other indeclinables are called Nipātas when they do not mean सत्त्व, pre- sents a riddle as to the meaning which च and the like should convey if they do not mean सत्त्व or द्रव्य i.e. a substance. The Nipātas cannot mean भाव or verbal activity and if they do not mean सत्व or द्रव्य, too, they will have to be call- ed अनर्थक (absolutely meaningless) and in that case they would not be termed Prātipadika, and no case- affix would be applied to them. To avoid this difficulty, the Vārti- kakāra had to make an effort and he wrote a Vārtika निपातस्य अनर्थकस्य प्रातिपदिकत्वम् । P. I.2.45 Vār. 12. As a matter of fact the Nipātas च, वा and others do possess a sense as shown by their presence and ab- sence (अन्वय and व्यतिरेक). The sense, however, is conveyed rather in a different manner as the word समूह, or समुदाय, which is the meaning conveyed by च in रामः कृष्णश्च, cannot be substituted for च as its Synonym in the sentence राम: कुष्णश्च. Looking to the different ways in which their sense is conveyed by nouns and verbs on the one hand, and by affixes, prepositions and inde- clinables on the other hand, Bhar- tṛhari, possibly following Yāska and Vyāḍi, has developed the theory of द्योतकत्व as contrasted with वाचकत्व and laid down the dictum that indeclinables, affixes and prepositions (उपसर्गs) do not direct- ly convey any specific sense as their own, but they are mere signs to show some specific property or excellence of the sense conveyed by the word to which they are |
attached; cf. also the statement 'न निर्बद्धा उपसर्गा अर्थान्निराहुरिति शाकटायनः नामाख्यातयोस्तु कर्मोपसंयेगद्योतका भवन्ति । Nir 1.3. The Grammarians, just like the rhetoricians have stated hat the connection between words and their senses is a permanent one ( नित्य ), the only difference in their views being that the rhetori- cians state that words are related; no doubt permanently, to their sense by means of संकेत or conven- tion which solely depends on the will of God, while the Grammarians say that the expression of sense is only a natural function of words; cf. 'अभिधानं पुनः स्वाभाविकम्' Vārttika No.33. on P. I.2.64. For द्योतकत्व see Vākyapadīya of Bhartṛhari II. 165-206. अर्थगति comprehension of sense; cf. अर्थगत्यर्थः शब्दप्रयोगः अर्थे संप्रत्याययिष्या- मीति शब्दः प्रयुज्यते M. Bh. on P. I. 1.44, III.1.7 etc. अर्थग्रहण use of the word 'अर्थ'; cf. अर्थग्रहणं करोति तज्ज्ञापयत्याचार्यः M. Bh. on I.1.11. अर्थनिर्देश mention or specification of sense. cf. अवश्यमुत्तरार्थमर्थनिर्देशः कर्तव्यः M. Bh. IV.1.92. अर्थवद्ग्रहणपरिभाषा a well known maxim or Paribha of gramma- rians fully stated as अर्थवद्ग्रहणे नानर्थ- कस्य ग्रहणम्, deduced from the phrase अर्थवद्ग्रहणात् frequently used by the Vārttikakāra. The Paribhāṣā lays down that 'when a combination of letters employed in Grammar, is possessed of a sense, it has to be taken as possessed of sense and not such an one as is devoid of sense.' अर्थाभिधान conveyance or expression of sense, cf. अर्थाभिधानं पुनः स्वाभाविकम् P. I.2.64 Vārt. 38. It is only a nature of words that they convey their sense. |
अर्धक a fault in the utterance of a vowel of the kind of abridgment of a long utterance. अर्धह्रस्वम् ex- plained as ह्रस्वस्यार्धम्-half the utter- ance of the short vowel; cf. तस्यादित उदात्तमर्धह्रस्वम् P. I.2.32. cf. also तस्यादिरुच्चैस्तरामुदात्तादनन्तरं यावदर्द्धे ह्रस्वस्य Tai. Pr. I.44. अर्धजरतीय a queer combination of half the character of one and half of another, which is looked upon as a fault; cf. न चेदानीमर्धजरतीयं लभ्यं वृद्धिर्मे भविष्यति स्वरो नेति । तद्यथा । अर्धं जरत्याः कामयते अर्धं नेति; M.Bh. on IV. 1.78; cf. also अर्ध जरत्याः पाकाय अर्धं च प्रसवाय । अर्धमात्रा half of a mātra or 'mora'., cf. अर्धमात्रालाघवेन पुत्रोत्सवं मन्यन्ते वैयाकरणाः Par. Śekh. Pari. 122, signifying that not a single element of utter- ance in Pāṇini's grammar is superfluous. In other words, the wording of the Sūtras of Pāṇini is the briefest possible, not being capable of reduction by even half a mora. अर्धमात्रिक taking for its utterance the time measured by the utterance of half a mātrā or mora; a conso- nant, as it requires for its utte- rance that time which is measured by half a mātrā (mātrā being the time required for the utterance of short अ); cf. R. Pr. I.16, T. Pr.I.37, V. Pr. I.59. अर्धर्चादि a group of words given in P.II.4.31 which are declined in both the masculine and the neu- ter genders; c.g. अर्धर्चः,अर्धर्चमू, यूथः, यूथम्; गृहः गृहम्, etc.; cf अर्धर्चाः पुंसिं च P.II.4.31. अर्धविसर्ग a term used for the Jihvā- mūliya and Upadhmāniya into which a visarga is changed when followed by the letters क्, ख, and the letters प्, फ् respectively. |
अर्धह्रस्वोदात्त the acute (उदात्त) accent which becomes specially उदात्त or उदात्ततर when the vowel, which posseses it, forms the first half of a स्वरित vowel. अर्शआदि a class of words which take the taddhita affix अच्(अ) in the sense of the affix मतुप् i. e.in the sense of possession; cf अर्शति अस्य विद्यन्ते अर्शसः । उरस:। आकृतिगणश्चा- यम् यत्राभिन्नरूपेण शब्देन तद्वतोभिधानं तत् सर्वमिह द्रष्टव्यम् Kāś. on P. V.2.127. अल् a प्रत्याहार or a short term signifying any letter in the alphabet of Pāṇini which consists of 9 vowels, 4 semi- vowels, 25 class-consonants, and 4 sibilants. अलक्षण that which is not a proper लक्षण i. e. Sūtra; a Sūtra which does not teach definitely; a Sūtra which cannot be properly applied being ambiguous in sense. cf व्याख्यानतो विशेषप्रतिपत्तिर्नहि संदह्यादलक्षणम् Par. Śek. Pari. I. अलाक्षणिक (1) not used in a secondary sense; (2) not accomplished by the regular application of a grammar rule: cf.निपातनैः सह निर्देशादत्रापि किंचिदला- क्षणिकं कार्यमस्ति Kāś. on III.2.59. अलिङ्ग (1) not possessed of a definite gender; cf. अलिङ्गमसंख्यमव्ययसंज्ञं भवति M. Bh. on I.1.38; II.4.82;(2)अलिङे ह्युष्म- दस्मदी (Sid. Kau. on P.VII.2.90) अलिङ्गवचन not possessed of a definite gender and number; a term gene- rally used in connection with अव्ययs or indeclinables. अलुक् absence of elision or omi- ssion. अलुक्समास a compound in which the case-affixes are not drop- ped. The Aluk compounds are treated by Pāṇini in VI.3.I to VI.3.24. |
अलोन्त्यविधि an operation, which, on the strength of its being enjoined by means of the genitive case, applies to the last letter of the wording put in the genitive; cf. नानर्थकेलोन्त्यविधिरनभ्यासविकारे M. Bh. on I.1.65, cf. अलोन्त्यस्य । षष्ठीनिर्दिष्टोन्त्यस्या- देशः स्यात् S.K. on P. I.1.52. अलोप absence of clision of an affix etc. cf. सुपः अलोपः भवति वाक्ये । राज्ञः पुरुष इति । M. Bh. on II.1.1. अलौकिकविग्रह the dissolution of a compound not in the usual popu- lar manner. e. g. राजपुरुष: dissolved as राजन् ङस् पुरुष सु, as contrasted with the लौकिकविग्रह viz. राज्ञः पुरुष: । see also अधिहरि dissolved as हरि ङि in the अलौकिकविग्रह. अल्प्रग्रहण (l) the word अल् actually used in Pāṇini's rule e. g. अपृक्त एकाल् प्रत्ययः P.I.2.41.(2) the wording as अल् or wording by mention of a single letter e.g. अचि श्रुधातुभ्रुवांय्वो P, VI.4.77. अल्पतर feebler effort required in the production of sound or in the utterance of a letter cf. तैरोव्यञ्जनपाद- वृत्तयोरल्पतरः (प्रयत्नः) Tait. Pr.XX.12. अल्पप्रयोग not of frequent occurence in the spoken language or literature the term is used in connection with such words as are not fre- quently used; cf. सन्त्यल्पप्रयोगाः कृतोप्यैक- पदिकाः । व्रंततिर्दम्नाः जाटय आट्णारो जागरूको द्विर्धिहोमीति Nir I.14. अल्पप्राण (1) non-aspirate letters let- ters requiring little breath from the mouth for their utterance as oppo- sed to mahāprāṇa; (2) non-aspira- tion; one of the external articulate efforts characterizing the utterance of non-aspirate letters. अल्पाच्तर having a smaller number of vowels in it; such a word is gene- rally placed first in a Dvandva compound; cf अल्पाच्तरम्, P.II.2.34. |
अल्पाच्तरे पूर्वं भवति प्लक्षन्यग्रोधौ अपाच्तर is the same as अल्पाच्क used in the प्रक्रियाकौमुदी or अल्पस्वरतर in Kātantra (Kāt, II.5.12). अल्पापेक्ष am operation requiring a smaller number of causes, which merely on that account cannot be looked upon as अन्तरङ्ग. The anta- raṅga operation has its causes occurring earlier than those of another operation which is termed बहिरङ्ग cf. बहिरङगान्तरङश्ङ्गशब्दाभ्यां बह्वपेक्षत्वाल्पा- पेक्षत्वयोः शब्दमर्यादयाsलाभाच्च । तथा सति असिद्धं बह्वपेक्षमल्पापेक्ष इत्येव वदेत् ॥ Par.Śek. Pari. 50. अल्लोप elision or omission of a single phonetic element or letter; cf. अल्लोपोsनः P. VI.4.134. अल्विधि an operation prescribed with reference to one single letter; cf. स्थानिवदादेशोs नल्विधौ P.I.1.56. अवकाश occasion; possibility of appli- cation; cf. इको गुणवृद्धी इत्यस्यावकाशः। चयनं चायकः लवनं लावकः इति । इहोभयं प्राप्नोति | मेद्यति । मार्ष्टीति । M. Bh. on I.1.3. Vārt. 6. अवग्रह (1) separation of a compound word into its component elements as shown in the Pada-Pāṭha of the Vedic Saṁhitās. In the Pada- pāṭha, individual words are shown separately if they are combined by Saṁdhi rules or by the formation of a compound in the Saṁhitā- pāṭha; e.g. पुरोहितम् in the Saṁhitā- pāṭha is read as पुरःsहितम्. In writ- ing, there is observed the practice of placing the sign (ऽ) between the two parts, about which nothing can be said as to when and how it originated. The Atharva- Prātiśākhya defines अवग्रह as the separation of two padas joined in Saṁhitā. (A. Pr. II.3.25; II.4.5). In the recital of the pada-pāṭha, when the word-elements are utter- |
ed separately, there is a momen- tary pause measuring one matra or the time required for the utter- ance of a short vowel. (See for de- tails Vāj. Prāt. Adhāya 5). (2) The word अवग्रह is also used in the sense of the first out of the two words or members that are compounded to- gether. See Kāśikā on P.VIII.4.26; cf. also तस्य ( इङ्ग्यस्य ) पूर्वपदमवग्रहः यथा देवायत इति देव-यत. Tai. Pr. I. 49. The term अवग्रह is explained in the Mahābhāṣya as 'separation, or splitting up of a compound word into its constitutent parts; cf. छन्दस्यानङोवग्रहो दृश्येत पितामह इति ।(M. Bh. on IV.2.36); also cf. यद्येवमवग्रहः प्राप्नोति । न लक्षणेन पदकारा अनुवर्त्याः। पदकारैर्नाम लक्षणमनुवर्त्यम् । यथालक्षणं पदं कर्तव्यम् (M. Bh. on III.1.109) where the Bhāṣyakāra has definite- ly stated that the writers of the Padapāṭha have to split up a word according to the rules of Grammar. (3) In recent times, however, the word अवग्रह is used in the sense of the sign (ऽ) showing the coale- scence of अ (short or long) with the preceding अ (short or long ) or with the preceding ए or ओ e.g. शिवोऽ र्च्यः, अत्राऽऽगच्छ. (4) The word is also used in the sense of a pause, or an interval of time when the consti- tuent elements of a compound word are shown separately; cf. समासेवग्रहो ह्रस्वसमकालः (V. Pr. V.1). (5) The word is also used in the sense of the absence of Sandhi when the Sandhi is admissible. अवग्रहविराम the interval or pause after the utterance of the first member of a compound word when the members are uttered separately. This interval is equal to two moras according to Tait. Pr. while, it is equal to one mora according to the other Prātiśākhyas. |
अवङ् substitute अव् for the final ओ of the word गो; cf. अवङ् स्फोटायनस्य, P. VI.1.123,124. अवचन something which need not be specifically prescribed or stated, being already available or valid; cf तृतीयासमासे अर्थग्रहणमनर्थकं अर्थगतिर्हि अवचनात् P. II.1.30 V.1. अवचूरि a short gloss or commentary on a standard work. अवच्छेद exact limitation: cf. उपदेशत्वा- वच्छेदेने एकाजित्यर्थाच्च, Par.Śek. 120.3. अवधारण restriction; limitation; cf. अवधारणमियत्तापरिच्छेदः । यावदमत्रं ब्राह्मणाना- मन्त्रयतस्व Kāś. on P.II.1.8. अवधि limit,which is either exclusive or inclusive of the particular rule or word which characterizes it: cf. सर्वश्च हल् तं तमवधिं प्रति अन्त्यो भवति M. Bh. on I.3.3. अवधिमत् object of limit; cf. दूरे चेदव- धिमान् अवधेर्भवति Kāś. on P.V.3.37. अवयव member or portion, as oppo- sed to the total or collection (समुदाय) which is called अवयविन्; cf. अवयवप्रसिद्धेः समुदायप्रसिद्धिर्बलीयसी Par.Śek. Pari. 98. The conventional sense is more powerful than the deriva- tive sense. अवयवषष्ठी the genitive case signify- ing or showing a part: cf. वक्ष्यत्यादे- शप्रत्यययोरित्यवयवषष्ठी M.Bh. on I. 1.21. अवर्ण the letter अ; the first letter of the Sanskrit alphabet, comprising all its varieties caused by grades, ( ह्रस्व, दीर्घ, प्लुत) or accents of nasa- lization. The word वर्ण is used in the neuter gender in the Mahā- bhāṣya; cf. सर्वमुखस्थानमवर्णम् M. Bh. I.1.9, मा कदाचिदवर्णं भूत् M.Bh. I.1.48 Vārt. 1; cf also M. Bh. on I.1.50 Vārt. 18 and I.1.51 Vārt. 2: cf. also ह्रस्वमवर्णं प्रयोगे संवृतम् Sīradeva Pari. 17. 6 |
अवशंगम name of a Samdhi when a class consonant, followed by any consonant is not changed, but retained as it is; cf. स्पर्शाः पूर्वे व्यञ्जनान्युत्त- राणि अास्थापितानां अवशंगमं तत् R.Pr.IV. l; eg. अारैक् पन्थाम् R.V. I.113.16, वषट् ते (R.V.VII.99.7) अजानन् पुत्रः (R. V. X.85.14). अवशिष्टलिङ्ग (v.1. अविशिष्टलिङ्ग) a term occurring in the liṅgānuśāsana meaning 'possessed of such genders as have not been mentioned already either singly or by combination' i.e. possessed of all genders.Under अवशिष्टलिङ्ग are mentioned indeclin- ables, numerals ending in ष् or न् , adjectives, words ending with kṛtya affixes i.e. potential passive participles, pronouns, words ending with the affix अन in the sense of an instrument or a location and the words कति and युष्मद् (See पाणिनीय-लिङ्गानुशासन Sūtras 182-188). अवश्यम् necessarily; the expression अवश्यं चैतदेवं विज्ञेयम् is very frequently used in the Mahābhāṣya when the same statement is to be empha- sized. अवसान pause, cessation, termination; cf. विरामोऽवसानम् । वर्णानामभावः अवसान- संज्ञः स्यात् S. K. on P.1.4.110. अवस्था stage, condition; stage in the formation of a word; e. g. उप- देशावस्था, लावस्था, etc. अवस्थित of a uniform nature; cf. सिद्धं त्ववस्थिता वर्णाः, वक्तुश्चिराचिरवचनाद् वृत्तयो विशिष्यन्ते, M. Bh. I.1.70 V. 5. अवाक्षर deficient in one or more syllables. The word is mostly used in connection with a Vedic Mantra. अवाग्योगविद् one who is not conver- sant with the proper use of lang- uage: cf. अथ योऽवाग्योगविद् विज्ञानं तस्य शरणम्; M. Bh. 1.1.1. अविघातार्थ meant for not preventing the application (of a particular |
term) to others where it should apply. The word is frequently used in the Kāśikā; cf अजाद्यतष्टाप् । टकारः सामान्यग्रहणाविघातार्थः । Kāś. on P. IV.I.4, also see Kāś. on III.1. 133; III.2,67,73 IV.1.78. अविचालिन् immutable. The term is used frequently in the Mahābhā- ṣya, in connection with letters of the alphabet which are consi- dered 'nitya' by Grammarians; cf. नित्येषु च शब्देषु कूटस्थैरविचालिभिर्वर्णैर्भ- वितव्यमनपायोपजानविकारिभिः M. Bh. I. 1. Āhn 2: cf also नित्यपर्यायवाची सिद्ध- शब्दः । यत्कूटस्थेष्वविचालिषु भावेषु वर्तते M. Bh. on I.1.1. अविधि non-application, non-pres- cription (अविधान); cf. अङ्गवृत्ते पुनर्वृत्तौ अविधिर्निष्ठितस्य M. Bh. on VII.I.30; Par. Śek. Pari. 92. अविभक्तिक without the application of a case termination.The term is used frequently in connection with such words as are found used by Pāṇini without any case-affix in his Sūtras; sometimes, such usage is explained by commenta- tors as an archaic usage; cf. अवि- भक्तिको निर्देशः । कृप उः रः लः । M. Bh. I 1. Āhn. 2; also M. Bh. on I.1.3 ; III.1.36, VII.1.3 etc. अविभागपक्ष a view of grammarians according to which there are words which are looked upon as not susceptible to derivation. The terms अखण्डपक्ष and अव्युत्पन्नपक्ष are also used in the same sense. अविरविकन्याय a maxim mentioned by Patañjali in connection with the word आविक where the taddhita affix ठक् (इक), although prescribed after the word अवि in the sense of 'flesh of sheep' (अवेः मांसम्), is actu- ally put always after the base अविक and never after अवि. The maxim |
shows the actual application of an affix to something allied to, or similar to the base, and not to the actual base as is sometimes found in popular use cf. द्वयोः शब्दयोः समानार्थ- योरेकेन विग्रहोऽपरस्मादुत्पत्तिर्भविष्यति अविर- विकन्यायेन । तद्यथा अवेर्मांसमिति विगृह्य अविक- शब्दादुत्पत्तिर्भवति । M. Bh. on IV.1.88; cf. also M. Bh. on IV.1.89; IV.2.60; IV.3.131,V.1.7,28; VI.2.11. अविलम्बित name of a fault in pro- nouncing a word where there is the absence of a proper connection of the breath with the place of utter- ance; 'अविलम्बितः वर्णान्तरासंभिन्नः' Pra- dīpa on M.Bh I.1.1. There is the word अवलम्बित which is also used in the same sense; cf. ग्रस्तं निरस्तमव- लम्बितं निर्हतम् ० M. Bh on I.1.1. अविवक्षा non-intention: connivance; cf. सतोऽप्यविवक्षा भवति । अलोभिका एडका । अनुदरा कन्या । also cf. प्रसिद्धेरविवक्षातः कर्मणोऽकर्मिका क्रिया. अविवक्षित (1) not taken technically into consideration, not meant: cf. अविवक्षिते कर्मणि षष्ठी भवति M.Bh on II.3. 52; (2) unnecessary; superfluous; the word is especially used in connection with a word in a Sūtra which could as well be read with- out that word. The word अतन्त्रं is sometimes used similarly. अविशेष absence of specification; cf. गामादाग्रहणेष्वविशेषः M.Bh.I.1.20 Vārt 1; Par. Śek. Pari. 106. अविशेषित not specified, mentioned without any specific attribute; cf. एवमपि प्रयत्नः अविशेषितः भवति M.Bh. on I.1.9; cf. also Kātan. VI.1.63. अवृत्ति absence of, or prohibition of, a vṛtti or composite expression; mon- formation of a composite express- ion; cf. समानाधिकरणानां सर्वत्रावृत्तिरयोगादेकेन M.Bh. on III.1. 8. |
अवृद्ध lit.not beginning with the vowel अा, ऐ or औ; a word which has got no अा or ऐ， or औ as its first vowel, as for example ग्लुचुक, अहिचुम्बक etc. इरावती, नर्मदा यमुना etc; cf. प्राचामवृद्धात् फिन् बहुलम् P.IV.1.160. also अवृद्धाभ्यो नदीमानुषीभ्यस्तन्नामिकाभ्यः P.IV. 1.113. अव्यक्त (1) indistinct; inarticulate; cf. अव्यक्तानुकरणस्यात इतौ P. VI.1.98 also P.V.4.57; अव्यक्तं अपरिस्फुटवर्णम् Kāś. on P. VI.1.98; (2) a fault of pronunciation cf. नातिव्यक्तं न चाव्यक्त- मेवं वर्णानुदीरयेत् । अव्यपवृक्त unseparated, undivided, inseparable, mixed; cf. नाव्यपवृक्तस्य अवयवे तद्विधिः यथा द्रव्येषु M. Bh. on Siva-sutra 4.V.9 whereon Kai- yaṭa remarks व्यपवृक्तं भेदः । अव्यपवृक्तं अभिन्नबुद्धिविषयमेकत्वालम्बनज्ञानग्राह्यं समुदा- यरूपम् । अव्यय indeclinable, lit. invariant, not undergoing a change. Pāṇini has used the word as a technical term and includes in it all such words as स्वर्, अन्तर् , प्रातर् etc, or composite expressions like अव्ययीभावसमास, or such taddhitānta words as do not take all case affixes as also kṛdanta words ending in म् or ए, ऐ, ओ, औ. He gives such words in a long list of Sutras P. I.1.37 to 41; cf. सदृशं त्रिषु लिङ्गेषु सर्वासु च विभ- क्तिषु । वचनेषु च सर्वेषु यन्न व्येति तदव्ययम् Kāś. on P.I.1.37. अव्ययसंग्रह name of a treatise ond- eclinable words attributed to Sāka- ṭāyana. अव्ययार्थनिरूपण a work on the mean- ings of indeclinable words written in the sixteenth century A. D. by Viṭṭhala Śeṣa, grandson of Rama- candra Śeṣa the author of the Pra- kriyā Kaumudi. अव्ययीभाव name of a compound so called on account of the words for- |
ming the compound, being similar to indeclinables: e. g. निर्मक्षिकम् , अधिहरि, यथामति, यावज्जीवम् etc.; cf. अन- व्ययं अव्ययं भवतीत्यव्ययीभावः M. Bh. on II.I.5. The peculiarity of the avyayībhāva compound is that the first member of the compound plays the role of the principal word; cf. पूर्वपदार्थप्रधानोऽव्ययीभावः M. Bh. on II.1.6. अव्यवधान absence of intervention between two things by something dissimilar; close sequence cf. अतज्जातीयकं हि लोके व्यवधायकं भवति M. Bh. on I.1.7. Vārt. 8; cf also येन नाव्यवधानं तन ब्यवहितेपि वचनप्रामाण्यात् M. Bh. on VII.3.44, VII.3.54, VII.4.l, VII.4.93. The term अव्यवाय is used in the same sense. अव्यवस्था absence of proper disposal; absence of a proper method regard- ing the application of a rule: cf. पुनर्ऋच्छिभावः पुनराडिति चक्रकमव्यवस्था प्राप्नोति M. Bh. on I.3.60 V. 5. अव्याप्ति insufficient extension, as opposed to अतिव्याप्ति or over applica- tion; cf.सर्वौपाधिव्यभिचारार्थम् । अव्याप्त्यति- व्याप्त्यसंभवादिदोषपरिहारार्थम् Padamañjarī on II.1.32. अव्याप्य an intransitive root; a techni- cal term in the Cāndra Vyākaraṇa (C. Vy. I.4.70 ) as also in Hemacandra's Śabdānuśāsana; cf. अव्याप्यस्य मुचेर्मोग् वा । मुचेरकर्मकस्य सकारादौ सनि परे मोक् इत्ययमादेशो वा स्यात् । न चास्य द्विः । मोक्षति मुमुक्षति चैत्र: । मोक्षते मुमुक्षते वा वत्सः स्वयमेव Hem. IV.1.19. अव्युत्पत्तिपक्ष the view held generally by grammarians that all words are not necessarily susceptible to ana- lysis or derivation, an alternative view opposed to the view of the etymologists or Nairuktas that every word is derivable; cf. पाणिनेस्त्वव्युत्पत्ति- पक्ष एवेति शब्देन्दुशेखरे निरूपितम् Pari. Śekh. Pari. 22; वाचक उपादान: स्वरूप- वानिति अव्युत्पत्तिपक्षे Vyāḍi's Saṁgraha. |
अव्युत्पन्न underived, unanalysable; cf. उणादयोऽव्युत्पन्नानि प्रा तिपदिकानि M. Bh. I. 1.61 Vārt. 4: Par. Śek. Pari. 22. अव्युत्पन्नपक्ष same as अव्युत्पत्तिपक्ष. See above the word अव्युत्पत्तिपक्ष. अश् (1) Pratyāhāra or a brief term standing for all vowels, semi- vowels, and the fifth, fourth and third of the class-consonants; all letters excepting the surds and sibi- lants; (2) substitute अ for the word इदम् before affixes of cases beginn- ing with the instrumental, and for एतद् before the tad. affixes त्र and तस्; see P.II.4.32 and 33; (3) substitute अ for the gen. sing. case-affix ङस् after the words युष्मद् and अस्मद्; see P.VII.1.27. अशक्ति incapacity to pronounce words correctly; cf. अशक्त्या कयाचिद् ब्राह्मण्या ऋतक इति प्रयोक्तव्ये लृतक इति प्रयुक्तम् M.Bh. on Śiva-sūtra 2. अशिष्य unnecessary to be prcscribed or laid down.; cf.तदशिष्यं संज्ञाप्रमाणत्वात् P. I.2.53; also लिङ्गं अशिष्यं लोकाश्रयत्वा- ल्लिङ्गस्य M.Bh. on II.1.36. अश्मादि a class of words headed by the word अश्मन् to which the taddh- ita affix र is applied in the four senses specified in P.IV.2.67 to 70; e.g. अश्मरः, ऊषरम् , नगरम् , पामरः गह्वरम् etc. cf. P.IV.2.80. अश्वघासादि compounds like अश्वघास which cannot be strictly correct as चतुथींसमास, but can be षष्ठीसमास if the word तदर्थ in the rule चतुर्थी तदर्थार्थ- बलिहितसुखरक्षितैः be understood in the sense of 'meant for' a particular thing which is to be formed out of it: cf. विकृतिः प्रकृत्येति चेदश्वघासादीनामुपसं- ख्यानम् M.Bh. on II.1.36. अश्वपत्यादि a class of words headed by अश्वपति to which the taddhita affix अण् (अ) is added in the senses mentioned in rules before the rule तेन दीव्यति० P.IV.4.2, which are |
technically called the Prāgdīvya- tiya senses. e g. अश्वपतम्, गाणपतम्. गार्हपतम् etc. अश्वत्थनारायण a commentator who wrote a gloss on Pāṇini's Aṣṭā- dhyāyī in the Tamil language. अश्वादि (1) a class of words headed by the word अश्व to which the affix फञ्(अायन) is added in the sense of गोत्र (grandchildren etc.); e.g.आश्वायनः जातायनः, औत्सायनः etc.; cf. P.IV.1. 110; (2) a class of words headed by the word अश्व to which the taddhita affix यत् is added in the sense of a cause of the type of a meeting or an accidental circum- stance; e.g. आश्विकम् अाश्मिकम् cf. P. V.1.39. अष्टक another name for the famous work of Pāṇini popularly called the Aṣṭādhyāyī; cf. अष्टावध्यायाः परि- माणमस्य सूत्रस्य अष्टकं पाणिनीयम् । दशकं वैया- घ्रपदीयम् । त्रिंकं काशकृत्स्नम् । Kāś on P.IV. 1.58; (2) students of Pāṇini's grammar, e. g. अष्टकाः पाणिनीयाः; cf. सूत्राच्च कोपधात् । Kāś. on P.IV. 2. 65. अष्टम a term used by ancient gram- marians for the vocative case. अष्टमङ्गला name of a commentary on the Kātantra Vyākaraṇa by Rām- akiśoracakravartin. अष्टाध्यायी name popularly given to the Sūtrapāṭha of Pāṇini consisting of eight books (adhyāyas) containing in all 3981 Sūtras,as found in the tra- ditional recital, current at the time of the authors of the Kāśika. Out of these 398l Sūtras, seven are found given as Vārtikas in the Mahābhā- ṣya and two are found in Gaṇap- āṭha.The author of the Mahābhāṣya has commented upon only 1228 of these 3981 sūtras. Originally there were a very few differences of read- ings also, as observed by Patañjali ( see Mbh on I.4.1 ); but the text |
was fixed by Patañjali which, with a few additions made by the auth- ors of the Kāśika,as observed above, has traditionally come down to the present day. The Aṣṭādhyāyī is believed to be one of the six Ved- āṅga works which are committed to memory by the reciters of Ṛgveda. The text of the Aṣṭādhyāyī is recited without accents. The word अष्टाध्यायी was current in Patañjali's time; cf. शिष्टज्ञानार्था अष्टाध्यायी M. Bh. on VI. 3.109. अष्टाक्षरा a metre having eight sylla- bles in a foot;cf.गायत्री सा चतुर्विंशत्यक्षरा । अष्टाक्षरास्त्रयः पादाः चत्वारो वा षडक्षराः R. Pr.XVI.9. अष्टि name of a metre of four feet consisting of 64 syllables in all, 12 syllables in the odd feet and 20 in the even feet; e. g. त्रिकद्रुकेषु महिषः etc. R.V. II.22.1. अस् (1) case affix of the nominative and accusative plural and the ab- lative and genitive singular (जस् , शस्, ङसि and ङस् ) (2) taddhita affix अस् ( असि ) added to पूर्व, अधर and अवर, by P.V.3.39: (3) compound- ending अस् ( असिच् ) applied to the words प्रजा and मेधा standing at the end of a Bahuvrīhi compound (P.V.4.122): (4) Uṇādi affix अस् prescribed by the rule सर्वधातुभ्योऽसुन् and subsequent rules (628-678) to form words such as मनस्,सरस् etc.(5) ending syllable अस्, with or with- out sense, of words in connection with which special operations are given in grammar; cf. P.VI.4.14; cf. also अनिनस्मन्ग्रहणान्यर्थवता चानर्थकेन च तदन्तविधिं प्रयोजयन्ति Par.Śek. Pari. 16. अस affix अस mentioned in the Niru- kta in the word अवस ( अव् + अस ) cf. असो नामकरणः । तस्मान्नावगृह्णन्ति NirI.17. असंख्य not possessing any notion of number; the word is used in con- |
nection with avyayas or indeclina- bles; यथैव हि अलिङ्गमव्ययमेवमसंख्यमपि M. Bh. on II.4.82. असंज्ञक a term used for the Cāndra Grammar,as no saṁjñas or techni- cal terms are used therein; cf.चान्द्रं चासंज्ञकं स्मृतम्. असंज्ञा not used as a technical term or name of a thing; cf. पूर्वपरावरदक्षिणोत्त- रापराधराणि व्यवस्थायामसंज्ञायाम् P.1.1.34. असंनिकर्ष (।) separatedness as in the case of two distinct words;(2) absence of co-alescence preven- ting the sandhi; cf R.T. 68,70. असंनिधान the same as असंनिकर्ष; see above; e. g. भरा इन्द्र; तमु अभिप्रगायत. असंप्रत्यय failure to understand the sense; cf. इतरथा ह्यसंप्रत्ययोऽकृत्रिमत्वाद्यथा लोके M. Bh. on I.1.23 Vārt. 3. असंभव Impossibility of occurrence (used in connection with an operation); cf नावश्यं द्विकार्ययोग एव विप्रतिषेधः । किं तर्हि । असंभवेपि । M. Bh. I.1.12 Vārt. 3; (2) impossibi- lity of a statement, mention, act etc. cf. असंभवः खल्वपि अर्थादेशनस्य M. Bh. on II.1.1. असंयोग absence of the conjunction of consonants; cf. असंयोगाल्लिट् कित् P.I.2.5. असंहिता absence of juxta-position, absence of connectedness; cf. यदि तावत्संहितया निर्देशः क्रियते भ्वादय इति भवितव्यम् । अथासंहितया भू अादय इति भविंतव्यम् M. Bh. on I.3.1. असत्त्व(l) absence of सत्त्व or entity; (2) other than a substance i. e. property, attribute, etc. cf. प्रादयः असत्त्ववचना निपातसंज्ञा भवन्ति M. Bh. I. 4.59; cf. also सोऽसत्त्वप्रकृतिर्गणः M. Bh. on IV.1.44. cf. also चादयोऽ सत्त्वे P.I.4.57. असमर्थ (1) syntactically not con- nected, e. g. राज्ञः and पुरुषः in the sentence भार्या राज्ञः पुरुषो देवदत्तस्य (2) |
unable to enter into a compound word, the term is used in con- nection with a word which can- not be compounded with another word, although related in sense to it, and connected with it by apposition or by a suitable case affix, the reason being that it is connected more closely with an- other word: cf. सापेक्षमसमर्थं भवति M. Bh. II.1.1.; e.g. the words कष्टं and श्रितः in the sentence महत् कष्टं श्रितः. असमर्थसमास a compound of two words, which ordinarily is in- admissible, one of the two words being more closely connected with a third word, but which takes place on the authority of usage, there being no obstacle in the way of understanding the sense to be conveyed; e. g. देवदत्तस्य गुरुकुलम् । देवदत्तस्य दासभार्या । असूर्यंपश्यानि मुखानि, अश्राद्धभोजी ब्राह्मणः M. Bh. on II.1.1. असमस्त not compounded, not en- tered into a compound with an- other word; cf. समासे असमस्तस्य Hem. II.3.13. असमास ( 1) absence of a compound. उपसर्गादसमासेपि णोपदेशस्य P. VIII.4.14; (2) an expression conveying the sense of a compound word al- though standing in the form of separate words: चार्थे द्वन्द्ववचने असमासेपि वार्थसंप्रत्ययादनिष्टं प्राप्नोति । अहरहर्नयमानो गामश्वं पुरुषं पशुम् M. Bh. on II.2.29. असरूप not having the same out- ward form or appearance; e. g. the affixes अण्, अच्, ण, अट्, ञ्, and the like which are, in fact, सरूप as they have the same outward form viz. the affix अ. अण् and यत् are असरूप; cf. वाऽसरूपोऽस्त्रियाम् P.III. 1.94. |
असर्वविभक्ति not admitting all case- affixes to be attached to it; cf. तद्धितश्चासर्वविभक्ति: P.I.1.38: यस्मान्न सर्वविभक्तेरुत्पत्तिः सोसर्वविभक्तिः । ततः यतः तत्र यत्र । Kāś. on I.1.38. असामर्थ्य absence of a syntactical con- nection cf दध्ना पटुः । घृतेन पटुः । असामर्थ्यादत्र समासो न भविष्यति । कथम- सामर्थ्यम् । सापेक्षमसमर्थं भवतीति । न हि दध्नः पटुना सामर्थ्यम् । केन तर्हि । भुजिना । दध्ना भुङ्क्ते पटुरिति । M. Bh. on II.1.30. असारूप्य dissimilarity in apparent form (although the real wording in existence might be the same) e. g. टाप्, डाप् , चाप्; cf. नानुबन्धकृतमसारूप्यम् । Par. Śek. Pari. 8. असि (I) Uṇādi affix अस्; (2) tad. affix अस्. See above the word अस्. असिच् samāsa-ending affix अस्. See above the word अस्. असिद्ध invalid; of suspended validity for the time being: not functioning for the time being. The term is frequently used in Pāṇini's system of grammar in connection with rules or operations which are prevented, or held in suspense, in connection with their application in the process of the formation of a word. The term (असिद्ध) is also used in connection with rules that have applied or operations that have taken place, which are, in certain cases, made invalid or invisible as far as their effect is concerned and other rules are applied or other operations are allowed to take place, which ordinarily have been prevented by those rules which are made invalid had they not been inva- lidated. Pāṇini has laid down this invalidity on three different occasions (1) invalidity by the rule पूर्वत्रासिद्धम् VIII.2.1. which makes a rule or operation in the |
second, third and fourth quarters of the eighth chapter of the Aṣṭādhyāyī invalid when any pre- ceding rule is to be applied, (2) invalidity by the rule असिद्धवदत्राभात् which enjoins mutual invalidity in the case of operations prescrib- ed in the Ābhīya section begin- ning with the rule असिद्धवत्राभात् (VI. 4.22.) and going on upto the end of the Pāda (VI.4.175), (3) invali- dity of the single substitute for two letters, that has already taken place, when ष् is to be substituted for स्, or the letter त् is to be prefixed, cf. षत्वतुकोरसिद्धः (VI. 1.86). Although Pāṇini laid down the general rule that a subsequent rule or operation, in case of conflict, supersedes the preceding rule, in many cases it became necessary for him to set, that rule aside, which he did by means of the stratagem of inva- lidity given above. Subsequent grammarians found out a number of additional cases where it be- came necessary to supersede the subseguent rule which they did by laying down a dictum of in- validity similar to that of Pāṇini. The author of the Vārttikas, hence, laid down the doctrine that rules which are nitya or antaraṅga or apavāda, are strong- er than, and hence supersede, the anitya, bahiraṅga and utsarga rules respectively. Later gram marians have laid down in general, the invalidity of the bahiraṅga rule when the antaraṅga rule occurs along with it or subsequent to it. For details see Vol. 7 of Vvyākaraṇa Mahābhāṣya(D. E. Society's edition) pages 217-220. See also Pari. Śek. Pari. 50. |
असिद्धत्व invalidity of a rule or ope- ration on account of the various considerations sketched above. See असिद्ध. असिद्धपरिभाषा the same as Antaraṅga Paribhāṣā or the doctrine of the invalidity of the bahiraṅga ope- ration. See the word असिद्ध above. For details see the Paribhāṣā 'asiddham , bahiraṅgam anta- raṅge' Par. Śek. Pari. 50 and the discussion thereon. Some gram- marians have given the name असिद्धपरिभाषा to the Paribhāṣā असिद्धं बहिरङ्गमन्तरङ्गे as contrasted with अन्तरङ्गं बहुिरङ्कगाद् वलीयः which they have named as बहिरङ्गपरिभाषा. असुक् the augment अस् seen in Vedic Literature added to the nom. pl. case-affix जस् following a noun- base ending in अ; e.g, जनासः, देवासः etc. cf आज्जसेरसुक् P. VII.1.50,51. असुड् substitute अस् for the last letter of the word पुंस् before the सर्वनाम- स्थान affixes i. e. before the first five case affixes,e.g. पुमान् पुमांसौ etc.; cf. पुंसोsसुङ् P.VII.1.89 असुन् Uṅādi affix अस् ( असुन् ) by सर्व- धातुभ्योSसुन् वक्तव्यः Uṅ. Sū.628; cf. न वेत्तीति नवेदाः। वेतिरसुन्प्रत्ययान्तः Kāś. on P.VI.3.75. असे kṛt affix in the sense of the infini- tive (तुमर्थे) in Vedic Literature,e.g- जीवसे; cf. तुमर्थे सेसेनसेo P.III.4.9 अस्ताति tad. affix अस्तात् in the sense of the base itself, but called विभक्ति, prescribed after words in the sense of 'direction', e. g. पुरस्तात्, अधस्तात् etc. cf. दिक्शब्देभ्यः सप्तमीपञ्चमीप्रथमाभ्येा दिग्देशकालेषु अस्तातिः P. V.3.27. अस्थ अ, अा and अा३. This term is used in Ṛk Tantra cf. अस्थनामिनी सन्ध्यम् R.T.94, अस्थ possibly means 'belonging to अ i. e. all the three grades ह्रस्व, दीर्घ and प्लुत of अ'. |
अस्पष्ट less in contact with the vocal organ than the semi-vowels; the term occurs in Hemacandra's Grammar (Hem. I.3.25) and is explained by the commentator as 'ईषत्स्पृष्टतरौ प्रत्यासत्तेर्यकारवकारौ. अस्पष्ट stands for the letters य and व which are substituted for the vowels ए ऐ and ओ औ when followed by a vowel; cf, also Śāk I.I.154. अस्पृष्ट not in contact with any vocal organ; the term is used in connec- tion with the effort required for the utterance of vowels, अनुस्वार and sibilants when no specific contact with a vocal organ is necessary: cf. स्वरानुस्वारेाष्मणामस्पृष्टं करणं स्थितम् R. Pr. XIII. 3. अस्मद् first person; the term is used in the sense of the first person in the grammars of Hemacandra and Śākaṭāyana. cf. त्रीणि त्रीण्यन्ययुष्मदस्मदि (Hem. III.3.17); अस्वपदविग्रह a term used for those compounds, the dissolution of which cannot be shown by the members of the compound: e. g. सुमुखी; cf. भवति वै कश्चिदस्वपदविग्रहोपि बहु- व्रीहिः । तद्यथा । शोभनं मुखमस्याः सुमुखीति । M.Bh. on V.4.5. अस्वयंदृष्ट A term used for the per- fect tense; cf. कृ चकारमस्वयंदृष्टे (R.T. 19l). अस्व not homogeneous: asavarṇa. cf. इवर्णादेः अस्वे स्वरे यवरलम् Hem. I.2.21, also अस्वे Śāk.I.1.73. अस्वरक untoned; a word without an accent, as different from a word which has an accent,but whi- ch is not uttered with that accent: cf अक्रियमाणे ह्युपदेशिवद्भावे...अान्तर्यत अांदेशा अस्वरकाणामस्वरकाः स्युः M.Bh. on VII. 1.2, VII. 1. 89. |
आ आ (1) the long form of the vowel अ called दीर्घ,consisting of two mātrās, in contrast with (l) the short अ which consists of one mātrā and the protracted आ३ which consists of three mātrās; (2) substitute अा of two mātrās when prescribed by the word दीर्घ or वृद्धि for the short vowel अ; (3) upasarga अा (अाङ्) in the sense of limit e.g. अा कडारादेका संज्ञा (P.I.4.1.) आकुमारं यशः पाणिनेः K. on II.1.13. आ उदकान्तात् (M. Bh. on I.1.14.) (4) indeclin- able आ in the sense of remem- brance e. g. आ एवं नु मन्यसे; cf. ईषदर्थे क्रियायोगे मर्यादाभिविधौ च यः । एतमातं ङितं विद्याद्वाक्यस्मरणयोरङित् M. Bh. on I.1.14; (5) augment अा ( अाक् ) as seen in चराचर, वदावद etc. cf. M. Bh. VI.1.12 Vārt. 6; (6) augment अा(आट्) prefixed to roots in the tenses लुङ्, लङ् and लृङ् (7) substi- tute अा prescribed for the last letter of pronouns before the tad. affixes दृक्,दृश, दृक्ष and वत्, as in तादृक्दृ, तादृश etc.; (8) feminine affix आ (टाप्, डाप् or चाप् ) added to nouns end- ing in अा; (9) substitute आ ( आ or अात्, or डा or आल् ) for case affixes in Vedic literature उभा यन्तारौ, नाभा पृथिव्याः etc. आँ indeclinable आ pronounccd nasa- lized, e. g. अभ्र आँ अपः M. Bh. I.3.2. आक् see above the word आ sense(5). आकम् the substitute आकम् for साम् of the gen. pl. after the words युष्मद् and अस्मद् e. g. युष्माकं, अस्माकम् cf. P.VII.1.33. आकर्षक ( a word ) attracting ano- ther word stated previously in the context e. g. the word च in the rules of Pāṇini. |
आकर्षादि a class of words headed by the word आकर्ष to which the tadd- hita affix कन् (क) is applied in the sense of clever or expert; e. g. आकर्षकः, त्सरुकः, शकुनिकः etc.; cf. P. अाकर्षादिभ्यः कन् P.V.2.64. आकाङ्क्ष (or साकाङ्क्ष also) expectant of another word in the context, e. g. कूज and व्याहर in अङ्ग कूज३, अङ्ग व्याहर३ इदानीं ज्ञास्यसि जाल्म Kāś. on अङ्गयुक्तं तिङाकाङ्क्षम् (P.VIII.2.96). आकाङ्क्षा expectancy with regard to sense-completion, generally in compounds such as साकाङ्क्ष, निराकाङ्क्ष etc. cf. अस्त्यस्मिन्नाकाङ्क्षा इत्यतः साकाङ्क्षम् M. Bh. on III.2.114. आकाङ्क्ष्य a word for which there is expectancy of another word for the completion of sense. आकार the letter आ; cf. आकारस्य विवृतोप- देश अाकारग्रहणार्थः । M. Bh. I.1 Āhn. 2. आकिनिच् tad. aff. अाकिन् affixed to the word एक in the sense of 'single,' 'alone'; cf. एकादाकिनिच्चासहाये P.V.3.52. आकुस्मीय a group of 43 roots of the चुरादि class of roots beginning with the root चित् and ending with कुस्म् which are Ātmanepadin only. आकृति lit. form; individual thing; cf. एकस्या अाकृतेश्चरितः प्रयोगो द्वितीयस्यास्तृतीय- स्याश्च न भवति M.Bh on III.1.40 Vārt.6. The word is derived as आक्रियते सा आकृतिः and explained as संस्थानम्; cf. आक्रियते व्यज्यते अनया इति आकृतिः संस्थानमुच्यते Nyāsa on IV.1.63; (2) general form which, in a way, is equivalent to the generic notion or genus; cf. आकृत्युपदेशात्सिद्धम् । अवर्णा- कृतिरुपदिष्टा सर्वमवर्णकुलं ग्रहीष्यति M. Bh.
|
cf also यत्तर्हि तद् भिन्नेष्वभिन्नं छिनेष्वच्छिन्नं सामान्यभूतं स शब्दः । नेत्याह । अाकृतिर्नाम सा. M. Bh. I.1.Āhn.1; (4) a metre consisting of 88 letters; cf. R. Prāt. XVI.56,57. अाकृतिगण a class or group of words in which some words are actually mentioned and room is left to include others which are found undergoing the same opera- tion; cf. श्रेण्यादयः कृतादिभिः । श्रेण्यादयः पठ्यन्ते कृतादिराकृतिगणः M. Bh. on II.1.59. Haradatta defines the word as प्रयोगदर्शनेन आकृतिग्राह्यो गणः अाकृतिगण:। अत्र अादिशब्दः प्रकारे । अाकृति- गणेपि उदाहरणरूपेण कतिपयान् पठति कृत मत इत्यादि Padamañjarī on II.I.59 ; cf. Pradīpa of Kaiyaṭa also on II.1. 59.Some of the gaṇas mentioned by Pāṇini are ākṛtigaṇas, e.g. अर्श- आदिगण, मूलविभुजादिगण, स्नात्व्यादिगण, शिवादिगण, पचादिगण, and others. आक्षरसमाम्नायिक directly or expressly mentioned in the fourteen Pratyā- hāra Sūtras of Pāṇini; a letter actually mentioned by Pāṇini in his alphabet 'अइउण्', 'ऋलृक्' etc. आक्षिप्त (l) taken as understood, being required to complete the sense; cf. क्विबपि अाक्षिप्तो भवति M. Bh. on III.2. 178;(2) a term used for the circum- flex accent or स्वरित as it is uttered by a zig-zag motion of the organ in the mouth caused by the air producing sound; cf. आक्षेपो नाम तिर्यग्गमनं गात्राणां वायुनिमित्तं तेन य उच्यते स स्वरितः Uvaṭa on R. Pr. III. 1. आक्षेप a zig-zag motion of the organs caused by the air; see आक्षिप्त above. आख्या designation, conventional name; cf. देवदत्तो मुण्ड्यपि जट्यपि त्यामा- ख्यां न जहाति M. Bh. on I.1.1; cf. also स्वमज्ञातिघनाख्यायाम् P.I.1.35; cf. also वर्णः कारोत्तरो वर्णाख्या Tai. Prāt. I. 16. |
अाख्यात verbal form, verb; cf. भावप्रधानमाख्यातं सत्त्वप्रधानानि नामानि Nir. I.1; चत्वारि पदजातानि नामाख्यातोपसर्गनि- पाताश्च M. Bh. I.1. Āhnika 1 ; also A.Prāt. XII. 5, अाकार अाख्याते पदादिश्च M. Bh. I.2.37 Vārt. 2, आख्यातमाख्यातेन क्रियासातत्ये Sid. Kau. on II.1.72, क्रियावाचकमाख्यातं V. Pr. V.1; cf. भारद्वाजकमाख्यातं भार्गवं नाम भाष्यते । भारद्वाजेन दृष्टत्वादाख्यातं भारद्वाज- गोत्रम् V. Prāt. VIII. 52; cf. also Athar. Prāt.I.I.12, 18; 1.3.3,6; II.2.5 where ākhyāta means ver- bal form. The word also meant in ancient days the root also,as differ- entiated from a verb or a verbal form as is shown by the lines तन्नाम येनाभिदधाति सत्त्वं, तदाख्यातं येन भावं स धातुः R.Pr.XII.5 where 'आख्यात' and 'धातु' are used as synonyms As the root form such as कृ, भृ etc. as dis- tinct from the verbal form, is never found in actual use, it is immater- ial whether the word means root or verb.In the passages quoted above from the Nirukta and the Mahā- bhāṣya referring to the four kinds of words, the word ākhyāta could be taken to mean root (धातु) or verb (क्रियापद). The ākhyāta or verb is chiefly concerned with the process of being and bccoming while nouns (नामानि) have sattva or essence, or static element as their meaning. Verbs and nouns are concerned not merely with the acti- vities and things in this world but with every process and entity; cf. पूर्वापूरीभूतं भावमाख्यातेनाचष्टे Nir.I.;अस्ति- भवतिविद्यतीनामर्थः सत्ता । अनेककालस्थायि- नीति कालगतपौर्वापर्येण क्रमवतीति तस्याः क्रिया- त्वम् । Laghumañjūṣā. When a kṛt. affix is added to a root, the static element predominates and hence a word ending with a kṛt. affix in the sense of bhāva or verbal acti- vity is treated as a noun and regu- |
larly declined;cf.कृदभिहितो भावे द्रव्यवद् भवति M.Bh. on II.2.19 and III. 1.67, where the words गति, व्रज्या, पाक and others are given as instances. Regarding indeclinable words end- ing with kṛt. affixes such as कर्तुं, कृत्वा, and others, the modern gram- marians hold that in their case the verbal activity is not shadowed by the static element and hence they can be,in a way, looked upon as ākhyātas; cf. अव्ययकृतो भावे Vaiyā- karaṇabhūṣaṇa. अख्यातप्रक्रिया a work dealing with verbs, written by Anubhūtisvarūpā- cārya on the Sārasvata Vyākaraṇa. अाख्यातविवेक a work dealing with verbs and their activity by Kṛṣṇa- Shāstrī Āraḍe a great Naiyāyika of the 18th century. अाख्यातव्याकरण a treatise on verbs discussing verbal forms by Vaṅga- Sena. अागन्तुक lit. adventitious, an addi- tional wording generally at the end of roots to show distinctly their form e.g. वदि, एधि, सर्ति etc.; cf. इन्धिभवतिभ्यां च P I.2.6: cf. also भावलक्षणे स्थेण्कृञ्वदिचरिहृतभिजनि- भ्यस्तोमुन्, P.III.4.16, सृपिवृदो. कसुन् P. III.4.17 and a number of other sūtras where इ or तिं is added to the root cf. इक्श्तिपौ धातुनिर्देशे, वर्णा- त्कारः, रादिफः P.III.3.108 Vārt. 2.3. 4, where such appendages to be added to the roots or letters are given. The word अागन्तु is an old word used in the Nirukta, but the term आगन्तुक appears to be used for the first time for such forms by Haradatta; cf. ह्वरोरिति ह्वृ कौटिल्ये, आगन्तुकेकारे गुणेन निर्देशः Padamañjarī on VII.2.31. In the traditional oral explanations the second part of a reduplicated word is termed अागन्तुक which is placed second |
i. e. after the original by vir- tue of the convention आगन्तू- नामन्ते निवेशः, although in fact, it is said to possess the sense of the root in contrast with the first which is called abhyāsa.A nice distinction can, however be drawn between the four kinds of adventi- tious wordings found in grammar viz.आगन्तु, इत्, अभ्यास and आगम which can be briefly stated as follows; The former two do not form a regular part of the word and are not found in the actual use of the word; besides, they do not possess any sense, while the latter two are found in actual use and they are possessed of sense. Again the agantu word is simply used for facility of understanding exactly and correctly the previous word which is really wanted; the इत् wording, besides serving this pur- pose, is of use in causing some grammatical operations. अभ्यास, is the first part of the wording which is wholly repeated and it possesses no sense by itself, while, āgama which is added to the word either at the beginning or at the end or inserted in the middle, forms a part of the word and possesses the sense of the word. आगम augment, accrement, a word element which is added to the primitive or basic word during the process of the formation of a com- plete word or pada. The āgama is an adventitious word element and hence differs from ādeśa, the substitute which wholly takes the place of the original or ( आदेशिन् ). Out of the several āgamas men- tioned by Pāṇini, those that are marked with mute ट् are prefixed, those, marked with क्, are affixed, while those, marked with म्, are |
placed immediately after the last vowel of the word. The aug- ments become a part and parcel of the word to which they are added, and the characteristics of which they possess;cf.यदागमास्तद्गुणी- भूतास्तद्ग्रहणेन गृह्यन्ते, also आगमानां आगमि- धर्मिवैशिष्ट्यम् Par. Śek. Pari.11. Those grammarians, who hold the view that words are unproduced and eternal, explain the addition of an augment as only the substitution of a word with an augment in the place of a word without an aug- ment; cf. आदेशास्तर्हिमे भविष्यन्ति अनाग- मकानां सागमकाः M. Bh. on I.1.20; I.1.46. The term āgama is defined as अन्यत्र विद्यमानस्तु यो वर्णः श्रुयतेधिकः । आगम्यमानतुल्यत्वात्स आगम इति स्मृतः Com. on Tait. Prāt.I. 23. अागमिन् a base to which an augment is added; cf. एवमपि पञ्च अागमास्त्रय आगमिनः M.Bh.I.1. Āhnika 2. आगर्वीय a class of roots forming a subdivision of the Curādigaṇa or the tenth conjugation beginning with पद् and ending with गर्व् which are only ātmanepadin; e.g. पदयते, मृगयते, अर्थयते, गर्वयते. आगस्त्य name of an ancient writer of Vedic grammar and Prātiśākhya works; cf. R. Pr.I.2. अाग्रायण an ancient scholar of Nirukta quoted by Yāska cf. अक्षि अष्टेः । अनक्तेरिति आग्रायणः Nir. I.9. अाङ् the preposition आ. See the word आ above. अाङ्ग an operation prescribed in the section, called aṅgādhikāra, in the the Aṣṭādhyāyī of Pāṇini, made up of five Pādas consisting of the fourth quarter of the 6th adhyāya and all the four quarters of the seventh adhyāya. आङ्गात् पूर्वं विकरणा एषितव्याः M. Bh on I.3.60 Vārt. |
5; cf. also वार्णादाङ्गं बलीयो भवति Par. Śek. Pari 55: also M. Bh. on III.2.3. आच् tad. affix आ applied to the word दक्षिणा and उत्तरा; cf.P.V. 3.36, 38. e. g. दक्षिणा वसति, उत्तरा रमणीयम् Kāś on V.3.36, 38. आचार (1) customary usage of putting or employing words in rules; cf. आचार्याचारात्संज्ञासिद्धिः, P.I,1.1, Vārt. 4. (2) behaviour;cf. उपमानादाचारे P.III. 1.10; cf also निवासत आचारतश्च M.Bh. on VI.3.109. आचारक्विप् denom. affix क्विप् applied to any prātipadika or noun in the sense of behaviour: cf. सर्वप्रातिपदिकेभ्य आचारे क्विब् वक्तव्यः अश्वति गर्दभति इत्येवमर्थम् M. Bh. on III.1.11; cf. हलन्तेभ्य आचाराक्विबभावाच्च Par. Śek. on Pari.52. आचार्य preceptor, teacher; a designa- tion usually given to Pāṇini by Patañjali in the Mahābhāṣya; cf. the usual expression तज्ज्ञापयति आचार्यः as also अाचार्यप्रवृत्तिर्ज्ञापयति; also cf. नेदानीमाचार्याः सूत्राणि कृत्वा निवर्तयन्ति; cf. also the popular definition of अाचार्य given as 'निशम्य यद्गिरं प्राज्ञा अविचार्यैव तत्क्षणम् । संभावयन्ति शिरसा तमाचार्यं प्रचक्षते ।" आचार्यदेशीय a partisan of the precep- tor Pāṇini or the Sūtrakāra who is looked upon as having approx- mately the same authority as the Sūtrakāra; cf. अाचार्यदेशीय अाह- न वक्तव्य इति l Kaiyaṭa on I.4.105, Vārt. 2. आचार्यसंपद् necessary qualification to teach the Veda with all its pāṭhas having the necessary knowledge of accents, matrās and the like. cf. पदक्रमविभागज्ञो वर्णक्रमविचक्षणः स्वरमात्राविशे- षज्ञो गच्छेदाचार्यसंपदम् R. Prāt.I.8. आचितादि a class of words headed by the word अाचित which do not have their final vowel accented acute |
by P. VI.2.146 when they are preceded by the prepositions प्र, परा etc. although they are used as proper nouns. e.g. आचितम्,निरुक्तम्, प्रश्लिष्टम्; cf. Kāśikā on P. VI.2.146. अाट् (1) augment अा prefixed to roots beginning with a vowel in the imperfect, aorist and conditional, which is always accented (उदात्त); cf. P.VI.4.72; (2) augment अा prefixed to the imperative first person terminations, e.g. करवाणि, करवै etc.; cf. P.III.4.92: (3) aug- ment अा to be prefixed to case- affixes which are डित् after nouns called nadī: e.g. कुमार्यं; cf P.VII. 3.112. अाटच् tad.affix (आट) in the sense of possession added to the word वाच्; e.g. वाचाटः cf. P.V.2.125. अात् (1) long अा as different from short or protracted अ prescribed by the wofd वृद्धि or दीर्घ in the case of अ, or by the word अात् when substitu- ted for another vowel, as for exam- ple in the rule आदेच उपदेशेऽशिति and the following: cf. P.VI.1.45, 57; (2) substitute for the ablative affix ङस् after words ending in अ; cf. P. VII.1.12; (3) substitute अात् for a case affix in Vedic Literature, e.g. न ताद् ब्राह्मणाद् निन्दामि Kāś. on VII. 1.39. आताम् Ātmanepada third person dual ending, technically substituted for लकार by P.III.4.78 अाति tad. affix अात् applied to उत्तर, अधर and दक्षिण by P.V.3.34. आतिदेशिक applied by extension or transfer of epithet as opposed to औपदेशिक. See the word अतिदेश; the term is often used in connection with rules or operations which do not apply or occur by the direct expression of the grammarian; cf. यदि आतिदेशिकेन कित्वेन औपदेशिकं कित्वं |
बाध्येत. M. Bh. on I.2.1.; cf. also अातिदेशिकमनित्यम् Par.Śek. Pari. 93.6. आतिशायिक a tad-affix in the sense of excellence; a term applied to the affixes तम and इष्ठ as also तर and ईयस् prescribed by Pāṇini by the rules अतिशायने तमबिष्ठनौ and द्विवचन- विभज्योपपदे तरबीयसुनौ cf. P.V.3.55, 57. This superlative affix is seen doub- ly applied sometimes in Vedic Lit. eg.श्रेष्ठतमाय कर्मणे Yaj. Saṁ. I.1; cf. also तदन्ताच्च स्वार्थे छन्दसि दर्शनं श्रेष्ठतमायेति P.V.3.55 Vārt.3. आतिशायिकान्त a word ending with an atisāyika affix; cf. अातिदायिकान्तात्स्वार्थे छन्दसि आतिशायिको दृश्यते M. Bh. on V. 3.55. आत्त्व the substitution of long अा prescribed by the term अात् as in आदेच उपदेशेऽशिति and the following cf. P. VI.1.45 etc. आत्मन् agent or Kaṛtr as in the terms अात्मनेपद or अात्मनेभाषा, cf. सुप आत्मनः क्यच् III. 1.8. आत्मनेपद a technical term for the affixes called तड् (त, आताम् etc.) and the affix अान ( शानच् , चानश्, कानच् ), called so possibly because, the fruit of the activity is such as generally goes to the agent (आत्मने) when these affixes are used. Con- trast this term (Ātmanepada) with the term Parasmaipada when the fruit is meant for another. For an explanation of the terms see P. VI.3.7 and 8. अात्मनेपदिन् a root which always takes the Ātmanepada affixes. (See above). अात्मनेभाष a technical term used for such roots as speak for the agent himself; the term अात्मनेभाष means the same as the term अात्मनेपदिन्. The term अात्मनेभाष is not mention- ed by Pāṇini; but the writer of the Vārtikas explains it, cf. आत्मने- |
भाषपरस्मैभाषयोरुपसंख्यानम् P. VI.3.7 and 8 Vārt. 1; cf. also आत्मनेपदिनश्च धातवो वैयाकरणैरात्मनेभाषशब्देन व्यवह्रियन्ते,Kaiyaṭa on VI.3.7.The term is found in the Atharva-Prātiśākhya. III. 4.7. It cannot be said whether the term came in use after Pāṇini or, although earlier, it belonged to some school other than that of Pāṇini or, Pāṇini put into use the terms Ātmane- pada and Parasmaipada for the affixes as the ancient terms Ātman- ebhāṣa and Parasmaibhāṣa were in use for the roots. अात्व the substitution of अा; e.g. तादृक्, भवादृक्, अन्यादृक् cf. आ सर्वनाम्नः P.VI.3. 90. आत्वत् possessed of the vowel आ; containing the vowel आ; e.g पाकः, दायः etc. cf. कर्षात्वतो घञोन्त उदात्तः P.VI. 1.159. आदादिक belonging to the second con- jugation or class of roots which begins with the root अद्; cf. दैवादि- कस्यैव ग्रहणं भविष्यति नादादिकस्य Pur.Pari. 67. अादि (1) commencement, initial: cf. अपूर्वलक्षण आदिः M.Bh. on I.1.21, (2) of the kind of, similar; एवंप्रक्रारः. आदिकर्मन् commencement of an action; cf. आदिभूतः क्रियाक्षणः अदिकर्म Kāś. on आदिकर्मणि क्तः कर्तरि च । P.III.4.71. आदित् possessed of the mute indica- tory letter अा signifying the non- application of the augment इ (इट् ) to the past-pass. part. term क्त. e. g. क्ष्विण्ण from the root ञिक्ष्विदाः simi- larly खिन्न, भिन्न etc. cf. आदितश्र P.VII. 2.16. आदिवृद्धि the Vṛddhi substitute pres- cribed for the first vowel of a word to which a tad-affix, marked with the mute letter ञ्,ण्, or क् is added; e.g. औपगव, दाक्षि etc.; cf. तद्धितेष्वचामादेः P.VII.2.117, 118. |
आदिष्ट (1) prescribed for substitution; specified for an operation : cf. सिद्धे तु आदिष्टस्य युड्वचनात् M.Bh. on VI.1. 155; cf. also M. Bh. on VI. 1.I58 Vārt. 3; M. Bh. on IV.3.28 Vār. 5; cf. also आदिष्टाच्चैवाचः पूर्वः M. Bh. on I.1.57; (2) indicated or stated; अादिष्टा इमे वर्णाः. आदेश (1) substitute as opposed to sthānin, the original. In Pāṇini's grammar there is a very general maxim, possessed of a number of exceptions, no doubt, that 'the substitute behaves like the origi- nal' (स्थानिवदादेशः अनल्विधौ P.I.1.56.); the application of this maxim is called स्थानिवद्भाव; for purposes of this स्थानिवद्भाव the elision (लोप) of a phonetic element is looked upon as a sort of substitute;cf. उपधालेपस्य स्थानिवत्त्वात् Kāś. on P.I.1.58. Gram- marians many times look upon a complete word or a word-base as a substitute for another one, alth- ough only a letter or a syllable in the word is changed into another, as also when a letter or syllable is added to or dropped in a word; cf. पचतु, पचन्तु ... इमेप्यादेशाः । कथम् । अादिश्यते यः स आदेशः । इमे चाप्यादिश्यन्ते । M. Bh. on I.1.56; cf also सर्वे सर्व- पदादेशा दाक्षीपुत्रस्य पाणिनेः M.Bh. on P. I.1.20; cf. also अनागमकानां सागमका आदेशाः M. Bh. on I.1.20: (2) indi- cation, assignment; cf. योयं स्वरादेशः अन्तोदात्तं, वधेराद्युदात्तत्वं, स्वः स्वरितमिति अादेशः R.Pr.I.30-32; cf. also अादेशः उपदेशः com. on Tai.-Prāt. II.20: cf. also अनादेशे अविकारः V.Pr.IV.131, where Uvvaṭa remarks यत्र उदात्तादीनां स्वराणां सन्धौ आदेशो न क्रियते तत्र अविकारः प्रत्येतव्यः । cf. also एकारो विभक्त्यादेशः छन्दसि A.Pr. II.1.2, where ए is pres- cribed as a substitute for a case- affix and त्ये and अस्मे are cited as examples where the acute acent is also prescribed for the substitute ए. |
आदेशिन् that for which a substitute is prescribed; the original, sthā- nin: cf. आदेशिानामादेशाः cf. also M. Bh. On P.I.1.56. आद्य (1) premier; cf. इदमाद्यं पदस्थानं (व्याकरणनामकं ) सिद्धिसोपानपर्वणाम् Vāk. Pad. I.16; (2) preceding as oppo- sed to succeeding (उत्तर); cf. सहाद्यै- र्व्यञ्जनैः V.Pr.I.100 (3) original; cf. आद्यप्रकृतिः परमप्रकृतिः (original base) Bhāṣā Vṛtti. IV.1.93; (4) first, preceding, आद्ये योगे न व्यवाये तिङः स्यु; M.Bh. on III.1-91. आद्यन्तवत्त्व अाद्यन्तवद्भाव, consideration of a single or solitary letter as the initial or the final one according to requirements for opcrations prescribed for the initial or for the final. Both these notions --the initial and the final-are relative notions, and because they require the presence of an additional letter or letters for the sake of being called initial or final it becomes necessary to prescribe आद्यन्तवद्भाव in the case of a single letter; cf.अाद्यन्त- वदेकस्मिन् । आदौ इव अन्त इव एकस्मिन्नपि कार्यं भवति । यथा कर्तव्यमित्यत्र प्रत्ययाद्युदात्तत्वं भवति एवमौपगवमित्यत्रापि यथा स्यात् । Kāś. on P.I.1.21 ; cf. also अाद्यन्तवच्च । अपृक्तस्य आदिवदन्तवच्च कार्यं भवति । T. Pr. I.55. This अाद्यन्तवद्भाव of Pāṇini is, in fact, a specific application of the general maxim known as vyapadeśivadbhāva by virtue of which "an operation which affects something on account of some special designation, which for certain reasons attaches to the letter, affects likewise that which stands alone;" cf. Pari.Śek. Pari. 30. आद्युदात्त a word beginning with an acute-accent i.e. which has got the first vowel accented acute: words in the vocative case and words |
formed with an affix marked with a mute ञ् or न् are ādyudātta; cf.P. VI.1.197, 198: for illustrations in detail see P.VI.1.189-216. आद्युदात्तनिपातन specific mention of a word with the accent udātta or acute on the first syllable; cf. आद्युदात्तनिपातनं करिष्यते M.Bh. on I.1. 56, VI.1.12. आधार receptacle or abode of an action;cf.अाध्रियन्ते अस्मिन् क्रियाः इत्याधारः Kāś. on P.I.4.45 also M. Bh. on III.3.121; the Prakriyā Kaumudī mentions four kinds of ādhāras: cf. औपश्लेषिकः सामीपिको विषयो व्याप्त इत्याघारश्च- तुर्धा Prak. Kau. on II.3.36. अाधाराधेयभाव a non-differential rela- tion (अभेदसंसर्ग) between the perso- nal endings तिप् , तस् etc. and the noun in the nominative case which is the subject of the verbal activity;relation of a thing and its substratum: cf. निपातातिरिक्तनामार्थ- धात्वर्थयोर्भेदान्वयस्य अव्युत्पन्नत्वात्. आधिक्य superfluity, superiority, notion of surplus; cf यदत्राधिक्यं वाक्यार्थः सः M. Bh. on II.3.46, II.3. 50. आधृषीय a sub-division of roots belon- ging to the चुरादिगण or tenth conju- gation beginning with युज् and end- ing with धृष् which take the Vika- raṇa णिच् optionally i.e. which are also conjugated like roots of the first conjugation; e.g. यीजयति,योजयते, योजति;साहयति-ते, सहति. आधेय a thing placed in another or depending upon another, as oppo- sed to ādhāra or the container; cf. आधेयश्चाक्रियाजश्च सोसत्त्वप्रकृतिर्गुणः M. Bh. on P.IV.1.44. आन (1) kṛt affix (शानच् or चानश्) substi- tuted for the lakāra लट् and appli- ed to ātmanepadi roots forming the present participle; (2) kṛt. affix कानच् applied to ātmanepadi roots |
in the sense of past time forming the perfect participle cf. लिटः कानज्वा P.III.2.106. अानङ् substitute आन् in the place of the last letter (ऋ) of the first member of dvandva compounds of words meaning deities or of words show- ing blood-relationship which end with the vowel ऋ; e.g. होतापोतारौ, मातापितरो cf. P.VI.3.25, 26. आनन्तर्य (1) close proximity; absence of any intermediary element generally of the same nature: अनन्तरस्य भावः आनन्तर्यम्; cf. नाजानन्तर्ये वहिष्ट्वप्रक्लृप्तिः M. Bh. I.4.2. Vārt. 21: Par. Śek. Pari. 51. This close proxi- mity of one letter or syllable or so, with another, is actually i.e.phone- tically required and generally so found out also, but sometimes such proximity is theoretically not existing as the letter required for proximity is technically not present there by the rule पूर्वत्रासिद्धम्. In such cases, a technical absence is not looked upon as a fault. cf. कचिच्च संनिपातकृतमानन्तर्ये शास्त्रकृतमनानन्तर्ये यथा ष्टुत्वे, क्वचिच्च नैव संनिपातकृतं नापि शास्त्रकृतं यथा जश्त्वे । यत्र कुतश्चिदेवानन्तर्यं तदाश्रयिष्यामः M. Bh. on VIII.3.13. (2) close connection by mention together at a common place etc.;cf. सर्वाद्यानन्तर्यं कार्यार्थम् M. Bh. on I.1.27. अानन्ददत्त name of a Buddhist grammarian,the author of the work named Cāndra-vyākaraṇa Paddhati. आनर्थक्य absence of any utility; superfluity; absence of any object or purpose; cf. स्थानिवद्वचनानर्थक्यं शास्त्रा- सिद्धत्वात् । M. Bh. on P.VI.1.86 Vārt. 5 cf. also P.VI.1.158 Vārt. 4; VI.1.161 Vārt. 1, VI.1.166 Vārt. 1, VI.1.167 Vārt. 3. अानि imp. 1st per.sing affix नि with the augment अा prefixed, which |
has got its न् changed into ण् by P. VIII.4.16. आनुक् the augment आन्, added to the words इन्द्र, वरुण, भव and others before the fem. affix ई; e.g. इन्द्राणी, वरुणानी cf. इन्द्रवरुणभवशर्वरुद्र...आनुक् P. IV.1.49. आनुनासिक्य nasalization; utterance through the nose, an additional property possessed by vowels and the fifth letters of the 5 classes (ङ्, ञ्, ण् ,न्, म्) cf. आनुनासिक्यं तेषामधिको गुणः M.Bh. on I.1.9. आनुपूर्वी serial order, successive order of grammatical operations or the rules prescribing them as they occur; cf. अानुपूर्व्या सिद्धमेतत् M.Bh. on V.3.5; cf. also ययैव चानुपूर्व्या अर्थानां प्रादुर्भावस्तयैव शब्दानामपि । तद्वत् कार्यैरपि भवितव्यम् M.Bh. on. P.I.1.57. आनुपूर्व्य successive order, as prescri- bed by tradition or by the writer; cf. ऋतुनक्षत्राणामानुपूर्व्येण समानाक्षराणां पूर्वनि- पातः । शिशिरवसन्तौ उदगयनस्थौ । कृत्तिका- रोहिण्यः । M.Bh. II.2.34 Vārt.3;also वर्णानामानुपूर्व्येण ब्राह्मणक्षत्रियविट्शूद्राः M.Bh. on II.2.34 Vārt. 6: cf. पदानुपूर्व्येण प्रश्लिष्टान् संधीन् कुर्यात् । इन्द्र अा इहि । आदौ इन्द्र आ इत्येतयोः; न तु अा इहि इत्येतयाः R. Pr. II.2; cf. also आनुपूर्व्यात् सिद्धम् Sīra. Pari. 6. आनुपूर्व्यसंहिता the saṁhitā-pāṭha or recital of the running Vedic text in accordance with the constituent words;e.g. शुनः शेपं चित् निदितम् or नरा शंसं वा पूषणम्, as opposed to the अनानुपूर्व्यसंहिता which is actually found in the traditional recital e.g. शुनश्चिच्छेपं निदितम् Ṛk saṁh. V 2.7 or नरा वा शंसं पूषणम् Ṛk saṁh. X.64.3. See R. Prāt. II 43. आनुमानिक obtained or made out by inference such as Paribhāṣā rules as opposed to Śrauta rules such as the Sūtras of Pāṇini; cf. आनुमानिकं स्थानित्वमवयवयो; Kāś. on VI.1.85; |
also cf. आनुमानिकस्थान्यादेशभावकल्पनेपि श्रौतस्थान्यादेशभावस्य न त्यागः Par. Śek. on Pari. 11; cf. also किं च पूर्वत्रेत्यस्य प्रत्यक्षत्वेन अानुमानिक्या अस्या बाध एवोचितः Pari. Śek. on Pari. 50. अान्तरतम्य closest affinity; cf. अष्टन्- जनादिपथिमथ्यात्वेषु आन्तरतम्यादनुनासिकप्रसङ्गः M.Bh. on VII.2.84, as also अान्तर- तम्याच्च सिद्धम् M. Bh. on VII.1. 96 Vārt. 6. अान्तर्य proximity; close affinity ; close relationship. There are four kinds of such proximity as far as words in grammar are concerned; Re: the organs of speech (स्थानतः)as in दण्डा- ग्रम्, regarding the meaning(अर्थतः)as in वातण्ड्ययुवतिः, regarding the quality (गुण) as in पाकः रागः, and regarding the prosodial value (प्रमाण) as in अमुष्मै, अमूभ्याम्; cf. अनेकविधं अान्तर्यं स्थानार्थगुणप्रमाणकृतम् Par. Śek. Pari.13. cf. also Kāś. on I.1.50. अान्पद् word ending with अान् which has the consonant dropped and the preceding आ nasalized; e. g. सर्गा इव सृजतम् Ṛk.Saṁ. VIII. 35. 20, महा इन्द्रः Ṛk Saṁ VI.19.1; cf. दीर्घादटि समानपादे, अातोऽटि नित्यम् P. VIII.3.9, VIII.3.3; cf. also हन्त देवो इति चैता अान्-पदाः पदवृत्तयः R.Pr.IV.26,27. आप् (l) common term for the fem. endings टाप्, डाप् and चाप् given by Pāṇini in Adhy. IV, Pāda 1; cf. अव्ययादाप्सुपः P. II.4.82. P.IV.1.1.; P.VI.1.68; cf. also P.VI.3.63. P.VII.3.44; P.VII.3.106, 116; P.VII.4.15. etc.; (2) a brief term for case-affixes beginn- ing with the inst. sing and ending with the loc. pl. cf. अनाप्यकः P. VII.2.112. अापत्ति (1) production; resulting of something into another; change; cf दन्त्यस्य मूर्धन्यापत्तिः नतिः मूर्धन्यापत्तिः मूर्ध- न्यभावः V. Prāt. I. 42 and Uvaṭa's com. thereon; cf also यमापत्तिं |
explained as यमभावं R. Pr. VI. 9. (2) modification; cf. अापद्यते श्वासतां नादतां वा R.Pr.XIII.1.; (3) con- tingency, undesired result. आपत्य patronymic affix such as अण् and others. The term अापत्य, which is the same as the usual term अपत्य in तस्यापत्यम् P.IV.I, is found sometimes used in the Vārttikas and in the Mahābhāṣya; cf. आयत्याज्जीवद्वंश्यात्स्वार्थे द्वितीयो युवसंज्ञ: P.IV.1.163 Vārt 6. आपदेव son of अनन्तदेव, the author of Sphoṭanirūpaṇa (17th cent. A.D.). आपिशल (1) a work of अापिशलि, possi- bly his grammar; cf. आपिशलमधीते M. Bh. on IV.1.14; (2) a student of Āpiśali's grammar: आपिशलमधीते आपिशला ब्राह्मणी M. Bh. on IV.1.14: अापिशलपाणिनीयव्याडीयगौतमीयाः M. Bh. on VI. 2.36.; cf. तथा चापिशलाः पाणिनीयाः पठन्ति-आगमोनुपघातेन विकार- श्चोपमर्दनात् । आदेशस्तु प्रसङ्गेन लोपः सर्वापकर्षनात्. आपिशलि an ancient grammarian mentioned by Pāṇini and his commentators like Patañjali, Hela- rāja and others; cf. वा सुप्यापिशलेः P. IV.3.98; तथा चापिशलेर्विधिः M. Bh. on IV.2.45. आपुक् augment आप् added to the words सत्य, अर्थ and वेद before the affix णिच्; cf. M. Bh. on III.1.25 and Vārt. l and 2 thereon; e.g. सत्यापयति, अर्थापयति, वदापयति. आपुट् augment ( आप् ) suggested in the place of आपुक् by Patañjali to be prefixed to the affix णिच् cf. M Bh on III.1.25. अाप्य to be obtained by an activity: (the same as vyāpya). The term is used in connection with the object of a verb which is to be obtained by the verbal activity. The word अाप्य is found used in the sense of Karman or object in 8 |
the grammars of Jainendra, Śāka- ṭāyana, Cāndra and Hemacandra; cf. Cāndra II I. 43; Jainendra I. 2.119; Śāk.IV.3.120: Hem. III.3.31. Hence, the term साप्य is used for a transitive root in these grammars. आबन्त ending with the fem. affix अा ( टाप्, डाप् or चाप् ); cf. वाबन्तः P. II.4.30 Vārt. 3. अबाध (1) similarity of one phone- tic element, for instance, in the case of ऐ with आ resulting from Saṁdhi: e. g. प्रजाया अरातिं निर्ऋत्या अकः where प्रजाया and निर्ऋत्या stand for प्रजायै and निर्ऋत्यै cf. एकारान्तानि अाकारबाधे Āth. Pr. II.1.4; (2) Simi- larity of accent of words in the Saṁhitāpāṭha and Padapāṭha; (3) followed by cf. A. Pr. II.1.14; (4) distress; cf. आबाधे च, P. VIII.1.10. आभाच्छास्त्र a rule given in the sec- tion called आभीयप्रकरण extending from P.VI.4.22 to VI.4.175, wherein one rule or operation is looked upon as invalid to another ; cf. असिद्धवदत्राभात् P.VI.4.22 and M. Bh. thereon; cf. also यावता अनिदितां हलः इत्यपि आभाच्छास्त्रम् Vyāḍi Pari. 38. आभीक्ष्ण्य repetition of an action; cf. पौनःपुन्यं आभीक्ष्ण्यम् Kāś. on III.4.22; cf. M. Bh. III.4.24: VIII.1.4; VIII.1.12. अाभीयकार्य an operation prescribed by a rule in the section called अाभीय- प्रक्ररण. See अाभाच्छास्त्र above. आभीयप्रकरण a section of Pāṇini's grammar from VI.4.-2 to VI. 4.129, called अाभीय, as it extends to the rule भस्य VI.4.129, in- cluding it but as the governing rule भस्य is valid in every rule upto the end of the Pāda, the |
आभीयप्रकरण also extends upto the end of the Pāda.See अाभाच्छास्त्र above. आभीयासिद्धत्व invalidity or supposed invisibility of one rule with respect to another, in the section called अाभीयप्रकरण. See अाभाच्छास्त्र above. अाभ्यन्तरप्रयत्न internal effort made in producing a sound, as con- trasted with the external One called बाह्यप्रयत्न. There are four kinds of internal efforts described in the Kāsikāvrtti.; cf. चत्वार आभ्य- न्तरप्रयत्नाः सवर्णसंज्ञायामाश्रीयन्ते - स्पृष्टता, ईषत्स्पृष्टता, संवृतता, विवृतता चेति । Kās. on P. 1.1.9. See also यत्नो द्विधा । आभ्यन्तरो बाह्यश्च etc. Si. Kau. on I.1.9. अभ्यास changes prescribed in con- nection with the अभ्यास or redu- plicative syllable; cf. अभ्यासविकार अाभ्यासः M. Bh. on III.1.6. आम् (1) augment आ prescribed in connection with the words चतुर् and अनडुह् before the case-affixes called सर्वनामस्थान; cf. चतुरनडुहोराम् उदात्तः P.VII.1.98; (2) the affix आम् added before लिट् or a perfect termination by rules कास्प्रत्ययादाम् अमन्त्रे लिटि and the following (P. III 1.35-39), as for instance, in कासांचक्रे, ऊहांचक्रे, दयांचक्रे, जागरांचकार, विभयांचकार etc.; (3) geni. pl. case- affix आम् as in दृषदाम्, शरदाम्, with न् prefixed in रामाणाम् etc., and with स् prefixed in सर्र्वेषाम् etc.; (4) loc. sing. case-affix अाम् substituted for इ (ङि); cf. ङेराम् नद्याम्नीभ्यः P.VI.4.116. आमन्त्रण (1) calling out from a dis- tance;(2) an invitation which may or may not be accepted; cf. विधि- निमन्त्रणामन्त्रणाधीष्टसंप्रश्नप्रार्थनेषु लिङ् P.III. 3.161 whereon M. Bh. remarks अथ निमन्त्रणामन्त्रणयोः को विशेषः । अथ संनिहितेन |
निमन्त्रणं भवति असंनिहितेन अामन्त्रणम् । नैषोस्ति विशेषः । असंनिहितेनापि निमन्त्रणं भवति संनि- हितेनापि चामन्त्रणम् । एवं तर्हि यन्नियोगतः कर्तव्यं तन्निमन्त्रणम् । अामन्त्रणे कामचारः । M. Bh. on P.III.3.161. अामन्त्रित (1) a word in the vocative sing. cf. सामन्त्रितम् P.II.3.48: a tech. term in Pāṇini's grammar, the peculiar features of which are पराङ्गवद्भाव (cf. P.II.1.2), अविद्यमानवद्भाव (cf. P.VIII.1.72), द्वित्व (cf. P.VIII. 1.8), अद्युदात्तत्व (cf. P.VI.1.198), सर्वानुदात्तत्व(cf. P.VIII.1.19), splitt- ing of ए into अा and इ, e.g. अग्रे into अग्ना ३ इ (cf. P.VIII.2.107 Vārt. 3); (2) Vocative case, cf. ओकार अामन्त्रितजः प्रगृह्यः Ṛk. Prāt. I.28; Vāj. Pr. III.139: II.17: II.24 VI.1. अामन्त्रितकारक a word connected with the verbal activity possessed by अामन्त्रित e.g. कुण्डेन in कुण्डेनाटन्; cf. अामन्त्रिते या धातुवाच्या क्रिया तस्याः कारकम् Kaiyaṭa on P.II.1.2. अामन्त्र्य a word in the vocative case; lit. a word possessed of the sense of invocation; cf. अामन्त्र्यमाणेर्थं वर्तमानः शब्द अामन्त्र्यः Śāk. I.3.88; cf. also अमन्त्रयते यत्तदामन्त्र्यम् com. on Hem. II.1.25. अामिनच् tad. affix अामिन् in the sense of possession, applied to the word स्व; cf. स्वामिन्नैश्वर्ये P.V.2.126. आमिश्र completely mixed; cf. आमिश्र- स्यायमादेश उच्यते स नैव पूर्वग्रहणेन गृह्यते, नापि परग्रहणेन । तद्यथा । क्षीरोदकं सम्पृक्ते आमिश्रत्वा- नैव क्षीरग्रहणेन गृह्येते नाप्युदकग्रहणेन M. Bh. on VI.1.85; similarly अामिश्रत्व, आमिश्रीभूत etc. अामु tad. affix (अाम्) added to the affixes घ i.e. तर and तम which are placed after indeclinables; e.g. किंतराम्, पचतितराम् etc. cf. P.V.4.11. आम्रेडित ( 1 ) iterative: a repeated word, defined as द्विरुक्तं पदम् cf. द्विरुक्तमात्रेडितं पदम् e.g. यज्ञायज्ञा |
वो अग्नये Vāj. Prāt. I. 146; (2). the second or latter portion, of a repeated word according to Pāṇini; c. तस्य (द्विरुक्तस्य) परमाम्रेडितम् P. VIII.1.2. The Āmreḍita word gets the grave accent and has its last vowel protracted when it implies censure; cf. P.VIII.1.3 and VIII. 2.95.Haradatta has tried to explain how the term आम्रेडित means the first member; cf. ननु अाम्रेडितशब्दे । निघण्टुषु प्रसिद्धः अाम्रेडितं द्विस्त्रिरुक्तमिति । सत्यमर्थे प्रसिद्धः इह तु शब्दे परिभाष्यते । महा- संज्ञाकरणं पूर्वाचार्यानुरोधेन Padamañj. on VIII.1.2. आम्रेडितसमास an iterative com- pound: cf. आम्रेडितसमासे तु । A. Prāt. III.1.5. आय् the substitute अाय् for ऐ before a vowel; e.g. चायकः for चै+अकः cf. एचेायवायावः P.VI.1.78. आय (I) the affix आय applied to the roots गुप्, धूप् and others ending with which they are looked upon as roots; cf. P. III.1.28: P.III.1. 32. The affix is applied optionally when an ārdhadhātuka affix is to follow, e.g. गोपायिता, गोप्ता; cf. P.III. 1.31; (2) augment; cf. असतो वर्णस्य उपजनः R. Prāt. XIV. 1 Uvaṭa. अायाम tension of the limbs or organs producing sound, which is noticed in the utterance of a vowel which is accented acute ( उदात्त ) अायामो गात्राणां दैघ्र्यमाकर्षणं वा; com. on Tait. Prāt. XXII. 9; cf. ऊर्ध्वगमनं गात्राणाम् वायुनिमित्तं Uv.on R. Prāt. III.1; cf. also ऊर्ध्वगमनं शरीरस्य com. on Vāj. Prāt I.31; cf. also आयामो दारुण्यमणुता रवत्येत्युच्चैःकराणि शाब्दस्य M.Bh. on P. I.2.29. अाय्य kṛt. affix अाय्य before which णि (causal इ) is changed into अय्;cf., अय् अामन्ताल्वाय्येत्विष्णुषु P.VI.4.55. e.g. स्पृहयाय्य. |
अार substitute अार for ऋ in the words पितृ and मातृ; e.g. पितरामातरा; cf. P. VI.3.33. अारक् tad.affix (आर) applied to the word गोधा in the sense of off spring according to the Northern Grammarians;e.g. गौधारः, (op- tional forms गौधेय and गौधेर acc. to others); cf. P.IV.1.129, 130. आरकन् tad. affix applied to the words शृङ्ग and वृन्द, e.g. शृङ्गारकः, वृन्दारकः;cf P. शृङ्गवृन्दाभ्यामारकन्, P.V. 2.122 Vārt. 3. आरडे KRISHNASHASTRI a re- puted Naiyāyika of Banaras of the nineteenth century, who wrote, besides many treatises on Nyāya, a short gloss on the Sutras of Pāṇini, called Pāṇini-sūtra-vṛtti. अारि tad. affix applied to the word पूर्वतर when the whole word refers to a year, e.g.परारि in the last year; cf. B.V.3.22 Vārt. 2. आरु kṛt. affix applied to the roots शृ and वन्द् in the sense of habituated etc. e.g. शरारुः, वन्दारुः, cf P. III. 2.173. अारोप attribution or imputation of properties which leada to the secondary sense of a word; cf. अप्रसिद्धश्च संज्ञादिरपि तद्गुणारोपादेव बुध्यते Par. Sek. on Pari. 15. अारोपर्णीय same as अभिनिधान: see above अाभनिधान. अार्थ resultant from sense; made up of sense; अर्थस्य अयम् अार्थ; cf तदा- दितदन्तत्वमार्थसमाजग्रस्तम् Par. Śek. on Pari.37. आर्थसमाज combination of the mean- ings (of the base and affix); see the word अार्थ above. 'आर्धधातुक a term used in contrast to the term सार्वधातुक for such ver- bal and kṛt affixes, as are not personal endings of verbs nor |
marked with the mute letter श् cf. तिङ्शित् सार्वधातुकम् । आर्धधातुकं शेषः। P.III.4.113 and 114. The personal endings of verbs in the perfect tense and the benedic- tive mood are termed ārdhadhā- tuka, cf. P. III. 4.115, 116; while both the terms are promiscuously found utilised in the Vedic Litera- ture; cf. P. III. 4. 117. The main utility of the ārdhadhātuka term is the augment इ ( इट् ) to be prefixed to the ārdhadhātuka affixes. The term आर्धधातुका was in use in works of the old Vaiyā- karaṇas; cf. अथवा आर्धधातुकासु इति वक्ष्यामि कासु आर्धधातुकासु । उक्तिषु युक्तिषु रूढिषु प्रतीतिषु श्रुतिषु संज्ञासु M.Bh. on II. 4.35. It cannot be said how the term ārdhadhātuka originat- ed. Probably such affixes or pra- tyayas, like the kṛt affixes gene- rally, as could be placed after cer- tain roots only were called ārdha- dhātuka, as contrasted with the verbal and the present participle affixes which were termed sārva- dhātuka on account of their being found in use after every root. आर्धधातुका old term for आर्धधातुक; see आर्धधातुक. आर्धधातुकाधिकार the topic or section in Pāṇini's grammar where ope- rations, caused by the presence of an ārdhadhātuka affix ahead, are enumerated, beginning with the rule आर्धधातुके VI.4.46 and ending with न ल्यपि VI.4.69, Such opera- tions are summed up in the stanza अतो लोपो चलोपश्च णिलोपश्च प्रयोजनम् । आल्लोप इत्वमेत्वं च चिण्वद्भावश्च सीयुटि; M. Bh. as also Kāś, on VI.4.46. आर्ष derived from the holy sages; founded on sacred tradition, such as the Vedāṅgas;cf. कृत्स्नं च वेदाड्गमनि- |
न्द्यमार्षम् R. Prāt. XIV 30. The word is explained as स्वयंपाठ by the com. on Vāj Prāt. IX.2I, and as Vaidika saṁdhi on X.l3. Patañjali has looked upon the pada-pāṭha or Pada-text of the Saṁhitās of the Vedas, as anārṣa, as contrasted with the Saṁhitā text which is ārṣa; cf. आर्ष्याम् in the sense संहितायाम् R. Prāt. II.27; cf. also पदकारैर्नाम लक्षणमनुवर्त्यम् M.Bh. on III.1.109. आर्हीय tad-affixes ठक्, ठञ् etc. as also the senses in which the affixes are applied, given in the section of Pāṇinis grammar P.V.1.19-71. आल् case affix in Vedic literature e.g. वनन्ता यजेत Kāś. on VII.1.39. आलच् tad-affix (आल्) applied to the word वाच् in the sense of 'talkative' e.g. वाचालः; cf. P.V.2.124. अालु tad. affix in the sense 'तन्न xxयते' e.g. शीतालुः, उष्णालुः P.V.2.122. आलुच् kṛt. affix (आलु) applied to the roots स्पृह् गृह् पत् etc. e.g. स्पृहयालुः. गृहयालुः, निद्रालुः etc. cf. P.III.2.158. अावचन incomplete pronunciation, cf. ईषद् वचनम् M.Bh. on I.1.8. आवत् tad-affix applied to the word सम, cf. समाxद् वसति M. Bh. on V.4.30. आवश्यक necessary notion or thing; cf ओरावश्यके । आवश्यंभाव आवश्यकम् Kāś. on III.1.125, III.3.170. आविष्टालिङ्ग having a fixed gen- der as opposed to अनाविष्टलिङ्ग- possessed of all genders; cf. अविश्- लिङ्गा जातिः । यल्लिङ्गमुपादाय प्रवर्तते न तल्लिङ्गे जहाति M. Bh. on I.2.52 e.g. the word प्रमाण in प्रमाणं वेदाः. अावृत्ति repetition, e.g. पदावृत्तिः; see com. on Vāj. Prāt. IV.21; cf. also आवृत्तितः सप्तदशत्वं भवति M. Bh. I.1. Āhn. 2. आशिस् the benedictive mood, cf. किदाशिषि P.III.4.104, called regularly as आशीर्लिङ्. |
आशुबोध (1) name of a work on grammar written by Tārānātha called Tarka-vācaspatī, a reput- ed Sanskrit scholar of Bengal of the 19th century A.D. who compiled the great Sanskrit Dictionary named वाचस्पत्यकेाश and wrote commentaries on many Sanskrit Shastraic and classical works. The grammar called अाशुबोध is very useful for beginners; (2) name of an elementary grammar in aphorisms written by रामकिंकर- सरस्वती, which is based on the Mugdhabodha of Bopadeva. आश्रय (1) relation of dependence; cf. अाश्रयात्सिद्धत्वं भविष्यति M. Bh. I.1.12 Vārt. 4; (2) substratum, place of residence; cf. गुणवचनानां शब्दानामाश्रयतो लिङ्गवचनानि भवन्ति । शुद्धं वस्त्रम् । शुक्ला शाटी । शुक्लः कम्बलः । M. Bh. II.2.29. आश्वलायनप्रातिशाख्य an authoritative Prātiśākhya work attributed to Śaunaka the teacher of Āśvalāyana, belonging prominently to the Sak- ala and the Bāṣkala Śakhās of the Ṛgveda. it is widely known by the name Ṛk-Prātiśākhya. It is a metrical composition divided into . 18 chapters called Paṭalas, giving special directions for the proper pronunciation, recitation and pre- servation of the Ṛksaṁhita by lay- ing down general rules on accents and euphonic combinations and mentioning phonetic and metrical peculiarities. It has got a masterly commentary written by Uvvaṭa. आसन्न nearest, most proximate: cf. विकारी यथासन्नम् V.Pr.I.142: cf. also the sūtra आसन्नः Śāk.I.1.7, explain- ed as स्थानगुणप्रमाणादिभिर्यथास्वमासन्नः cf. also अासन्नः Hem. VII.4.120. अासत्ति close proximity of a word with another; cf. णौ इत्यस्य आसत्तिवशात् |
कृतं एव संबन्धः । Pari. Bhaskar Pari. 97. अास्तारपङ्कति a variety of पङ्कक्ति metre of 40 letters with 8 letters in the first and second quarters or pādas and 12 letters in the third and fourth quarters cf. अास्तारपङ्कक्तिरा- दितः R.Pr.XVI.40. For instances of आस्तारपङ्क्ति see Ṛgveda sūkta 2l, Mandala X. अास्थापित (l) placed after, following, which follow: cf. आस्थथितानामनन्तरो- व्रतानाम् Uvvaṭa on R. Pr. IV.1. (2) properly placed at the end e.g. सिष्यद् इति सिष्यदे. आस्य (1) place of articulation, the mouth, cf. अत्यन्त्यनेन वर्णान् इति अास्यम् M. Bh. on I.1.9; (2) found in the place of articulation; e g. the effort made for the utter- ance of words cf.आस्ये भवमास्यम् M. Bh. on I.1.9, also स्पृष्टादिप्रयत्नपञ्चक- मास्यम् Laghuvṛtti on Śāk. I.1.6. आस्वदीय a sub-division of the चुरादि (Xth conj.) roots, beginning with the root ग्रस् and ending with the root स्वद्, which take the Vikaraṇa णिच् i.e. which are conjugated like roots of the tenth conjugation, only if they are transitive in sense. अाहञ् tad-affix (आह) in the general Śaiṣika senses, e.g. belonging to, produced in, etc., added to the word उत्तर, e.g. औत्तराह cf. उत्तरादाहञ् वक्तव्यः।; M.Bh. on IV.2.104. आहि tad-affix added to the word दक्षिण in the general sense of direc- tion but when distance is specially meant; e.g. दक्षिणाहि वसति, दक्षिणाहि रमणीयम्. See Kāś. on आहि च दूरे P. V.3.37. अहिक name of Pāṇini. cf.पााणनिश्चाहिको दाक्षीपुत्रः. आहिताग्न्यादि a class of compound words headed by the word आहिताग्नि |
in which the past pass. part. is optionally placed first. e.g.आहिताग्निः अग्नयाहितः; जातपुत्रः पुत्रजातः The class आहिताम्न्यादि is stated to be आकृतिगण, cf. Kāś.on P.II.2.37. इ इ (1) the vowel इ, representing all its eighteen forms viz. short, long protracted, acute, grave, circum- flex, pure and nasalised; e.g. इ in यस्येति च P.VI.4.128;(2) Uṅādi affix ई(3)tad-affix इच्(इ)applied to Bahu- vrihi compounds in the sense of ex- change of action or as seen in words like द्विदण्डि e.g. केशाकेशि, दण्डादण्डि, द्विमुसलि etc. cf. इच् कर्मव्यतिहारे P.V.4. 127,also V.4.128; (4) kṛt. affix कि (इ) cf. उपसर्गे घोः किः P.III.3.92; (5) augment इट् (इ); see इट् (6) con- jugational affix इट् of the 1st pers. sing. Ātm. इक् (1) short wording (प्रत्याहार) for the vowels इ, उ, ऋ and लृ; cf. इको यणचि P.VI.1.77; एच इग्घ्रस्वादेशे P.I.1.48; इको गुणवृद्धी P.I.1.3 इग्यणः संप्रसारणम् P. I.1.45, इकोऽसवर्णे शाकल्यस्य ह्रस्वश्च P.VI. 1.127, इको ह्रस्वोऽङ्यो गालवस्य P.VI.3. 61; (2) kṛt. affix इक्(इ) applied to the root form to cite a root e. g. वदि, जनि etc. cf. इक्श्तिपौ धातुनिर्देशे P. III.3.108 Vārt. 2; (3) kṛt. affix इक् applied to the roots कृञ् and others in the sense of verbal activity e.g. कृषिः, किरिः, गिरिः cf. इक् कृष्यादिभ्यः P.III.3.108 Vārt.8. इक्परिभाषा the Paribhāṣa rule इको गुणवृद्धी P.I.1.3; cf. गुणश्रुत्या इक्परिभाषो- पस्थानात् इक एव स्थाने गुणे यथा स्यात् Sīra- deva. Pari.93. इक (1) substitute for the affix ठ given as ठक्, ठञ् or ञिठ् by Pāṇini; cf. ठस्येकः P.VII.3.50; (2) taddhita affix इकक्, इकन् षिकन् mentioned in . the Vārtikas on P.IV.2.60; (3) kṛt. |
affix इक applied to खन् e.g. आखानिकः cf. इको वक्तव्यः P.III.3.125 Vārt. 3. इकक् the same affix as ठक् mention- ed by the वार्तिककार in the Vārtikas on P.IV.2.60. इकन् tad. affix इक applied to com- pound words with पद as the latter member e.g. पूर्वपदिक cf. इकन्पदोत्तर- पदात् P.IV.2.60 Vārt. इकबक kṛt. affix applied to खन् e.g. अाखनिकबकः cf इकबको वक्तव्यः P. III. 3.125 Vārt. 4. इकार the letter इ with all its 18 varieties (इ +कार). इक्पदोपस्थिति the presence of the word इक् (vowels इ, उ, ऋ and लृ) in a rule, where the operations गुण and वृद्धि are prescribed by putting the words गुण and वृद्धि; e.g. सिचि वृद्धिः परस्मैपदेषु P.VII.2.1; cf. इको गुणवृद्वी P.I.1.3. इग्लक्षणवृद्धि the substitution of the vowel called वृद्वि i.e. the vowel आ, ए or औ prescribed specifically for the vowels called इक् i.e. इ, उ, ऋ and लृ, e.g. तस्मादिग्लक्षणा वृद्विः P.1.1.3. Vārt. 11; cf.also इग्लक्षणवृद्धिप्रतिषेधस्तावत् Sīradeva Pari. 2. इङ्ग the same as इङ्ग्य. See below. The word इङ्ग is used for इङ्ग्य in the Atharva Prātiśākhya cf. नीहारााददिष्वनि- ङगेयूत्तरपदे दीर्घं इघ्नेषु च A.Pr. III. 3.12. इङ्ग्य a separable word as opposed to अनिङ्ग्य; part of a compound word which is separated or may be separated from the remaining part when the word is split up into its constituent parts. Generally the word is applied to the first part of a compound word when it is split up in the recital of the padapāṭha. The 'iṅgya' word is shown by a pause or avagraha after it which is shown in writing by the sign (ऽ): cf. इङ्गयेत विभागेन चाल्यते इति इङ्गयम् । इङ्गयमिति विभागपदस्य संशा com. on Tait. |
Prāt. 1.48. सावग्रहं पदमिङ्गयम् Com.on T.Pr. I.48. इच् (l) short wording or pratyāhāra for vowels except अ. cf. इजोदश्च गुरुमतोSनृच्छः P.III.1.36; cf also VI. I.104, VI.3.68. VIII.4.31,32; (2) Samāsānta affix इ after Bahuvrīhi compounds showing a mutual ex- change of actions. e.g. केशाकेशि, दण्डादण्डि cf. इच् कर्मव्यतिहारे P.V.4. 127 also 128. इञ् (l) kṛt. affix (इ), in the sense of verbal activity applied to any root, the word so formed being used in the fem. gender and in connection with narration or in interrogation; e.g. कां त्वं कारिमकार्षीः । सर्वौ कारिमकार्षम् । cf. Pāṇini III.3.110: (2) kṛt. affix in the sense of verbal activity applied to the roots वप् and others e.g. वापिः, वासि: etc. cf. P.III.3.108 Vārt. 7;(3) tad-affix इ in the sense of offspring applied to a noun ending in अ; e.g, दाक्षि: cf. P.IV.1. 95-7, 153. इद् (l) augment इ prefixed,in general in the case of all roots barr- ing a few roots ending in vowels except ऊ and ऋ and roots शक्, पच्, etc., to such affixes of non-conjuga- tional tenses and moods as begin with any consonant except ह् and य्; cf. आर्धधातुकस्येड् वलादेः P.VII.2.35 to 78 and its exceptions P.VII.2.8 to 34; (2) personal ending of the third person sing. Ātm. ण् (l) short wording or pratyāhāra for all vowels except अ and the consonants ह् ,य् ,व् , र्, ल् cf. इणः षः P.VIII.3.39,also P.VIII.3.57,78 (2) kṛt. affix इ applied to roots such as अज् अत् etc. in the sense of verbal activity.e.g आजिः,अतिः, आदि; cf.इणजादिभ्यः P. III.3,108, Vārt.6. इत् (1) a letter or a group of letters attached to a word which is not |
seen in actual use in the spoken language: cf अप्रयोगी इत्, Śāk. I.1.5, Hem.1.1.37. The इत् letters are applied to a word before it, or after it, and they have got each of them a purpose in grammar viz. causing or preventing certain grammatical operations in the formation of the complete word. Pāṇini has not given any defini- tion of the word इत् , but he has mentioned when and where the vowels and consonants attached to words are to be understood as इत्; (cf. उपदेशेजनुनासिक इत् , हलन्त्यम् । etc. P. I.3.2 to 8) and stated that these letters are to be dropped in actual use, cf.P.I.3.9. It appears that grammarians before Pāṇini had also employed such इत् letters, as is clear from some passages in the Mahābhāṣya as also from their use in other systems of grammar as also in the Uṇādi list of affixes, for purposes similar to those found served in Pāṇini 's grammar. Almost all vowels and consonants are used as इत् for different purposes and the इत् letters are applied to roots in the Dhā- tupāṭha, nouns in the Gaṇapāṭha, as also to affixes, augments and substitutes prescribed in grammar. Only at a few places they are attached to give facility of pronun- ciation. Sometimes the इत् letters, especially vowels, which are said to be इत्, when uttered as nasalized by Pāṇini, are recognised only by convention; cf. प्रतिज्ञानुनासिक्याः पाणि- नीयाः(S.K.on P.I.3.2).The word इत्, which literally means going away or disappearing, can be explained as a mute indicatory letter. In Pāṇini's grammar, the mute vowel अ applied to roots indicates the placing of the Ātmanepada affixes |
after them, if it be uttered as anu- dātta and of affixes of both the padas if uttered svarita; cf. P.I.3. 12, 72. The mute vowel आ signi- fies the prevention of इडागम before the past part, affixes; cf. P. VII. 2. 16. Similarly, the mute vowel इ signfies the augment न् after the last vowel of the root; cf.P.VII.1.58; ई signifies the prevention of the aug- ment इ before the past part.affixes cfP.VII.2.14;उ signifies the inclu- sion of cognate letters; cf.P.I.1.69, and the optional addition of the augment इ before त्वा; cf. P.VII.2. 56; ऊ signifies the optional appli- cation of the augment इट्;cf.P.VII. 2.44; क signifies the prevention of ह्रस्व to the vowel of a root before the causal affix, cf.VII.4.2: लृ sig- nifies the vikarana अङ् in the Aorist cf P.III.1.55; ए signifies the pre- vention of vrddhi in the Aorist,cf. P.VII.2.55; ओ signifies the substi- tution of न् for त् of the past part. cf. P VIII.2.45; क् signifies the Prevention of गुण and वृद्धि, cf.P, I. 1.5; ख् signifies the addition of the augment मुम्(म्)and the shortening of the preceding vowel: cf.P.VI.3 65-66: ग् signifies the prevention of गुण and वृद्धि, cf. P.I.1.5 घ् signifies कुत्व, cf. P.VII.3.62; ङ्, applied to affixes, signifies the prevention of गुण and वृद्धि, cf. P.I.1.5; it causes संप्रसारणादेश in the case of certain roots, cf. P. VI.1.16 and signifies आत्मनेपद if applied to roots; cf. P.I. 3.12, and their substitution for the last letter if applied to substitutes. cf. P I.1.53. च् signifies the acute accent of the last vowel;cf.P.VI.1. 159; ञ् signifies उभयपद i.e the plac- ing of the affixes of both the podas after the root to which it has been affixed;cf.P.I.3.72, ट् in the case of an augment signifies its application |
to the word at the beginning: cf.P I.1.64, while applied to a nominal base or an affix shows the addition of the fem. affix ई (ङीप्) cf.P.IV.1. 15;ड् signifies the elision of the last syllable; cf. P.VI.4.142: ण् signifies वृद्धि, cf.P.VII.2.115;त् signifies स्वरित accent, cf. VI.1.181, as also that variety of the vowel ( ह्रस्व, दीर्ध or प्लुत) to which it has been applied cf. P.I.1.70; न् signifies आद्युदात्त, cf. P.VI.1.193:प् signifies अनुदात्त accent cf. अनुदात्तौ सुप्पितौ P. III.1.4. as also उदात्त for the vowel before the affix marked with प् cf. P.VI.1.192: म् signifies in the case of an aug- ment its addition after the final vowel.cf.P.I.1.47,while in the case of a root, the shortening of its vowel before the causal affix णि,cf. P.VI.4.92: र् signifies the acute accent for the penultimate vowel cf. P.VI.1.217，ल् signifies the acute accent for the vowel preceding the affix marked with ल्; cf.P.VI. 193; श् implies in the case of an affix its सार्वधातुकत्व cf. P. II1.4.113, while in the case of substitutes, their substitution for the whole स्थानिन् cf P.I.1.55; प् signifies the addition of the fem. affix ई ( ङीप् ) cf.P.IV-1.41 ;स् in the case of affixes signifies पदसंज्ञा to the base before them, cf P.I.4.16. Sometimes even without the actual addition of the mute letter, affixes are directed to be looked upon as possessed of that mute letter for the sake of a gram- matical operation e.g. सार्वधातुकमपित् P.I.2.4; असंयेागाल्लिट कित् P.I.2.5: गोतो णित् P.VII.1.90 etc. (2) thc short vowel इ as a substitute: cf. शास इदङ्हलोः P.VI.4.34. इतच् tad., affix इत in the sense of 'found or produced in', which is afixed to words तारका,पुष्प, मुकुल and |
others; e.g. तारकित, मुकुलित, सुखित, दुःखित etc.; cf. तदस्य संजातं तारकादिभ्य इतच् P.V.2.36. इतरेतर possessed of interdepende- nce; depending upon each other; cf. इतरेतरं कार्यमसद्वत् Candra Pari. 5 }. Grammatical operations are of no avail if the rules stating them are mutually depending on each other. The word इतरेतर has the sense of इतरेतराश्रय here. इतरेतरयोग mutual relationship with each other. Out of the four senses of the indeclinable च viz. समुच्चय, अन्वाचय, इतरेतरयोग and समाहार, the Dvandva compound is formed of words connected in the last two ways and not in the first two ways. The instances of द्वन्द्व in the sense of इतरेतरयोग are धवख- दिरपलाशाः, प्लक्षन्यग्रोधौ etc; cf. Kāś.on P. II.2.29 cf. also प्लक्षश्च न्यग्रोधश्चेत्युक्ते गम्यत एतत्प्लक्षोपि न्यग्रोधसहायो न्यग्रोधोपि प्लक्षसहाय इति M.Bh. on II.2.29; cf. also इतरेतरयोगः स यदा उद्रिक्तावयवभेदो भवति Sīradeva Pari. 16. इतरेतराश्रय depending upon each other; cf. इतरेतराश्रयाणि च कार्याणि न प्रकल्पन्ते । तद्यथा । नौर्नावि बद्धा नेतरे- तरत्राणाय भवति । M. Bh. on I.1.1. See इतरेतर above. इत्कार्य a grammatical operation caus- ed by इत् i. e. by a mute letter which is purely indicatory; cf. एवं तर्हि इत्कार्याभावादत्र इत्संज्ञा न भविष्यति M. Bh. I.3.2. See इत् above. इत्व the substitution of short इ by स्याघ्वोरिच्च P.I.2.17, शास इदङ्हलोः P. VI.4.3, etc. इत्थंभूतलक्षण characterization; indi- cation by a mark: e. g. जटाभि- स्तापसः cf. इत्थंभूतलक्षणे च ( तृतीया ) P. II.3.21. इत्नु kṛt affix mentioned by Pāṇini in VI.4.55 as causing the substitution 9 |
of अय् for णि before it; e. g गदयित्नुः, स्तनयित्नुः M.Bh. on VI.4.55. इत्र kṛt affix, added to the roots ऋ, लू, धू etc. in the sense of instru- ment cf. अर्तिलूधूसूखनसहचर इत्रः P.III. 2.184-6. e. g. अरित्रम् , लवित्रम् खनित्रम् etc. The words ending in इत्र have got the acute accent on the last syllable; cf. P.VI.2.144. इत्संज्ञक a letter which is termed इत्; See इत् above. इथुक् augment इथ् , e. g. यावतिथः, ताव- तिथः cf. वतोरिथुक् P. V.2.53. इदित् possessed of the mute indicatory letter इ; e. g the roots नदि, विदि and the like, in whose case the augment नुम् ( न् ) is affixed to the last vowel; cf इदितो नुम् धातोः P. VII.1.58. इन् ( 1 ) kṛt affix इ applied to the roots कृ, हृ, ग्रह, and भृ when they are preceded by certain words like स्तम्ब etc. in certain senses; e. g. स्तम्बकरिः, फलेग्रहिः, अात्मंभरिः; cf. P.III. 2.24-7;(2) kṛt affix इन् (णिनि) pres- cribed by P.III.3.170 e. g. अवश्यं- कारी, शतंदायी इन ( l ) substitute for the inst. case ending in अा (टा) after bases ending in अ ; cf. टाङसिङसामिनात्स्याः P.VII.1. 12; (2) tad.aff इन affixed to पूर्व e. g. पथिभिः पूर्विणैः cf. P. IV. 4. 133. इनङ् substitute इन् for the last vowel of the words कल्याणी, सुभगा, दुर्भगा and others before the affix ढ i. e. एय prescribed after these words in the sense of offspring e. g. काल्यााणिनेयः, सौभागिनेयः, कौलटिनेयः etc. cf.कल्याण्यादीना- मिनङ् P. IV.I.126, 127. इनच् tad. affix इन in the sense of poss- ession applied to the word नि which is changed into चिक, e.g. चिकिनः cf. इनच् पिटच् चिकचि च P.V.2.33. इनि ( 1 ) kṛt affix इन् applied to the roots क्री with धि, जु with प्र, and the |
roots जि, दृ, क्षि and others, e. g. सोमविक्रयी, प्रजवी, जयी etc. cf. P.III 2.93 and III.2.156-157: (2) tad. affix इन् affixed to the word पाण्डुकम्बल in the sense of 'covered with' ( cf. P, IV.2.11), in the sense of collec- tion to the word खल e.g. खलिनी cf. P.IV.2.51, to the word अनुब्राह्मण in sense 'student of' e.g. अनुब्राह्मणी cf. P.IV.2.62, to the words कर्मन्द and कृशाश्च cf. P.IV.3.lll, to the word चूर्ण cf. P.IV.4.23 and to the word श्राद्ध cf. P.V.2.85 and साक्षात् cf. P. V. 2. 91 in specified senses and in the general sense of posse- ssion to words ending in अ, cf P. V.2.115-117 and to certain other words cf. P.V.2.128-37. इनुण् kṛt affix इन्. by P. III.3.44 followed invariably by the tad. affix अण् by P.V.4,15, e.g, सांरा- विणम् , सांकूटिनम्. इन्दिरापति author of 'परीक्षा' a com- mentary on the Paribhāṣendu- Śekhara of Nāgeśabhaṭṭa. इन्दुमित्र author of अनुन्यास, a com- mentary on Nyāsa, the well-known commentary on the Kāśikavṛtti by Jinendrabuddhi. Many quotations from the Anunyāsa are found in the Paribhāṣāvṛtti of Sīradeva. The word इन्दु is often used for इन्दुमित्र; cf. एतस्मिन् वाक्ये इन्दुमैत्रेययोः शाश्वतिको विरोध: Sīra. Pari. 36. इन्दुप्रकाश author of a commentary on the Paribhāṣenduśekhara. इन्द्र name of a great grammarian who is believed to have written an ex- haustive treatise on grammar before Pāṇini; cf. the famous verse of Bopadeva at the commence- ment of his Dhātupāṭha इन्द्रश्चन्द्र: काशकृत्स्नापिशली शाकटायनः । पाणिन्यमरजैनेन्द्रा जयन्त्यष्टादिशाब्दिका: ॥ No work of Indra is available at present. He is nowhere quoted by |
Pāṇini. Many quotations believ- ed to have been taken from his work are found scattered in gram- mar works, from which it appears that there was an ancient system prevalent in the eastern part of India at the time of Pāṇini which could be named ऐन्द्रव्याकरणपद्धति, to which Pāṇini possibly refers by the word प्राचाम्. From references,it appears that the grammar was of the type of प्रक्रिया, discussing vari- ous topics of grammar such as alphabet, coalescence, declension, context, compounds, derivatives from nouns and roots, conjuga- tion, and changes in the base. The treatment was later on follow- ed by Śākaṭāyana and writers of the Kātantra school.For details see Mahābhāṣya ed. by D. E. Society, Poona, Vol. VII pages 124-127. इन्द्रदत्त author of the ' Gūḍhaphakki- kāprakāśa', a gloss on the difficult passages in the Mahābhāṣya. इप् a technical term for द्वितीया (accu- sative case ) in the Jainendra grammar; cf. कर्मणीप् Jain. 1.4.2. ईप् a technical term in the Jainen- dra Vyākaraṇa for सप्तमी (the loca- tive case). इफ tad. affix applied to र ( letter र् ) in the sense of the consonant र्; e. g. रेफः; cf. रादिफः P.III.3.108 Vārt. 4. इम् augment इ added to the base तृणह, after the last vowel, e. g. तृणोढि; cf. तृणह इम् P.VII.3.92. इमन् or इमनिच् tad. affix इमन् applied to the words पृथु, मृदु, महत्, लघु, गुरु, words showing colour and words such as दृढ, परिवृढ, भृश, शीत, उष्ण etc. in the sense of 'quality' or 'attri- bute': cf Pāṇ. V. 1.122, 123. For changes in the base before the affix इमन् see P. VI.4.154-163. |
इमप् kṛt. affix इम applied to words showing भाव or verbal activity; e.g. पाकिमम्, त्यागिमम्;cf. भावप्रत्ययान्तादि- मब्वक्तव्यः Kāś. on P.IV.4.20. इय tad affix ( घन् ) in the sense of 'pity'; e. g. देवियः, यज्ञियः; cf. P.IV. 2.79. इयङ् substitute for the last इ before a vowel generally in the case of monosyllabic roots end- ing in इ and the word स्त्री; e.g. चिक्षियुः, नियौ नियः, स्त्रियौ स्त्रियः; cf. अचि क्षुधातुभ्रुवां य्वोरियङुवङौ P.VI. 4.77-80. इया case-ending for inst. sing. in Vedic Literature; e. g. उर्विया, दार्विया; cf. P.VII.1.39. and Vārt.1 there on. इर् mute indicatory ending of roots, signifying the application of the aorist sign अ(अङ्) optionally;e g. अभिदत् or अभैत्सीत् from the root भिद् (भिदिर् in Dhātupāṭha); cf. also अच्छिदत्,अच्छैत्सीत् from छिद्(छिदिर्); cf. P.III.1.57. इरच् tad. affix ( इर ) in the sense of possession applied in Vedic Lite- rature to रथ e.g. रथिरः; cf. P.V. 2.109 Vārt.3. इरन tad. affix ( इर ) in the sense of possession applied in Vedic Lite- rature; to मेघा e.g. cf. P. मेधिरः V.2.109 Vārt. 3. इरित् a root ending with mute indi- catary ending इर्. See इर्. इरे ( इरेच् ) substitute for the perfect 3rd pers. pl. Ātm. affix झ; e.g. चक्रिरे, ऊचिरे etc.; cf. P.III.4.81. इल tad. affix applied to the words काश, अश्वत्थ, पलाश and others in the four senses prescribed in P.IV. 2.67-70; e.g. काशिलः, अश्वत्थिल:, पलाशिलः cf.P.IV.2.80. इलच् (I) tad. affix इल (इलच्) in the sense of pity; e. g. देवियः, यज्ञिलः cf. |
P.IV.2.79. The tad.affix घन् is also affixed in the same sense. See ईय. (2) tad. affix इल (इलच्) in the sense of possession, prescribed after the words फेन, लोमन् कपि, सिकता, शर्करा, तुन्द, उदर, घट, यव etc.; e.g. फेनिल, लोमिल, कपिल, सिकतिल तुन्दिल etc. cf. P.V.2.99, 100, 105, 117. इश् substitute for इदम् before an affix called 'vibhakti': e. g. इह; cf: P.V.3.3. इष्ट a word frequently used in the Vārttikas and the Mahābh- āṣya and other treatises in the senses of (1) a desired object, (2) a desired purpose, (3) a desired statement, (4) a desired form i.e. the correct form : cf. इष्टान्वाख्यानं खल्वपि भवति: M. Bh.I.1. Āhn. 1. योगविभागादिष्टसिद्धिः Pari.Śek. Pari. 114. इष्टतन्त्रव्याकरण a short treatise on grammar ascribed to Jayadeva. इष्टादि a class of words headed by the word इष्ट to which the taddhita affix इन् ( इनि ) is added in the sense of अनेन i. e. 'by him' i. e. by the agent of the activity de- noted by the past pass. participles इष्ट and others; cf. इष्टी, यज्ञे, पूर्ती श्राद्धे etc. Kāś, on P.V.2.88. इष्टि a word generally used in the statements made in the Mahā bhāṣya, similar to those of the Sūtrakāra and the Vārttikakāras, which are 'desired ones' with a view to arrive at the correct forms of words; cf. प्राप्तिज्ञो देवानां- प्रियो न त्विाष्टिज्ञः, इष्यत एतद् रूपमिति M. Bh. on II. 4.56. इष्ठ the superlative tad. affix इष्ठन् in the sense of अतिशायन or अतिशय ( excellence ). The commentators, however, say that the taddhita affixes तम and इष्ठ,like all the tadd- hita affixes showing case-relations, |
are applied without any specific sense of themselves, the affixes showing the sense of the base itself ( स्वार्थे ); e. g गुरुतमः, गरिष्ठः; पटुतमः, पठिष्ठः; पचतितमाम्, कर्तृतमः, करिष्ठः etc.; cf. P.V.3.55-64 The affixes ईयस् and इष्ठ are applied only to such subst- antives which denote quality; cf. P.V.3.58. इष्ठन् the same as इष्ठ. See इष्ठ. इष्ठवद्भाव possession of the same pro- perties for causing grammatical operations as the tad. affix इष्ठन् possesses, as for instance, the elision of the syllable beginning with the last vowel ( टिलोप ), substitution of the masc. base for the fem. base (पुंवद्भाव) etc., before the denom affix णिच्; e.g. एतयति in the sense of एनीं आचष्टे; similarly प्रथयति, पटयति, दवयति, cf. M.Bh. on. P.VI.4. 155 Vārt, 1. इष्णु kṛt affix इष्णुच् applied,in the sense of 'possessed of habitual behavi- our action, or splendid accomp- lishment,' to the roots अलंकृ, निराकृ, प्रजन् , उत्पत् etc. e.g अलंकरिष्णुः,उत्पतिष्णुः, सहिष्णुः,चरिष्णुः etc.;cf.P.III.2.136-138. इष्यै kṛt affix in Vedic Literature in the sense of the infinitive, e. g. रेहिष्यै, अव्यथिष्यै; cf P.III.4.10. इस् ( l ) substitute इस् for the vowel of the roots, मी, मा, दा, धा, रभ्, पत् etc. before the desiderative affix सन्; e.g. मित्सति, दित्सति, अारिप्सते etc. cf.P. VII.4.54; (2) uṅādi affix इस् e.g. सर्पिस्. इस्नुच् alternative affix mentioned in the Mahābhāṣya in the place of इष्णुच्; cf M. Bh.on III. 2.57. See इष्णुच् . ई ई the long vowel ई which is techni- cally included in the vowel |
इ in Pāṇini's alphabet being the long tone of that vowel; (2) substitute ई for the vowel अा of the roots घ्रा and ध्मा before the frequentative sign यङ् as for ex- ample in जेघ्रीयते, देध्मीयते, cf. P.VII. 4.31; (3) substitute ई for the vowel अ before the affixes च्वि and क्यच् as, for instance, in शुक्लीभवति, पुत्रीयति etc.; cf.P.VII.4.32, 33; (4) substitute ई for the vowel अा at the end of reduplicated bases as also for the vowel आ of bases ending in the conjugational sign ना, e.g. मिमीध्वे, लुनीतः etc.; cf P.VI. 4.113; (5) substitute ई for the loc. case affix इ ( ङि ) in Vedic Literature, e.g. सरसी for सरसि in दृतिं न शुश्कं सरसी शयानम्,: cf. Kāś. on P. VII.1.39: (6) tad. affix ई in the sense of possession in Vedic Litera- ture as for instance in रथीः,सुमङ्गलीः, cf. Kāś on. P.V.2.109: (7) the fem. affix ई ( ङीप् , ङीञ् or ङीन् ); cf. P.IV.1.58, 15-39, IV.1.40-65, IV.1.13. ईक tad. affix ईकक added to शक्ति and यष्टि e.g. शाक्तकिः fem. शाक्तीकी; याष्टीकः; cf. P.IV.4.59; (2) tad. affix ईक added to कर्क and लोहित in the sense of comparison, e. g. कार्कीकः, लौहितीकः ( स्फटिकः ), cf. Kāś. on P.V. 3.110; (3) tad. affix ईकक् added to बहिस्, e.g. बाहीकः cf. बहिषष्टिलोपो यश्च, ईकक्च P.IV.1.85. Vārt. 4-5; (4) tad affix इकङ् in Vedic Literature added to बहिस् e.g. बाहीकः cf. Kāś.on P. IV. 1.85,Vārt.6; (5) tad. affix ईकन् added to खारी e.g. द्विखारिकम्; cf. P. V. 1.33. ईट् augment ई prefixed to a Sārvad- hātuka (strong) affix beginning with a consonant after the roots ब्रू, रु, स्तु, and others e.g. अब्रवीत्, रोरवीति, स्तवीति, अकार्षीत्, अवादीत् etc.; cf. P. VII. 3.93-98. |
ईत् long vowel ई as different from इ or ई३ prescribed as a substitute; cf. P.VI.3.27, VI.3.97. ईदित् (a root) possessed of long ई as a mute indicatory ending meant for prohibiting the addition of the augment इ to the past part. ter- minations त and तवत् ; e.g. लग्नः, दीप्तः etc.; cf. P VII.2.14. ईप्सित a desired object, which, in con- nection with transitive roots, gets the designation कर्म,when the agent has a keen desire for it; cf. कर्तुरी- प्सिततमं कर्म P.I.4.49. ईमसच् tad. affix ईमस added to the word मल in sense of possession: e. g. मलीमसः, cf. P. V. 2.114. ईय substitute for the tad.afix छ; e.g: शालीयः, मालीयः etc; cf P. VII. 1.2 and IV. 2. 114. ईयङ्' afix ईय added to the root ऋत्, ङ् showing the application of the Ātmanepada affixes; e. g. ऋतीयते cf. P. III.1.29 ईयस् tad-affix ईयसुन् , showing superi- ority or excellence of one indivi- dual over another in respect of a quality, added to a substantive ex- presive of quality; when the subst- antive ends in the affix तृ, that affix तृ is removed: e.g. पटीयान्, लघीयान्, गरीयान्, दोहीयसी (धेनुः) cf.P.V.3.57-64. ईयसुन् the same as ईयस् which see above. ईरच् tad-affix added to the word अण्ड in the sense of possession: e.g. अण्रडीरः;cf. काण्डाण्डादीरन्नीरचौ P.V.2.111. ईश् substitute ई for इदम् before the tad-affixes दृक्, दृश् and वतु; e.g. ईदृक् ईदृशः also ईदृक्षः; cf. P.VI.3.90. ईश्वरकान्त author of 'Dhātumāla', a short metrical treatise on roots. ईश्वरानन्द author of (l) a gloss on Kaiyaṭa's Mahābhāṣya-pradīpa, |
and (2)an independent treatise Śāb- dabodhataraṅgiṇī. He is believed to have been a pupil of सत्यानन्द and iived in the latter part of the 16th century A.D. ईषच्छ्वास an external effort ( बाह्य-प्रयत्न) in the production of sound charac- torized by the emission of breath, when the cavity made by the cords of the throat is kept wide apart, as found in the utterance of the consonants श्, ष् and स. ईषत्स्पृष्ट an external effort ( बाह्यप्रयत्न) in the production of sound charac- torized by only a slight contact of the cords of the throat, made in the utteranee ofsemi-vowels cf. ईषत्स्पृष्ट- मन्तःस्थानाम् S.K. on P.I.1.9. ईषदसमाप्ति stage of the quality of a thing or of an undertaking which is almost complete,to show which,the tad-affixes कल्प, देश्य and देशीय are applied to a word:e.g. पटुकल्पः,पटुदेश्यः; पटुदेशीयः, पचतिकल्पम्, जल्पतिकल्पम्, cf. P, V.3.67. ईषन्नाद an external effort characteri- zed by slight resonance or sound- ing of throat cords when they slightly touch one another. ईहा effort made for the production of sound; cf. अापद्यते श्वासतां नादतां वा वक्त्रीहायां उभयं वान्तरौभौ । ईहायाम् चेष्टायाम R.Pr.XIII.1. उ उ (l) labial vowel standing for the long ऊ and protracted ऊ3 in Pāṇini's grammar unless the consonant त् is affixed to it, उत् standing for the short उ only: (2) Vikaraṇa affix उ of the 8th conjugation ( तनादिगण ) and the roots धिन्व् and कृण्व्;cf.P.III. 1.79-80; (3) substitute (उ) for the vowel अ of कृ,e.g. कुरुतः, कृर्वन्ति before weak Sārvadhātuka affixes, cf.P.VI |
4.110; (4) kṛt. affix उ added to bases ending in सन् and the roots आशंस्, भिक्ष्, विद्, इष् as also to bases ending in क्यच् in the Vedic Litera- ture,e.g. चिकीर्षुः भिक्षुः, बिन्दुः,इच्छुः,सुम्नयु; cf. P. III. 2.168-170; (5) Uṅādi affix उ ( उण् ) e.g, कारुः, वायुः, साधुः, etc.; cf. Uṅādi I.1; (6) mute vowel उ added to the first letters of a class of consonants in Pāṇini's grammar to show the whole class of the five letters; e.g. कु, चु, टु, तु, पु which stand for the Guttural, the palatal the lingual, the dental and the labial classes respectively; cf. also ष्टुना ष्टुः P.VIII.4.41(7) उ added to न् showing the consonant न् as nasalized n; cf, नुः V.Pr. III.133. उक् short term (प्रत्याहार) for the vowels उ, ऋ and लृ; e.g. उगिदचां सर्वनामस्थानेऽ धातोः P.VII.1.80, also शल्युक्; किति P VII.2.11, इसुसुक्तान्तान् क्तः P.VII.3, 51. उक (1) the kṛt. affix उकञ् applied to the roots लब्, पत्, पद् and others,e.g. लाषुकः, कामुकः etc. with udātta accent on the first syllable; cf.P.III.2.154; (2) tad.affix उक ( उकञ् ) added to the word कर्मन् e.g. कार्मुकं धनुः; cf. Kāś, on P.V.I.103. उकञ् the same as उक. See उक. उक्त prescribed, taught, lit, said (al- ready). उक्तं वा is a familiar expres- sion in the Mahābhāṣya and the Vārttikas referring usually to something already expressed.Some- times this expression in the Ma- hābhāṣya, referring to something which is not already expressed, but which could be found sub- sequently expressed, leads to the conclusion that the Mahābhā- ṣyakāra had something like a 'Laghubhāṣya' before him at the time of teaching the Mahābhāṣya. See Kielhorn's Kātyāyana and |
Patañjali, also Mahābhāṣya D.E. S.Ed. Vol. VII, pages 71, 72. उक्तपुंस्क a word with its meaning (in the neuter gender) unchanged when used in the masculine gender; generally an adjectival word; cf, Cāndra Vyāk. I.4.30. उक्तार्थ a word or expression whose sense has been already expressed. The expression उक्तार्थानामप्रयोगः is frequently used in the Mahā- bhāṣya and the Vārttikas and cited as a Paribhāṣā or a salutary con- ventional maxim against repetition of words in the Paribhāṣāpāṭhas of Vyādi (Par. 51), Candragomin (Par 28) and Kātantra (Par. 46) and Kālāpa (Par. 46) grammars. उक्ताप्रयोग see उक्तार्थ. उक्तिपद, उक्तिपदानि a short anonymous treatise on case-relations, com- pounds etc. written mostly in Gujarati. उक्तिरत्नाकर' a short grammar work, written by साधुसुन्दर, explaining declension, cases and their mean- ings, compounds, etc. and giving a list of Prākṛta words with their Sanskrit equivalents. उक्थादि a class of words headed by the word उक्थ to which the taddhita affix इक (ठक् ) is applied in the sense of 'one who studies and understands'; cf. उक्थमधीते वेद वा औक्थिकः, similarly लौकायतिकः Kāś. on P.IV.2.60. उख्य a writer on Vedic phonetics and euphony quoted in the Tait- tirīya Prātiśākhya; cf. उख्यस्य सपूर्वः Tai. Pra. VIII. 22. उगित characterized by the mute indicatory letter उ, ऋ or लृ; see उक्. उग्रभूति or उग्राचार्य writer of a gloss on the Nirukta, called Niruktabhāṣya |
believed to have lived in the 18th century A. D; writer also of a grammatical work Śiṣyahitāvṛtti or Śiṣyahitānyāsa, which was sent to kāshmir and made popular with a large sum of money spent upon it, by his pupil Ānanadpāla. उङ् a technical term for उपधा, the penultimate letter in the Jai- nendra Vyākaraṇa; cf. इदुदुङः Jain. V. 4.28. उच्च the higher tone also called उदात्त or acute; cf. नीचमुच्चात् R. T. 55, also एते स्वराः प्रकम्पन्ते यत्रोच्चस्वरितोदयाः R. Pr. III.19; cf. also the terms उच्चश्रुति R. T. 61, एकोच्च R.T. 62, अाद्युच्च, अन्तेाच्चक. etc. उच्चैः उच्च or acute; see उच्च above; cf. उच्चैस्तरां वा वषट्कारः P. 1.2.35. उच्चरित pronounced or uttered; the phrase उच्चरितप्रध्वंसिनः is used in connection with the mute indica- tory letters termed इत् in Pāṇini's grammar, as these letters are not actually found in use in the lan- guage and are therefore supposed to vanish immediately after their pur- pose has been served. The phrase 'उच्चरितप्रध्वंसिनोSनुबन्धा:' has been given as a Paribhāṣā by Vyāḍi (Pari.11), in the Cāndra Vyāka- raṇa ( Par. 14), in the Kātantra Vyākaraṇa (Pari.54) and also in the Kalāpa Vyākaraṇa ( Par. 71). Patañjali has used the ex- pression उच्चरितप्रध्वंसिनः in connec- tion with ordinary letters of a word, which have existence for a moment and which also vanish immediately after they have been uttered; cf. उच्चरितप्रध्वंसिनः खल्वपि वर्णा: ...न वर्णो वर्णस्य सहायः M. Bh. on I.4. 109. उच्चरितप्रध्वंसिन् vanishing immediate- ly after utterance. See उच्चरित. |
उच्चारण pronunciation, enunciation (in the Śāstra). The phrase उच्चारण- सामर्थ्यात् is often found used in the Mahābhāṣya and else- where in connection with the words of Pāṇini, everyone of which is believed to , have a purpose or use in the Śāstra, which pur- pose, if not clearly manifest, is assigned to it on the strength (सामर्थ्य) of its utterance; cf. उच्चारणसामर्थ्यादत्र ( हिन्येाः ) उत्वं न भविष्यति M.Bh. on III.4.89 V.2; cf. also M.Bh. on IV.4.59, VI.4.163, VII.1.12,50, VII.2.84, In a few cases, a letter is found used by Pāṇini which cannot be assigned any purpose but which has been put there for faci- lity of the use of other letters. Such letters are said to be उच्चारणार्थ; cf. जग्धि: । इकार उच्चारणार्थ:। नानुबन्धः । Kāś. on II.4.36.च्लि लुडि. । इकार उच्चार- णार्थ:; चकारः स्वरार्थः । Kāś, on III.1. 43. The expressions मुखसुखार्थः and श्रवणार्थः in the Mahābhāṣya mean the same as उच्चारणार्थः. उच्चावच diverse; cf. उच्चावचेष्वर्थेषु भवन्ति निपाताः Nir. I.3.4. उच्चैस्तरां specially accented; उदात्ततरः cf. उच्चैस्तरां वा वषट्कारः P. I.2.35. उज्ज्वलदत्त the famous commentator on the Uṅādi sūtras. His work .is called Uṅādisūtravṛtti, which is a scholarly commentary on the Uṅādisūtrapāṭha, consisting of five Pādas. Ujjvaldatta is belived to have lived in the l5th century A.D. He quotes Vṛttinyāsa, Anu- nyāsa, Bhāgavṛtti etc. He is also known by the name Jājali. उञ् ( l ) short term ( प्रत्याहार ) for vowels excepting अ and इ, semi- vowels, nasal consonants and the consonants ह् झ् and भ्.; cf भय उञो वो वा P. VIII.3.33; (2) the par- |
ticle उ; cf. उञि च पदे P.VIII.3.21, also उञः P.1.I.17. उञ्छादि a class of words headed by the word उञ्छ which have their final vowel accented acute (उदात्त) ; cf. उञ्छः म्लेच्छा, जल्पः । एते घञन्ता इति ञित्स्वरः प्राप्तः । Kāś. on P. VI.1.160. उट् augment उ affixed to the roots वृ and तॄ before the kṛt affix तृ; cf. तृरुतृतरूतृवरुतृ वरूतृवस्त्रीरिति तरतेर्वृङ्वृञोश्च तृचि उट् ऊट् इत्येतावाग निपात्येते Kāś. on P. VII.2.34. उण् the affix उण्, causing वृद्धि on ac- count of the mute letter ण , pre- scribed after the roots कृ, वा, पा, जि, मि, स्वद्, साध् and अशू by the rule कृवापाजिमित्वदिसाध्यशूभ्य उण् which is the first rule (or Sūtra) of a series of rules prescribing various affixes which are called Uṇādi affixes, the affix उण् being the first of them. e.g. कारुः, वायु , स्वादु, साधु etc.; cf. Uṇādi I,1. उणादि affixes headed by the affix उण्, which are similar to kṛt affixes of Pāṇini, giving derivation mostly of such words as are not derived by rules of Pāṇini. No particular sense such as agent, object etc. is mentioned in connection with these affixes, but, as Pāṇini has stated in 'ताभ्यामन्यत्रोणादयः P.III. 4.75, the various Uṇādi affixes are applied to the various roots as prescribed in any Kāraka sense, except the संप्रदान and the अपादान; in other words, any one of the senses, agent, object, instrument and abode, is assigned to the Uṇādi affix as suits the meaning of the word. Although some scholars believe that the Uṇādi affixes are given by a grammarian later than Pāṇini as there are words like ताम्बूल, दीनार and others included in the list of Uṇādi |
words and that there are many interpolated Sūtras, still the Uṇādi collection must be looked upon as an old one which is definitely mentioned by Pāṇini in two different rules; cf. Pāṇini उणादयो बहुलम् P. III.3.1 and ताभ्यामन्यत्रो- णादयः III.4.76. Patañjali has given a very interesting discus- sion about these Uṇādi affixes and stated on the strength of the Vārttika, तत्रोणादिप्रतिषेधः, that these affixes and the words given in the Uṇādi collection should not be considered as genuinely de- rived.The derivation is not a very systematic and logically correct one and therefore for practical pur- poses, the words derived by the application of the affixes उण् and others should be looked upon as underived; cf. उणादयोSव्युत्पन्नानि प्रातिपदिकानि. M. Bh. on. P.I.1.16, III.4.77, IV.1.1, VI.1.62, VII.1.2, VII.2.8 etc. There is a counterstatement also seen in the Mahābhāṣya उणादयो व्युत्पन्नानि, representing the other view pre- vailing at the time; cf. M. Bh. on III.I.133; but not much importance seems to be attached to it. The different systems of grammar have different collect- ions of such words which are also known by the term Uṇādi. Out of the collections belonging to Pāṇi- ni's system, three collections are available at present, the collection into five pādas given in the prin- ted edition of the Siddhānta Kaumudi, the collection into ten Pādas given in the printed edi- tion of the Prakriya-Kaumudi and the collection in the Sarasvatī- kaṇthābharaṇa of Bhoja forming Pādas 1, 2 and 3 of the second Adhyāya of the work. |
उणादेिकोश a metrical work explain- ing the उणादि words referred to above with meanings assigned to them. There are two such compositions one by Rāmatar- kavāgīśa or Rāmaśarma and the other by Rāmacandra Dīkṣita. उणादिप्रातिपदिक word form or crude base, ending with an affix of the uṇ class, which is looked upon as practically underived, the affixes un and others not be- ing looked upon as standard affixes applied with regular mean- ings attached to them and capable of causing operations to the preceding base as prescribed by rules of grammar; cf. उणादयोS व्युत्पन्नानि प्रातिपदिकानि । व्युत्पन्नानीति शाक- टायनरीत्या । पाणिनेस्त्वव्युत्पत्तिपक्ष एवेति शब्देन्दु- शेखरे निरूपितम्. Pari. Śek. on Pari- bhāṣa 22. उणादिसूत्र, उणादिसूत्रपाठ the text of the Sūtras which begins with the Sūtras prescribing the affix उण् after the roots कृ, वा, पा, जि, स्वद्, साध् and अश्; cf Uṅādi Sūtras 1.1. for the different versions of the text See उणादि. Similar Sūtras in Kātantra, Āpiśali, Sakaṭāyana and other systems of grammar are also called Uṇādi Sūtras. उणादिसूत्रदशपादी the text of the Uṇādi Sūtras divided into ten chapters believed to have been written by शाकटायन. It is printed at the end of the Prakriyā Kau- mud and separately also, and is also available in manuscripts with a few differences. Patañjali in his Bhāṣya on P.III.3.1, seems to have mentioned Sakaṭāyana as the author of the Uṇādi Sūtras al- though it cannot be stated defi- nitely whether there was at that time, a version of 10 |
the Sūtras in five chapters or in ten chapters or one, com- pletely different from these, as scholars believe that there are many interpolations and changes in the versions of Uṇādi Sūtras available at present. A critical study of the various versions is extremely desirable. उणादिसूत्रपञ्चपादी the text of the Uṇādi Sūtras divided into five chapters which is possessed of a scholarly commentary written by Ujjvala- datta. There is a commentary on it by Bhaṭṭoji Dīkṣita also. उणादिसूत्रवृत्ति a gloss on the Uṇādi Sūtras in the different versions. Out of the several glosses on the Uṇādi Sūtras, the important ones are those written by Ujjvaladatta, Govardhana, Puruṣottamadeva, Rāmacandra Dīkṣita and Hari- datta. There is also a gloss called Uṇādisūtrodghātana by Miśra. There is a gloss by Durgasiṁha on the Kātantra version of the Uṇādi Sūtras. उत् (1) Short vowel उ in Pāṇini's terminology cf, P.I.1.70, I,2.21. IV.1.44, V.1.111 ; (2) tad-affix उत् applied to पूर्व and पूर्वतर for which पर् is substituted; e.g. परुत्. See P. V.3.22 Vārt. उत्करादि a class of words headed by the word उत्कर, to which the tad- dhita affix छ is added in the four senses, the affix being popularly known as चातुरर्थिक; cf. उत्करीयम्, शफरीयम् etc.; Kāś. on P.V.2.90. उत्क्रम a variety of the Krama des- cribed in the Prātiśākhya works. उत्तम (1) the best,the highest,the last: (2) the last letter of the consonant- classes, the nasal; cf, A.Pr.II.4.14; R.Pr.IV.3; cf. also अनुत्तम meaning non-nasal; (3) the उत्तमपुरुष or the |
premier or the first person constituting the affixes मि, वस् and मस् and their substitutes, cf. P.I.4.107. उत्तर (1) following, subsequent, e. g. उत्तरपद, the latter part of a com- pound word; (2) end of a word, पदान्त; cf. उत्तरे पदान्ते वर्तमानः Com. on T.Pr. III.1. उत्तरकालम् subsequently, then, after- wards; cf. तत् उत्तरकालमिदं दृष्टम् M.Bh. on I.1.1. उत्तरत्र in subsequent rules; cf. उत्तर- त्रानुवर्तिष्यते M. Bh. on I.1.23. उत्तरपद the latter member or portion of a compound word as contrast- ed with पूर्वपद; cf. पतिरुत्तरपदमाद्युदात्तम् A. Pr. II. 3. 11; cf also अलुगुत्तरपदे P. VI. 3.1. उत्तररूप ulterior form. उत्तरार्थ serving a purpose in subse- quent rules; of use in a subse- quent rule; cf. योगविभाग उत्तरार्थः, क्त्वाग्रहणमुत्तरार्थम् M. Bh. on I.2.22. उत्थान elevation of tone. उत्पत्ति (I) production: cf. वर्णोत्पत्तिः production of a phonetic element T. Pr. 23.1 ; (2) production of a grammatical element such as the application of an affix or addition of an augment or sub- stitution of a letter or letters during the process of word-for- mation: cf. गतिकारकोपपदानां कृद्भिः सह समासवचनं प्राक् सुबुत्पत्तेः Pari. Śek. Par. 75; M. Bh. II.2.19. Vārt, 4. उत्पद् to be produced, to be placed after to be annexed; (caus.) to produce, to get annexed, to add; cf. धेनुरनञि कमुत्पादयति Āpiśali's Vārt. quoted in M; Bh. on P.IV.2.45. उत्पल author of a commentary on Pāṇini's Liṅgānuśāsana. It is doubt- ful whether he was the same as उत्पल- |
भट्ट or भट्टोत्पल, the famous astrologer of the tenth century. उत्वत् possessed of short उ; cf. नोत्वद्वर्ध्र- बिल्वात् P.IV.3.15I. उत्सर्ग a general rule as contrasted with a special rule which is called अपवाद or exception; cf. उत्सर्गापवादयो- रपवादो बलीयान् Hema. Pari.56; प्रकल्प्य वापवादविषयं तत उत्सर्गोभिनिविशते Par.Śek. Pari.63, Sīra. Pari.97; cf. also उत्सर्ग- समानदेशा अपवादा;. For the बाध्यबाधकभाव relation between उत्सर्ग and अपवाद and its details see Nāgeśa's Pari- bhāṣenduśekhara on Paribhāṣās 57 to 65: cf. also न्यायैर्मिश्रान् अपवादान्प्रतीयात् explained by the commentator as न्याया उत्सर्गा महाविषया विधयः अपवादा अल्प- विषया विधयः । तान् उत्सर्गेण भिश्रानेकीकृतान् जानीयात् । अपवादविषयं मुक्त्वा उत्सर्गाः प्रवर्तन्ते इत्यर्थः R.Pr.I.23. उत्सूत्र not consistent with what is taught in rules of a Śāstra; cf. अनुत्सूत्रपदन्यासा सद्वृत्तिः सन्निबन्धना । शब्द- विद्येव नो भाति राजनीतिरपस्पशा Śiśupāla- vadha II. उत्सङ्गादि a class of words headed by the word उत्सङ्ग, to which the tadd- hita affix इक् ( ठ ) is added in the sense of तेन हरति (takes away by means of): cf. हरतिर्देशान्तरप्रापणे वर्तते । उत्सङ्गेन हरति औत्सङ्गिकः । अौडुपिकः । Kāś. on P IV.4.15. उत्सादि a class of words headed by the word उत्स to which the tadd- hita affix अञ्, instead of the usual affixes अण् and others, is added in the sense of an offspring: cf. औत्स:, औदपानः etc. Kāś, on P.IV.1.86. उदय that which follows; a term fre- quently used in the Prātiśākhya works in the sense of 'following' or पर; cf. उदयस्वरादिसस्थानो हकार एकेषाम् explained by the commentator as आत्मन उपरिस्वरादिसस्थानः T.Pr.II.47: cf. also ऋकार उदये कण्ठ्यौ explained by the commentator as ऋकारे उदये परभूते |
सति R.Pr.II.11;cf. also नेादात्तस्वरितेादयं P.V.III.4.67. उदयंकर surnamed pāṭhaka who wrote a commentary on the Laghuśab- denduśekhara named Jyotsna and a very critical work on Paribhāṣās similar to Sīradeva's Paribhāṣāvṛtti; the work is incomplete. उदयकीर्ति author of a treatise giving rules for the determination of the pada or padas of roots; the trea- tise is named पदव्यवस्थासूत्रकारिकाटीका He was a Jain grammarian, and one of the pupils of Sādhusundara. उदात्त the acute accent defined by Pāṇini in the words उचैरुदात्त: P.I.2. 29. The word उच्चैः is explained by Patañjali in the words 'आयामो दारुण्यं अणुता स्वस्य इति उचैःकराणि शब्दस्य' where आयाम (गात्रनिग्रह restriction of the organs), दारुण्य (रूक्षता rudeness ) and स्वस्य अणुता ( कण्ठस्य संवृतता closure of the glottis) are given as specific characteristics of the acute accent. The acute is the prominent accent in a word-a simple word as also a compound word-and when a vowel in a word is possessed of the acute accent, the remaining vowels have the अनुदात्त or the grave accent. Accent is a property of vowels and consonants do not possess any independent accent. They possess the accent of the adjoining vowel connected with it. The acute accert corresponds to what is termed 'accent' in English and other languages. उदात्ततर raised acute, a tone slightly higher than the acute tone which is mentioned in connection with the first half of a circumflex vowel; cf. तस्योदात्ततरोदात्तादर्धमात्रार्धमेव वा R.P.III.2. उदात्तनिर्देश conventional understand- ing about a particular vowel in the wording of a sūtra being |
marked acute or Udātta, when ordinarily it should not have been so, to imply that a Pari- bhāṣā is to be applied for the interpretation of that Sūtra: cf. उदात्तनिर्देशात्सिद्धम् P.VI.1.13 Vārt.14, also Sīra. Pari. 112. उदात्तमय an accent made up of Udātta, i. e. an accent which is a reduced Udātta.It is called also प्रचय. It is mentioned in connection with an acute vowel following इति in the Padapāṭha, according to Kāṇva's view;cf. उदात्तमयोन्यत्र नीच एव अन्तोदान्तमध्योदात्तयोः पर्वणोरन्यत्र इति कार- णात् परो नीच उदात्तमय एव भवति प्रचित एव भवतीत्यर्थः com. on V.Pr. I.150 उदात्तश्रुति the same as एकश्रुति, accent- less tone, mentioned in connection with the latter half of a circumflex vowel as also with a grave vowel or vowels, if not followed by another acute or circumflex vowel; cf. नोदात्तस्वरितोदयं. P.VIII.4.67. उदात्तसम similar to Udātta although not exactly acute, which character- izes the latter half of the circum- flex vowel; cf. उदात्तसमश्शेषः T.Pr.I.42. उदाहरण a grammatical example in explanation of an interpretation; cf. नैकमुदाहरणमसवर्णग्रहणं प्रयोजयति P.VI. 1.11. उदित् characterized by short उ as a mute indicatory vowel, by virtue of which the word कु, for instance, signifies along with क् its cognate consonants ख्, ग्, घ् and ङ् also; cf. अणुदित्सवर्णस्य चाप्रत्ययः P.I.I.69. Roots marked with उ as mute get the augment इ optionally added before the kṛt affix क्त्वा; e g- शमित्वा and शान्त्वा from the root शम् ( शमु ) by virtue of the rule उदितो वा P.VII.2.56. उदुपधत्व possession of short उ as the penultimate letter, e. g. इदुदुपधस्य चाप्रत्ययस्य P.VII.3.41. |
उद्गात्रादि a class of words headed by the word उद्गातृ to which the tadd- hita affix अञ् is added in the sense of 'nature' or 'profession'; cf. उद्गातुर्भावः कर्म वा औद्गात्रम् । Similarly औन्नेत्रम् Kāś. on P. V. 1.129. उद्ग्राह alleviation, ease, relief; name given to a Saṁdhi in the Prātiśā- khya works when a visarga and a short vowel अ preceding it are changed into short अ, (e. g. यः + इन्द्र: = य इन्द्र:), as also when the vowel ए or ओ is changed into अ being followed by a dissimilar vowel; e. g. अग्ने + इन्द्रः = अग्न इन्द्रः; cf. R.Pr.II.10. उद्ग्राहपदवृत्ति name given in the Rk. Prātiśākhya to the Udgrāhasaṁdhi where the vowel अ is follow- ed by a long vowel; e.g, कः ईषते =क ईषते R.Pr.II.10. उद्ग्राहवत् name given to a saṁdhi in the Rk. Prātiśākhya when the vowel अ or अा is changed into अ e. g. प्र ऋभुभ्यः=प्रऋभुभ्य: also मधुना + ऋतस्य=मधुन ऋतस्य cf. R. Pr. II. 11. उद्धात elevation; named also उच्चीभाव. उद्धार (1) elision, a term used in the sense of 'lopa' in the ancient gra- mmar works; (2) name of a com- mentary on the Haima-liṅgā- nuśāsana. उद्देश description; mention of quali- ties; cf. गुणैः प्रापणम् M. Bh.on I. 3.2: the word is used in contrast with उपदेश or direct mention; cf. कः पुनुरुद्देशोपदेशयोर्विशेषः । प्रत्यक्षमाख्यानमुपदेशो गुणैः प्रापणमुद्देशः । प्रत्यक्षं तावदाख्यानमुपदेशः तद्यथा । अगोज्ञाय कश्चिद्गां सक्थनि कर्णे वा गृहीत्वोपदिशति । अयं गौरिति । स प्रत्यक्षमा- ख्यातमाह । उपदिष्टो मे गौरिति । गुणैः प्रापणमुद्देशः । तद्यथा । कश्चित्कंचिदाह । देवदत्तं मे भवानुद्दिशतु इति । स इहस्थः पाटलिपुत्रस्थं देवदत्तमुद्दिशति । अङ्गदी कुण्डली किरीटी...ईदृशो देवदत्त इति । स गुणैः प्राप्य- माणमाह । उद्दिष्टो मे दवदत्त इति । M. Bh. |
on I. 3.2; (2) spot, place, passage of occurrence: उद्देश उपदेशदेशः; cf. यथोद्देशं संज्ञापरिभाषम् Pari.Śek. Pari. 2. उद्देश्य referred to; pointed out, sub- ject, as contrasted with the pre- dicate मानान्तरप्राप्तमुद्देश्यम् ; cf. उद्दश्यप्र- तिनिर्दिश्यमानयोरैक्यमापद्यत् सर्वनाम पर्यायेण तत्तल्लिङभाक् । तद्यथा | शैत्यं हि यत्सा प्रकृति- र्जलस्य, शैत्यं हि य यत्तत्प्रकृतिर्जलस्य वा । उद्देश्य in grammar refers to the subject- part of a sentence as opposed to the predicate-part. In the sen- tence वृद्धिरादैच् the case is strikingly an opposite one and the explana- tion given by Patañjali is very interesting;cf. तदेतदेकं मङ्गलार्थं आचार्यस्य मृष्यताम् । माङ्गलिक अाचार्यः महतः शास्त्रौघस्य मङ्गलार्थं वृद्धिशब्दमादितः प्रयुङ्कते, M. Bh. on I. 1.1. उद्देश्यविधेयभाव relationship between the subject and the predicate where generally the subject is placed first in a sentence; cf. उद्देश्यवचनं पूर्वं विधेयत्वं ततः परम् । cf. also तादात्म्यसंसर्गकस्थले विशेष्यत्वमेव उद्देश्यं विशे- षणत्वमेव विधेयम् Padavākyaratnākara. उद्द्योत the word always refers in grammar to the famous com- mentary by Nāgeśabhaṭṭa written in the first decade of the 18th century A. D. om the Mahābhā- ṣyapradīpa of Kaiyaṭa. The Uddyota appears to be one of the earlier works of Nāgeśa. It is also called Vivaraṇa. The com- mentary is a scholarly one and is looked upon as a final word re : the exposition of the Mahābhāṣya. It is believed that Nāgeśa wrote 12 Uddyotas and 12 Śekharas which form some authoritative commentaries on prominent works in the different Śāstras. उद्द्योतनप्रभा name of a commentary on the 'Tantrapradipa' of Mai- treya Rakṣita,which latter is a com- |
mentary on Jinendrabuddhi's Nyāsa which itself is a commen- tary on Jayāditya's Kāśikā. उप् a technical term in the jainendra Grammar for the terms लुप् and लुक्; cf. अन्तरङ्गानपि विधीन् बहिरङ्ग उप् बाधते. Jain. Pari. 85, प्रकृतिग्रहणे यङुबन्तस्यापि ग्रहणम् Jain Pari. 20. उपकादि a class of words headed by the word उपक after which the taddhita affix, added in the sense of गोत्र ( grand-children etc. ) is optionally elided, provided the word is to be used in the plural number; cf. उपकलमकाः भ्रष्टककपिष्ठलाः also उपकाः, औपकायनाः; लमकाः, लाम- कायना ; भ्रष्टकाः भ्राष्टकयः । Kāś. on P. II.4.69. उपगीत a fault in the pronunciation of letters, noticed sometimes in the utterance of a letter adjoin- ing such a letter as is coloured with a musical tone on account of the proximity of the adjacent letter which is uttered in a musical note and which therefore is called 'प्रगीत'; cf. प्रगीतः सामवदुच्चारितः । उपगीतः समीपवर्णान्तरगीत्यानुरक्तः Kaiyaṭa's Pradīpa on M.Bh. I. Āhnika 1. उपग्रह a term used by the ancient grammarians in the sense of the Parasmaipada and the Ātmane- pada affixes. The word is not found in Pāṇini's Aṣṭādhyāyī. The Vārttikakāra has used the word in his Vārttika उपग्रहप्रतिषेधश्च on P. III.2.127 evidently in the sense of Pada affixes referring to the Ātmanepada as explained by Kaiyaṭa in the words उपग्रहस्य आत्मने- पदसंज्ञाया इत्यर्थ: । The word occurs in the Ślokavārttika सुप्तिङुपग्रहलिङ्गनराणां quoted by Patañjali in his Mahā- bhāṣya on व्यत्ययो बहुलम् P. III. 1.85, where Nāgeśa writes लादेश- व्यङ्ग्यं स्वार्थत्वादि । इह तत्प्रतीतिनिमित्ते परस्मै- |
पदात्मनेपदे उपग्रहशब्देन लक्षणयोच्येते । The word is found in the sense of Pada in the Mahābhāṣya on P. III. 1.40. The commentator on Puṣpasūtra explains the word as उपगृह्यते समीपे पठ्यते इति उपग्रहः. The author of the Kāśikā on P. VI. 2.134 has cited the reading चूर्णादीन्यप्राण्युपग्रहात् instead of चूर्णादी- न्यप्राणिषष्ठ्याः and made the remark तत्रेापग्रह इति षष्ठ्यन्तमेव पूर्वाचार्योपचारेण गृह्यते. This remark shows that in an- cient times उपग्रह meant षष्ठ्यन्त i. e. a word in the genitive case. This sense gave rise to, or was based upon, an allied sense, viz. the meaning of 'षष्ठी' i. e. possession. Possibly the sense 'possession' further developed into the further sense 'possession of the fruit or result for self or others' referring to the तिङ् affixes which possessed that sense. The old sense 'षष्ठ्यन्त' of the word 'उपग्रह' having gone out of use, and the sense 'पद' having come in vogue, the word षष्ठी' must have been substituted for the word 'उपग्रह' by some grammarians before the time of the Kāśikākāras. As Patañjali has dropped the Sūtra (VI. 2.134), it cannot be said definitely whether the change of reading took place before Patañjali or after him. उपचार (l) taking a secondary sense; implication; lit. moving for a sense which is near about; the same as लक्षणा. The word आचार is explained as उपचार, employment or current usage, by Patañjali; cf. आचारात् । आचार्याणामुपचारात् । M. Bh. I.1.1. Vārt. 4; ( 2 ) substitution of the letter सं for विसर्ग : cf. प्रत्ययग्रहणोपचारेषु च, P.IV.1.1 Vārt. 7. उपजन lit.origin; one that originates, augment, उपजायते असौ उपजन: । The |
उपजीव्य
word is used in the sense of 'addi- tional phonetic element'; cf. उपजन आगमः M. Bh. on Śiva- sūtra 5; cf. also वर्णव्यत्ययापायोपजनविका- रेष्वर्थदर्शनात् । Śiva Sūtra 5 Vārt. 15. The Ṛk Prātiśākhya gives स् in पुरुश्चन्द्र as an instance of. उपजन cf. R. Pr. IV. 37. In the Nirukta उपजन is given as the sense of the prefix 'उप'; cf. उपेत्युपजनम्: The com. on the Nirukta explains the word उपजन as अाधिक्य. उपजीव्य a term used by later gramm- arians in connection with such a rule on which another rule depends cf. उपजीव्यादन्तरङ्गाच्व प्रधानं प्रबलम् Pari. Śekh. on Pari. 97, as also M. Bh. on हेतुमति च P. III.1.26. The relationship known as उपजीव्योपजी- वकभाव occurs several times in gra- mmar which states the inferiority of the dependent as noticed in the world. उपदेश instruction; original enuncia- tion; first or original precepts or teaching; cf. उपदेश आद्योच्चारणम् S. K. on T the rule उपदेशेजनुनासिक इत् P.I.3.2. cf. वर्णानामुपदेशः कर्तव्यः; M. Bh. on Āhn. I. Vārt. 15. For diff- erence between उपदेश and उद्देश see उद्देश; cf. also उपदिश्यतेनेनेत्युपदेशः । शास्त्र- वाक्यानि, सूत्रपाठः खिलपाठश्च Kāśikā on P. I.3.2; cf. also Vyāḍi. Pari. 5; (2) employment (of a word) for others cf. उपेदश: परार्थः प्रयोगः । स्वयमेव तु बुद्धया यदा प्ररमृशति तदा नास्त्युपदेशः Kāś. on अदोनुपदेशे P.I.4.70. उपदेशिन् such a word as is found in the original instruction. उपदेशिवद्भाव occurrence in the origi- nal statement before the applica- tion of any affixes etc., cf. एवमप्युप- देशिवद्भावो वक्तव्यः, M. Bh. on P.I. 1.56, Vārt. 23. उपदेशिवद्वचन statement to the effect that a word should be looked |
upon as occurring in the original instruction although it is not there. See उपदेश.cf. नुम्विधावुपदेशिवद्वचनं प्रत्ययविध्यर्थम् P. VII.1.58. Vārt. 1. उपद्रुत name of a saṁdhi which is described as उद्ग्राहवत् in R.Pr: e. g. न ऋते. See उद्ग्राह. उपधा penultimate letter, as defined in the rule अलोन्त्यात्पूर्वं उपघा P. I. 1.65, e.g. see ह्रस्वोपध, दीर्घोपध, लघूपध, अकारोपध etc.; lit. उपधीयते निधीयते सा that which is placed near the last letter. उपधालोपिन् a word or a noun which has got the penultimate letter omitted; cf. अन उपधालेपिनोन्यतरस्याम् P. IV. 1. 28. उपध्मानीय a letter or a phonetic elem- ent substituted for a visarga foll- owed by the first or the second letter of the labial class. Visarga is simply letting the breath out of the mouth. Where the visarga is followed by the first or the second letter of the labial class, its pronun- ciation is coloured by labial utterance. This coloured utterance cannot be made independently; hence this utterance called 'उपध्मा- नीय' ( similar to a sound blown from the mouth ) is not put in, as an independent letter, in the वर्ण- समाम्नाय attributed to महेश्वर. Patañj- ali, however, has referred to such dependent utterances by the term अयोगवाहवर्ण. See अयेागवाह; cf. xक इति जिह्वामूलीयः । जिह्वामूलेन जन्यत्वात् । xप इत्युप- ध्मानीयः । उपध्मानेन जन्यत्वात्. अयेगवाह is also called अर्धविसर्ग. See अर्धविसर्ग. उपन्यास proposition, statement, The remark 'विषम उपन्यासः' is of frequ- ent occurrence in the Vyākaraṇa Mahābhāṣya in connection with statements that are defective and have to be refuted or corrected; cf. M.Bh. on P.1.1.21,46,50; I.2.5 etc. |
उपपद
उपपद lit.a word placed near; an adjo- ining word. In Pāṇini's grammar, the term उपपद is applied to such words as are put in the locative case by Pāṇini in his rules prescri- bing kṛt affixes in rules from 1 II. 1, 90 to III. 4 end; cf. तत्रोपपदं सप्तमीस्थम् P.III.1.92; e.g. कर्मणि in कर्मण्यण् P. III.2.1. The word is also used in the sense of an adjoining word connected in sense. e. g. युष्मद्युपपदे as also प्रहासे च मन्योपपदे P.I.4.105,106; cf. also क्रियार्थायां क्रियायामुपपदे धातोर्भविष्यति काले तुमुन्ण्वुलौ भवतः Kāś. on P.III.3.10; cf. also इतरेतरान्योन्योपपदाच्च P.I.3.10, मिथ्योपपदात् कृञोभ्यासे P.I.3.71, as also उपपदमतिङ् P.II.2.19; and गतिकारकोपपदात्कृत् P. VI.2.139. Kaiyaṭa on P.III.1. 92 Vārt. 2 explains the word उपपद as उपोच्चारि or उपोच्चारितं पदं उपपदम्. The word उपपद is found used in the Prātiśākhya literature where it means a word standing near and effecting some change: cf. च वा ह अह एव एतानि चप्रभृतीनि यान्युपपदानि उक्तानि आख्यातस्य विकारीणिo Uvaṭa on V. Pr. VI. 23. उपपदविधि a grammatical operation caused by a word which is near; cf उपपदविधौ भयाढ्यादिग्रहणं P. I.1.72 Vārt 9, also अतिप्रसङ्ग उपपदविधौ P. IV 1.1. Vārt. 8 where rules such as 'कर्मण्यण्' and the following are referred to as उपपदविधि, the words कर्मणि, स्तम्ब, कर्ण, etc. being called उपपद by the rule तत्रोपपदं सप्तमीस्थम्; P. III.1.92. उपपदविभक्ति a case termination add- ed to a word on account of the presence of another word requir- ing the addition;cf. the well-known Paribhāṣā,उपपदविभक्तेः कारकविभक्तिर्बली- यसी. Par. Śek. Pari. 94; and M.Bh. on I.4. 96 stating the possession of greater force in the case of a kāra- |
kavibhakti than in the case of an upapadavibhakti. उपपदसमास the compound of a word, technically termed as उपपद by Pāṇini according to his definition of the word in III.1.92., with another word which is a verbal derivative; cf. कुम्भकारः, नगरकारः Here technically the compound of the words कुम्भ, नगर etc. which are upapadas is formed with कार,before a case-termination is added to the nominal base कार; cf. गतिकारकोपपदानां कृद्भिः सह समासवचनं प्राक् सुबुत्पत्तेः Par. Śek. Pari. 75. उपबन्ध a technical term used in the Prātiśākhya works in the sense of words which proceed from a rule to the following rules upto a par- ticular stated limit; cf. उपबन्धस्तु देशाय नित्यम् T. Pr I.59 explained by the commentator as उपबध्यते इति उपबन्धः । एतस्मिन्नित्यधिकरणरूपः संख्यानविषयः प्रदेशश्च उपबन्ध उच्यते । उपबन्धे यदुक्तं तदन्यत्र न भवतीति तुशब्दार्थः । उपब्दिमत् the fourth out of the seven stages or places in the production of articulate speech, upāṁśu being the first stage; cf. सशब्दमुपद्भिमत् Tait. Pr. 23.9 explained by the commentator as: सशब्दं परश्राव्यशब्दसहि- तम् । यत्र प्रयुज्यमानः शब्दः परैरक्षरव्यञ्जनववेकवर्जे श्रूयते तदुपद्विमत्संज्ञं भवति । उपमन्यु (1) the famous commentator on the grammatical verses attributed to Nandikeśvara which are known by the name नन्दिकेश्वरकारिका and which form a kind of a comment- ary on the sūtras of Maheśvara; (2) a comparatively modern gra- mmarian possibly belonging to the nineteenth century who is also named Upamanyu and who has written a commentory on the fam- ous Kāśikāvṛtti by Jayāditya and Vāmana. Some believe that Upa- |
उपमा
manyu was an ancient sage who wrote a nirukta or etymological work and whose pupil came to be known as औपमन्यव. उपमा a well-known term in Rhetorics meaning the figure of speech ' simile ' or ' comparison '. The word is often found in the Nirukta in the same sense; cf. अथात उपमाः | 'यत् अतत् तत्सदृशम्'इति गार्ग्यः । Nir III.13. Generally an inferior thing is com- pared to another that is superior in quality. उपमान standard of comparison. The word is found in the Pāṇinisūtra उपमानानि सामान्यवचनैः P.II.I.55 where the Kāśikāvṛtti explains it as उपमीयतेऽनेनेत्युपमानम् । उपमित an object which is compared. The word is found in Pāṇinisūtra उपमितं व्याघ्रादिभिः P.II.1.56, where the Kāśikā paraphrases it by the word उपमेय and illustrates it by the word पुरुष in पुरुषव्याघ्र. उपमेय an object which is to be com- pared. See उपमित. उपलक्षण implication, indication: a thing indicatory of another thing. The term is very frequently found in commentary works in connec- tion with a word which signifies something beyond it which is similar to it; the indication is generally inclusive; cf. Kāśikā on भीस्म्योर्हेतुभये P.I.3.68 भयग्रहणमुपलक्षणार्थं विस्मयोपि तत एव । as also मन्त्रग्रहणं तु च्छन्दस उपलक्षणार्थम् Kāś. on II.4.80. The verbal forms of लक्ष् and उपलक्ष् as also the words लक्षयितुम्, लक्षणीय, लक्षित etc. possess the sense of 'expressing the meaning not primarily, but secondarily by indication or implication'. उपलिङ्गिन् a substituted word element; cf. शेवः इति सुखनाम । शिष्यतेः वकारः नाम- करणः अन्तस्थान्तरोपलिङ्गी विभाषितगुणः | शिवम् Nir. X. I7. |
उपवर्ष an ancient grammarian and Mīmāmsaka believed to have been the brother of Varṣa and the preceptor of Pāṇini. He is refer- red to, many times as an ancient writer of some Vṛttigranthas. उपश्लेष immediate contact, as for instance, of one word with another: cf. शब्दस्य च शब्देन कोन्योभिसंबन्धो भवितु- मर्हति अन्यदत उपश्लेषात् । M.Bh. on VI. 1.72. The word उपश्लिष्ट is also found in the Mahābhāṣya in the same context. उपसंख्यान mention, generally of the type of the annexation of some words to words already given, or of some limiting conditions or additions to what has been already stated. The word is often found at the end of the statements made by the Vārttikakāra on the sūtras of Pāṇini.: cf. P.I.1.29 Vārt. 1: I.1.36 Vārt. 3 etc. The words वाच्य and वक्तव्य are also similarly used.The word is found similarly used in the Mahābhāṣya also very frequently. उपसंग्रह inclusion of something, which is not directly mentioned; cf. प्रसिद्ध्युपसंग्रहार्थमेतत् Kāś.on P.I.3.48,also इतिकरणं एवंविधानामेप्यन्येषामुपसंग्रहार्थम् Kāś. on P VII.4.65. उपसंयोग (l) union;cf. नामाख्यातयोस्तु कर्मोप- संयोगद्योतका भवन्ति prepositions are signs to show that such a union with another sense has occurred in the case of the noun or verb to which they are prefixed, Nir. I.3.; (2) addition; cf. अक्रियमाणे हि संज्ञाग्रहणे गरीयानुपसंयोगः कर्तव्यः स्यात् M.Bh. on P. IV.2.21. Vārt, 2. उपसंहृत drawn close: cf. ओष्ठौ तूपसंहृततरौ T. Pr. II.14. The root उपसंहृ is used in the sense of finishing in the Mahābhāṣya; cf. येनैव यत्नेनैको वर्ण उच्चार्यते विच्छिन्ने वर्ण उपसंहृत्य तमन्यमुपा |
उपसमस्त
दाय द्वितीयः प्रयुज्यते तथा तृतीयस्तथा चतुर्थः । M.Bh. on P.I.4. 109 Vārt. 6. उपसमस्त compounded together, join- ed together by special grammatical connection called समास; cf. न केवल; पथिशब्दः स्त्रियां वर्तते । उपसमस्तस्तर्हि वर्तते M. Bh. on VII.1.1. Vārt. 18. उपसर्ग preposition, prefix. The word उसपर्ग originally meant only 'a prefixed word': cf. सोपसर्गेषु नामसु R. Pr. XVI. 38. The word became technically applied by ancient Sanskrit Gratmmarians to the words प्र, परा, अप, सम् etc. which are always used along with a verb or a verbal deriva- tive or a noun showing a verbal activity; cf. उपसर्गाः क्रियायोगे P. I. 4.59. 'These prefixes are necessari- iy compounded with the follow- ing word unless the latter is a verbal form; cf. कुगतिप्रादयः P.II. 2.18. Although they are not compounded with a verbal form, these prepositions are used in juxtaposition with it; sometimes they are found detached from the verbal form even with the inter- vention of one word or more. The prefixes are instrumental in changing the meaning of the root. Some scholars like Śākaṭāyana hold the view that separated from the roots, prefixes do not express any specific sense as ordinary words express, while scholars like Gārgya hold the view that prefixes do express a sense e. g. प्र means beginning or प्रारम्भ; cf. न निर्बद्धा उपसर्गा अर्थान्निराहुरिति शाकटायनः । नामाख्यातयोस्तु कर्मोपसंयोगद्योतका भवन्ति । उच्चावचाः पदार्था भवन्तीति गार्ग्यः । तद्य एषु पदार्थः प्राहुरिमं तं नामाख्यातयोरर्थविकरणम् Nir. I. 8. It is doubtful, however, which view Pāṇini himself held. In his Ātmanepada topic, he has mentioned some specific roots 11 |
as possessing some specific senses when preceded by some specific prefixes (see P. I. 3.20, 24, 25, 40, 4l, 46, 52, 56, etc.), which implies possibly that roots them- selves possess various senses, while prefixes are simply instrumental in indicating or showing them. On the other hand, in the topic of the Karmapravacanīyas,the same words प्र, परा etc. which, however, are not termed Upasargas for the time being, although they are called Nipātas, are actually assign- ed some specific senses by Pāṇini. The Vārttikakāra has defined उपसर्ग as क्रियाविशेषक उपसर्गः P. I. 3.I. Vārt 7, leaving it doubtful whether the उपसर्ग or prefix posses- ses an independent sense which modifies the sense of the root, or without possessing any inde- pendent sense, it shows only the modified sense of the root which also is possessed by the root. Bhartṛhari, Kaiyaṭa and their followers including Nāgeśa have emphatically given the view that not only prefixes but Nipātas, which include प्र, परा and others as Upasargas as well as Karma- pravacanīyas, do not denote any sense, but they indicate it; they are in fact द्योतक and not वाचक. For details see Nir. I. 3, Vākya- padīya II. 190, Mahābhāṣya on I. 3.1. Vārt. 7 and Pradīpa and Uddyota thereon. The Ṛk Prā- tiśākhya has discussed the ques- tion in XII. 6-9 where, as explained by the commentator, it is stated that prefixes express a sense along with roots or nouns to which they are attached. It is not clear whether they convey the sense by denotation or indi- cation, the words वाचक in stanza |
उपसर्गद्योत्यता
6 and विशेषकृत् in stanza 8 being in favour of the former and the latter views respectively; cf उपसर्गा विंशतिरर्थवाचकाः सहेतराभ्यामितरे निपाताः; क्रियावाचकभाख्यातमुपसर्गो विशेषकृत्, सत्त्वाभि- धायकं नाम निपातः पादपूरणः R. Pr. XII. st. 6 and 8. For the list of upa- sargas see R. Pr. XII. 6, T. Pr. I. 15, V. Pr. VI.24, and S. K. on P. I.4.60. उपसर्गद्योत्यता the view or doctrine that prefixes, by themselves, do not possess any sense, but they indicate the sense of the verb or noun with which they are conne- cted. For details See Vākyapadīya II.165-206; also vol. VII. pages 370-372 of Vyākaraṇa Mahābhā- ṣya ed. by the D. E. Society, Poona. उपसर्गयोग connection with a prefix; joining of the prefix. Some scholars of grammar hold the view that the Upasarga is prefixed to the root and then the verbal form is arrived at by placing the desired terminations after the root, while others hold the oppo- site view: cf. पूर्वं धातुः साधनेनोपयुज्यते पश्चादुपसर्गेण । अन्ये तु पूर्वं धातुरुपसर्गेण युज्यते पश्चात्साधनेनेत्याहुः Sīradeva's Paribhā- ṣāvṛtti Pari. 131, 132; cf also vol. VII. Mahābhāṣya edited by the D. E. Society, Poona, pages 371-372. उपसर्गवाद a treatise on upasargas, by Harikṛṣna. उपसर्गविचार a treatise on upasargas by Gadādhara Cakravartin. उपसर्गविवरण a short anonymous work on the nature of upasargas or prepositions explaining their mean- ings with illustrations. उपसर्गवृत्ति a treatise on upasargas by Bharatamalla in the Sixteenth Century A.D. |
उपसर्जन (1) adjective, subordinate member which does not get the treatment of the principal mem- ber, e. g. गोस्त्रियोरुपसर्जनस्य P.I.2.48, ' अनुपसर्जनात् P.IV.1.14 संज्ञोपसर्जनीभूतास्तु न सर्वादयः S.K. on P.I.1.29, also P.I.1.27 Vārt.2;(2) a word referred to by the word which is put in the nominative case in rules of Pāṇini prescribing compounds, e. g. कष्ट (in the compound क्रष्टश्रितः) which is referred to by the word द्वितीया in the rule द्वितीया श्रितातीतo P.II.1.24 which prescribes the Acc. Tat- puruṣa compound. These words are given the first place in a com- pound; cf. प्रथमानिर्दिष्टं समास उपसर्जनम् P.I.2.43, उपसर्जनं पूर्वम् P.II.2.30; (3) a word which has one and the same case when a compound in the different cases is shown as dissolv- ed, e. g. the word कौशाम्बी in the compound निष्कौशाम्बिः which keeps its ablative case when the com- pounds निष्कौशाम्बिम् , निष्कौशाम्बिना, निष्कौशाम्बये etc. are dissolved; cf. एकविभक्ति चापूर्वनिपाते P.I.2.44. उपसृष्ट attended with a prefix, gene- rally used in connection with roots; e.g. क्रुधद्रुहोरुपसृष्टयोः कर्म P.I.4.38 where the Kāśikā has explaincd the word as उपसर्गसंबद्ध. उपस्कार introduction of the necessary changes in the wording of the base, such as elision, or addition or substitution of a letter or letters as caused by the addition of suffixes. उपस्थान occurrence: prescnce by vir- tue of anuvṛtti i. e. recurrence or continuation of a word in the rules that follow; cf. शब्देन चाप्यधिकृतेन कोन्यो व्यापारः शक्योवगन्तुमन्यदतो योगे योग उपस्थानात् M.Bh. on 1.3.11 Vārt. 1. उपस्थित a word used father techni- cally in the sense of the word इति |
उपहित
which is used in the Krama and other recitals when Vedic reciters show separately the two words compounded together by uttering the compound word first, then the word इति and then the two compound words, e.g. सुश्लोक ३ इति सु-श्लोक। विभावसो इति विभा-वसो. The Kāśikā defines the word उपस्थित as समुदायादवच्छिद्य पदं येन स्वरूपे अवस्थाप्यते तद् उपस्थितम् । इतिशब्दः । Kāś.on VI.1.129. The Ṛk-Prātiśākhya explains the word rather differently, but in the same context.The word after which इति is placed is called upasthita e.g. the word बाहू in बाहू इति or विभावसौ in विभावसो इति as contrasted with स्थित i.e. the word without इति e.g. बाहू or विभावसो, as also contrasted with स्थितोपस्थित i.e. the whole word विभावसो इति विभाsवसो which is also called संहित or मिलित; (2) occurring, present; cf कार्यकालं संज्ञापरिभाषम् . यत्र कार्यं तत्रोपस्थितं द्रष्टव्यम् । Par.Śek. Pari.3. उपहित (l) with, preceded by; e g. दीर्घोपहित, ह्रस्वोपहित; (2) sticking to, connected with, 'उपश्लेषित': cf.Durga on Nir.V.12;(3) coming to be plac- ed near or in juxtaposition with the preceding word: cf. आवोन्तोपहितात् सतः R. Pr. II.15. उपांशु lit. inaudible. The word is explained in the technical sense as the first place or stage in the utterance of speech where it is perfectly inaudible although pro- duced; cf. उपांशु इति प्रथमं वाचः स्थानम् Com. on T. Pr. XXIII, 5. उपाचरित (l) sibilation substitution of a sibilant letter for a visarga: cf. प्लुतोपाचरिते च R.Pr. XI.19; (2) name of the saṁdhi in which a visarga is changed into a sibilant letter; cf. सर्वत्रैवोपाचरितः स संधिः R. Pr.IV.14 which corresponds to Pāṇini VIII.3.18 and 19. |
उपाचार change of Visarga into s (स्); sibilation of Visarga, e. g. ब्रह्मणः पतिः = ब्रह्मणस्पतिः. The words उपचार and उपाचरित are found used in the same sense by ancient Grammari- ans. See उपचार; cf. समापाद्यं नाम वदन्ति षत्वं, तथा णत्वं सामवशांश्च सन्धीन् । ...उपाचारं लक्षणतश्च सिद्धम् , आचार्या व्यालिशाकल्यगार्ग्याः R. Pr. VIII.12. उपादान hypothesis, presumption, acceptance. उपाद्य lit. near the first; second. उपाधि condition, limitation, determi- nant, qualification: e.g. न हि उपाधे- रुपाधिर्भवति, विशेषणस्य वा विशेषणम् M.Bh. on I.3.2 as also on V.1.16; cf. also इह यो विशेष उपाधिर्वोपादीयते द्योत्ये तस्मिंस्तेन भवितव्यम् । M.Bh. on III.1.7. उपान्त lit. near the last; penultimate. The word is generally found used in the Cāndra Vyākaraṇa. उपान्त्य see उपान्त; the word is gene- rally found used in the grammars of Śākaṭāyana and Hemacandra. उपोत्तम lit.one near or before the last; the term is generally used in con- nection with words having two or more syllables, where it means the vowel before the last (vowel); cf. उपोत्तमं रिति P. VI.1.217 and योपधाद्गुरूपोत्तमाद्वुञ् P.V.1.132 where the writer of the Kāśikā explains it as त्रिप्रभृतीनामन्त्यमुत्तमं तस्य समीपमुपोत्तमम् । giving रमणीय and वसनीय as examples where the long ई is upottama; cf. also T.Pr. XI.3. and Nir.I.19 where the word refers to the third out of the four feet of the verse. उपोद्बलक a supporting assertion or statement; cf तस्यैवोपोद्बलकमेतत् M.Bh. on I.2.64. Vārt. 38-39. उभयगति both the alternatives; both the senses; double signification; cf. उभयगतिरिह भवति P.I.1.23,Vārt 4,Pari. Śek, Par. 9 where the word ubhaya |
उभयतस्पाशा
refers to both the senses-the ordi- nary one ( अकृत्रिम } and the techni- cal one ( कृत्रिम)--e.g. the meanings ( i ) numeral, and ( ii ) words बहु, गण etc. of the word संख्या. उभयतस्पाशा presenting a difficulty in both the ways; cf. सैषा उभयतस्पाशा रज्जुर्भवति M.Bh. on VI.1.68. उभयतोभाष lit. speaking or showing both the padas or voices; possess- ed of both the padas viz. the Parasmaipada and the Ātmane- pada. The word is found common- ly used in the Dhātupaṭha of Pāṇini. उभयत्र in both the ways lit. in both the places; cf. उभयत्र च P. I. 1. 44 V rt. 22. The word उभयत्रविभाषा is used in grammar referring to the option ( विभाषा) which is प्राप्त as also अप्राप्त; cf.M.Bh.on P.1.1.26 Vārt.22. उभयथा in both the ways (in the case of an option, of course); cf. छन्दस्यु- भयथा P.III.4.117 where the word ubhayathā refers to both the alter- native uses e.g. Sārvadhātuka and Ārdhadhātuka;so also vidhiliṅ and āśīrliṅ; cf. Kāśikā on P.III.4.117. The term ubhayatha is described as synonymous with 'bahulam' or 'anyatarasyām' or 'vā' or ekeśām'; cf. बहुलमन्यतरस्यामुभयथा वा एकेषामिति M. Bh. on P.I. 1.44: Vart. 19; cf. also अध्यायान्तेषूभयथा स्मरन्ति R.Pr.XV.8. उभयदीर्घा a hiatus or a stop which occurs between two long-vowelled syllables; the term उभयदीर्घा is a conventional term in the Prāti- śākhya literature. The term उभय- ह्रस्वा is similarly used in connection with short vowels. उभयनियम a restriction understood in both the ways; cf. सिद्धं तूभयनियमात् उभयनियमोयम् । प्रकृतिपर एव प्रत्ययः प्रयोक्तव्यः, प्रत्ययपरैव च प्रकृतिरिति । M. Bh. on P. III.1.2, Vārt. 11; cf also M. Bh. on VI.2.148. |
उभयपद (1) double voice--the Paras- maipada as well as the Ātmane- pada; (2) both the words or members (in a compound); cf. उभयपदार्थप्रधानो द्वन्द्वः Kāś on P.I.2.57. उभयपदिन् a root conjugated in both the Padas; a root to which both, the Parasmaipada and the Ātmanepada terminations are affixed; e.g. roots वृ, भी, मुच् etc. उभयप्राप्ति a case or a matter in which both the alternatives occur, as for instance, the genitive case for the subject and the object of a verbal derivative noun (कृदन्त); cf. उभयप्राप्तौ कर्मणि । उभयोः प्राप्तिः यस्मिन् कृति सोयमुभय- प्राप्तिः तत्र कर्मण्येव षष्ठी स्यात् न कर्तरि । आश्चर्यो गवां दोहः अगोपालकेन Kāś. on P. II.3.66. उभयवत् possessed of both the kinds of properties; cf. य इदानीमुभयवान् स तृतीयामाख्यां लभते स्वरित इति M.Bh. on P.I.2.81 ; cf. also उभयवान् स्वरितः V. Pr.I.110. उम् the augment उ， affixed to the last vowel of वच् by P.VII.4.20; e.g. अवोचत् उरच् tad-affix उर, with udātta accent on the last vowel, affixed to the word दन्त when it refers to protu- berant teeth; cf. P.V.2.66; e.g. दन्तुरः । उरःप्रभृति a class of words headed by the word उरस् to which the samā- sānta affix क (कप् ) is added, when these words stand at the end of Bahuvrihi compounds; cf. व्यूढमुरोस्य व्यूढोरस्कः similarly प्रियसर्पिष्कः, Kāś. on P.V.I.151. उरस्य produced at the breast; cf.केचि- देता उरस्या R.Pr.I.18, explained by the commentator as केचिदाचार्याः एतौ हकारविसर्जनीयौ उरःस्थाने इच्छन्ति । उरुता opening (of the hole of the throat); the words , उरुता स्वस्य are |
उरोबृहती
used in the sense of 'opening of the glottis' which is described as a characteristic condition of the utterance of a vowel accented grave or अनुदात्त; cf. आयामो दारुण्यमणुता स्वस्येत्युच्चैः कराणि शब्दस्य । अन्ववसर्गो मार्दव मुरुता स्वस्येति नीचैःकराणि शब्दस्य M.Bh. on नीचैरनुदात्तः P.I.2.30 cf. T. Pr. on XXII. 9, 10. उरोबृहती a variety of the Vedic metre बृहती in which the first pada con- sists of twelve syllables and the rest of eight syllables; cf. R. Pr. XVI. 33. उव् (उवङ्) substitute for the vowel उ belonging to the Vikaraṇa श्रु, to roots and to the noun भ्रू under certain conditions: cf अचि श्नुधातुर्भ्रुवां य्वोरियङुवङौ P.VI.4.77. उवट also उव्वट or ऊअट a reputed Kaāśmirian scholar and writer who was the son of Vajrata. He wrote many learned commentaries, some of which are known as Bhasyas. Some of his important works are Ṛkprātiśākhyabhāṣya, Vājasaneyī prātiśākhyabhāṣya, Vājasaneyīsa- mhitābhāṣya, Vedārthadīpika etc. उष्णिह् (उष्णिक्) name of the second of the main seven Vedic metres which are known by the name प्रजापतिच्छन्दस्. The Uṣṇik metre con- sists of 28 syllables divided into three padas of 8, 8 and 12 sylla bles. It has got many varieties such as पुरउष्णिह्, ककुभ् and others; for details see R. Pr. XVI 20-26. उस् (1) substitute for झि ending of the third pers.plu., in the perfect tense and in the present tense in the case of the roots विद् and ब्रू, e.g. विदुः and आहुः cf. P. III.4.82-84 ; (2) substitute जुस् (उस्) for झि in the potential and the benedictive moods, as also after the aorist sign स् and after roots of the third |
conjugation, roots ending in आ and the root विद्, e. g. पचेयुः भूयासुः अकार्षुः, अबिभयुः अदुः, अविदुः, etc.; cf. Kāś. on III.4.108-112. उसि Uṇādi afix उस् applied to the root जन् to form जनुस् cf. जनेरुसिः Uṇ- sūtra. 272. ऊ ऊ long vowel ऊ, उ being the short vowel. ऊक् augment ऊ added to the अभ्यास or the reduplicative syllable of the root पठ् which is doubled before the affix क which is used instead of घ ( घञर्थे कः ); e.g. पाटूपटः. ऊक् kṛt affix ऊक added to the root जागृ to form the word जागरूक; cf. जागुरूक; P. III.2.165. ऊङ् fem. affix ऊ prescribed after masculine nouns ending in the vowel ऊ and denoting a human be- ing as also after some other specific masculine bases cf ऊङुतः P.IV. I.66 and the following sūtras. e.g. कुरूः, पङ्गूः श्वश्रूः, करभोरूः, भद्रबाहूः etc. ऊट् also उट् āgama ऊ and उ prescrib- ed after the roots तृ and वृ before the affix तृन् or तृच् e. g. तरुतारं तरूतारं वा रथानाम्; वरुतारं वरूतारं वरूत्रीः; cf. Kāś. on P.VII.2.34. ऊठ् (1) saṁprasāraṇa vowel ऊ sub- stituted for the व् of वाह् under cer- tain conditions e.g., ऊढः, cf. वाह ऊठ् P.VI.4.132; (2) substitute ऊ for व् before certain affixes; e. g. द्यूतः, द्यूत्वा, जूर्तिः, तूर्तिः etc. cf. च्छ्वोः शूडनुनासिके च P.VI.4.19, 20. ऊत् (l) long vowel ऊ which cannot be combined by rules of saṁdhi with the following vowel when it comes at the end of the forms of the dual number e. g. साधू अत्र etc.; cf. ईदूदेद्विवचनं प्रगृह्यम् P.I.1.11, as ， also |
ऊत्व
ईदूतौ च सप्तम्यर्थे I.1.19; (2) long vowel ऊ substituted for the short उ of the root गोह् before an affix be- ginning with a vowel e. g. निगूहति; cf. ऊदुपधाया गोहः P. VI.4.89. ऊत्व substitution of the long vowel ऊ; see M. Bh. on P. I.1.12, VI.1.85. ऊदित् marked with the mute indica- tory letter ऊ; cf. स्वरतिसूतिसूयतिधूञूदितो वा । prescribing the addition of the augment इ optionally in the case of ऊदित् roots P. VII.2.44. ऊन deficient, wanting; often in com- pounds e.g. पादोन, ह्यून, एकोन; cf. व्यूहैः संपत्समीक्ष्योने R. Pr. VIII. 28; एकह्यूनाधिकता सैव निवृदूनाधिका भुरिक् R. Pr. XVII.1. ऊर्ध्वबृहती ( विराज् ) a variety of the metre Bṛhatī which has three padas of twelve syllables each; cf. त्रयो द्वादशका यस्याः सा होर्ध्ववृहती विराट् R. Pr. XVI.33. ऊर्यादि a class of words headed by the words ऊरी उररी etc. ending in the taddhita affix च्वि, which are given the designation गति provided they are related to a verbal acti- vity, and as a result, which can be compounded with kṛdanta words ending in त्वा, तुम्, etc. cf ऊरीकृत्य, ऊरीकृतम् etc.: Kāś on P, I.4.61. ऊल tad. affix applied to the words वात and बल in the sense of 'unable to bear'; e.g. वातूलः बलूल see Kāś. on V.2.122. ऊष्मन् aspiration letters, spirants call- ed breathings also: the name is given to letters or sounds produced with unintonated breath through an open posision of the mouth; cf. विवृतमूष्मणाम् M. Bh, on P.I.1.10 Vārt, 3. The word refers to the letters श्, ष्, सु, ह्, visarga, jihvāmū- līya, upadhmāniya and anusvāra; cf. ऊष्मा वायुस्तत्प्रधाना वर्णा ऊष्माणः R. Pr. I.12; cf. also T. Pr. I.10. |
ऊष्मसंधि name of a combination or संधि where a visarga is changed into a breathing ( ऊष्मन् ). It has got two varieties named व्यापन्न where the visarga is charged into a breathing as for instance in यस्ककुभः, while it is called विक्रान्त (passed over) where it remains unchanged as for instance in यः ककुभः, य: पञ्च; cf. R. Pr. IV. 1 1. ऊह modification of a word, in a Vedic Mantra, so as to suit the context in which the mantra is to be utilised, generally by change of case affixes; adaptation of a man- tra: cf. ऊहः खल्वपि । न सर्वैर्लिङ्गैर्न च सर्वाभिर्विभक्तिभिर्वेदे मन्त्रा निगदिताः । ते च अवश्यं यज्ञगतेन यथायथं विपरिणमयितव्याः । M. Bh. on P.1.1 Āhnika 1. ऋ ऋ fourth vowel in Pāṇini's alphabet; possessed of long and protracted varieties and looked upon as cognate ( सवर्ण ) with लृ which has no long type in the grammar of Pāṇini; cf. R.Pr.I,9: V.Pr.VIII.3. (2) uṇādi suffix च् applied to the root स्था to form the word स्थृ; e. g. सव्येष्ठा सारथिः; cf. सव्ये स्थश्छन्दसि Uṇ Sū, II. 101. ऋकार the letter ऋ with its 18 varieties made up of the ह्रस्व, दीर्घ, प्लुत, and सानुनासिक varieties and characteriz- ed by the three accents. ऋ and लृ are looked upon as cognate in Pāṇini's grammar and hence, ऋ could be looked upon as possessed of 30 varieties including 12 varie- ties of लृ. ऋक्तन्त्र a work consisting of five chap ters containing in all 287 sūtras. It covers the same topics as the Prāt- iśākhya works and is looked upon as one of the Prātiśākhya works of |
the Sāma Veda. Its authorship is attributed to Śākaṭāyana according to Nageśa, while औदिव्राज is held as its author by some, and कात्यायन by others. It bears a remarkable similarity to Pāṇini's Aṣṭādhyāyī especially in topics concerning co- alescence and changes of स् and न् to ष् and ण् respectively. It cannot be definitely said whether it pre- ceded or followed Pāṇini's work. ऋक्प्रातिशाख्य one of the Prātiśākhya works belonging to the Aśvalāyana Śākha of the Ṛg Veda. The work available at present, appears to be not a very old one,possibly written a century or so after Pāṇini's time. It is possible that the work, which is available, is based upon a few ancient Prātiśākhya works which are lost. Its authorship is attribu- ted to Śaunaka.The work is a metrical one and consists of three books or Adhyāyas, each Adhyāya being made up of six Paṭalas or chapters. It is written, just as the other Prātiśākhya works, with a view to give directions for the proper recitation of the Veda. It has got a scholarly commentary written by Uvaṭa and another one by Kumāra who is also called Viṣṇumitra. See अाश्वलायनप्रातिशाख्य. ऋगयनादि a class of words headed by ऋगयन to which the taddhita affix अण् (अ) is affixed in the sense of 'produced therein' ( तत्र भवः), or 'explanatory of' ( तस्य व्याख्यानः); cf. ऋगयने भव:, ऋगयनस्य व्याख्यानो वा अार्गयनः पादव्याख्यानः, औपनिषदः, शैक्ष: etc. Kāś. on P.IV. 3.73. ऋग्विराम verse-pause equal to 3 mātrākālas or three mātrā units. cf. ऋग्विरामः पदविरामो विवृत्तिविरामस्समान- पदविवृत्तिविरामः त्रिमात्रो द्विमात्र एकमात्रोर्धमात्र |
आनुपूर्व्येण T. Pr. XXII. 13. Accord- ing to Ṛk. Tantra it consists of two mātrās. ऋत् short vowel ऋ. before which the preceding vowel is optionally left as it is, i. e. without coalescence and shortened also if long; cf. ऋत्यकः P. VI.1.128. ऋत्वत् possessed of short ऋ; cf. रीगृत्वतः संयोगार्थम् P.VII.4.90. Vārt. 1. ऋदित् possessed of the mute indica- tory letter ऋ, signifying in the Grammar of Pāṇini the preven- tion of the shortening of the long vowel in the reduplicated syllable of the Causal Aorist form of roots which are marked with it; e. g. अशशासत् अबबाधत्, अययाचत् etc. cf. नाग्लोपिशास्वृदिताम् P.VII.4.2. ऋश्यादि a class of words headed by the word ऋश्य to which the tad- dhita affix क is added in the four senses prescribed in the rules IV. 2.67-70; e. g. ऋश्यकः, न्यग्रोधकः etc. cf. P.IV.2.80. ऋषिच्छन्द्स् the metre of the Vedic seers. The seven metres गायत्री, उष्णिक्, अनुष्टुप्, बृहती, पङ्क्ति, त्रिष्टुप् and जगती consisting respectively of 24, 28, 32, 36, 40, 44 and 48 syllables are named ऋषिच्छन्दस् as contrasted with the metres दैव, प्राजापत्य and आसुर, which, when combined to- gether, make the metres of the Vedic seers, For details see R. Pr. XVI.1.5. ऋष्यण् taddhita affix अण् in the sense of 'descendant' applied to names of ancient sages, by the rule ऋष्यन्धकवृष्णिकुरुभ्यश्च P.IV.1.114; e.g. वासिष्ठः,वैश्वामित्रः. ॠ ऋदन्त
एकद्रव्य 88
एकपद
एकवाक्य 89
एकविभक्ति
एकशेष 90
एकशेषानिर्देश एकादेश 91
एकादेशस्वर एणीकृत 92
एण्य ऐ 93
ऐकपदिक ऐन्द्र 94
ऐप् ओष्ठ्य 95
ओस् औपश्लेषिक 96
अौपसंख्यानिक ᳶ 97
^ क 98
ककार कण्ठ्य 99
कण्ड्वादि करण 100
करविणी कर्तृस्थभावक 101
कर्त्रभिप्राय
कर्मन् 102
कर्म
नामन्
कर्मव्यतिहार I03
कर्मसाधनं कलापिन् I04
कल्प
कसुन् I05
कसेन्
कातन्त्र I06
कातन्त्रकौमुदी कातन्त्रपरिशिष्टचन्द्रिका 107
कातन्त्रपरिशिष्टटीका कातन्त्रोत्तर 108
कात्थक्य कारक' 109
कारककारिका कारकवाद 110
कारकविचार कार्य 111
कार्यकाल काशकृत्स्न 112
काशादि कि '113'
किंवृत्त कु 114
कुक् कुमुदादि 115
कृताकृतप्रसङ्गि कृदभिहित 117
कृद्ग्रहण केन् 118
केन्य कोण्डभट्ट 119'
कोदण्डराम क्तिच् 120
क्तिन् क्यप् 121
क्यष् क्रमपाठ 122
क्रमादि क्रियावचन 123
'क्रियाविशेषण क्विन् 124
क्विप् क्षुभ्नादि 125
क्षेमंकर खञ् 126
खण्ड खिलपाठ 127
'खिष्णुच् गणपाठ 128
गणरत्नमहोदधि गत्यर्थ 129
गदा गलत्पद 130
गवादि गुण 131
गुणकर्मन् गुरु 132
गुरुमत् गोनर्दीय 133
गोपवनादि गोष्ठच् 134
गौण ग्रास 135
ग्स्नु घित् 136
घिनुण् ङि 137
ङित् च् 138
च चङ्गुदास 139
चण् चय् 140
चर् चर्चा 141
चर्चागुण चाप् 142
चारायण चिन्तामणि 143
चिन्तामणिप्रकाशिका चोरद् 144
चौरादिक छण् 145
छन्दस् जगन्नाथ 146
जटा जहत्स्वार्था 147
जहद्धर्मत्व जात्य 148
जामि जुमरनन्दिन् 149
जुस् ज्ञापक 150
ज्ञापकसमुच्चय ज्वलिति 151
rightञम् 152
ञि च्युद् 153
ट् टीटच् 154
टु ठकू 155
ठक् ठञ् 156
ठन् ड् 157
ड डाच् 158
डाप् ड्वुन् 159
ढ् ढञ् 160
ढिनुक् ण् 161
|